Mg33mi02

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE
Programming Guide
VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302
www.danfoss.com/drives
Contents VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
Contents
1 Introduction 3
1.1 Software Version 3
1.2 Approvals 3
1.3 Symbols 3
1.4 Definitions 4
1.4.1 Frequency Converter 4
1.4.2 Input 4
1.4.3 Motor 4
1.4.4 References 5
1.4.5 Miscellaneous 5
1.5 Safety 7
1.6 Electrical Wiring 9
2 How to Programme 12
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local Control Panels 12
2.1.1 The LCD-Display 13
2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequency Converters 14
2.1.3 Display Mode 15
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-Outs 15
2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up 16
2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions 16
2.1.7 Initial Commissioning 17
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 19
2.1.9 Parameter Selection 19
2.1.10 Changing Data 20
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value 20
2.1.12 Changing 20
2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of Numeric Data Value 20
2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step 20
2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of Indexed Parameters 20
2.1.16 LCP Keys 22
2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings 22
3 Parameter Descriptions 24
3.1 Parameter Selection 24
3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 25
3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 36
3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes 57
3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 64
3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 74
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 1

Contents VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out 80

3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 100
3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 108
3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and Options 114
3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus 123
3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus 123
3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet 123
3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control 124
3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions 142
3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 153
3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs 159
3.18 Parameters: 17-** Motor Feedb. Option 165
3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2 167
3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 168
3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 171
4 Parameter Lists 174

4.1 Parameter Lists and Options 174
4.1.1 Introduction 174
4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes 175
5 Troubleshooting 211
5.1 Status Messages 211
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages 211
Index 223
2 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Introduction VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
1 Introduction 1 1
1.1 Software Version CM Common mode

CT Constand Torque
Programming Guide DC Direct current
Software version: 7.11 DI Digital Input
DM Differential mode
This Programming Guide can be used for all FC 300 frequency D-TYPE Drive Dependent
converters with software version 7.11. EMC Electro Magnetic Compatibility
The software version number can be seen from ETR Electronic Thermal Relay
parameter 15-43 Software Version. fJOG Motor frequency when jog function is
activated
Table 1.1 Software Version
fM Motor frequency
fMAX The maximum output frequency the frequency
1.2 Approvals converter applies on its output
fMIN The minimum motor frequency from
frequency converter
fM,N Nominal motor frequency
FC Frequency converter
g Gram
Hiperface Hiperface is a registered trademark by
Stegmann
hp Horsepower
HTL HTL encoder (10-30 V) pulses - High-voltage
1.3 Symbols Transistor Logic
Hz Hertz
The following symbols are used in this manual. IINV Rated Inverter Output Current
WARNING ILIM
IM,N
Current limit
Nominal motor current
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could
IVLT,MAX The maximum output current
result in death or serious injury.
IVLT,N The rated output current supplied by the
frequency converter
CAUTION kHz Kilohertz
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which could LCP Local Control Panel
result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used lsb Least significant bit
to alert against unsafe practices. m Meter
mA Milliampere
NOTICE MCM Mille Circular Mil
MCT Motion Control Tool
Indicates important information, including situations that
mH Millihenry Inductance
may result in damage to equipment or property.
min Minute
ms Millisecond
1.3.1 Abbreviations msb Most significant bit
VLT Efficiency of the frequency converter defined
60 AVM 60 Asynchronous Vector Modulation
as ratio between power output and power
A Ampere/AMP
input
AC Alternating current
nF Nanofarad
AD Air discharge
NLCP Numerical Local Control Panel
AI Analog Input
Nm Newton Meters
AMA Automatic Motor Adaptation
ns Synchronous Motor Speed
AWG American wire gauge
On-line/Off-line Changes to on-line parameters are activated
C Degrees Celsius Parameters immediately after the data value is changed.
CD Contant discharge
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 3

1 1 Pbr,cont. Rated power of the brake resistor (average IVLT,N

power during continuous braking) Rated output current supplied by the frequency converter.
PCB Printed Circuit Board
UVLT,MAX
PCD Process Data Maximum output voltage.
PELV Protective Extra Low Voltage
Pm Frequency converter nominal output power as
1.4.2 Input
HO
PM,N Nominal motor power
Control command
PM motor Permanent Magnet motor
Start and stop the connected motor by means of LCP and
Process PID The PID regulator maintains the desired speed,
digital inputs.
pressure, temperature, etc.
Functions are divided into 2 groups.
Rbr,nom The nominal resistor value that ensures a
brake power on motor shaft of 150/160% for 1 Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in
minute group 2.
RCD Residual Current Device
Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,
Regen Regenerative terminals Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [OFF] key.
Rmin Minimum permissible brake resistor value by Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog
frequency converter and Freeze output
RMS Root Mean Square
RPM Revolutions Per Minute Table 1.3 Function Groups
Rrec Resistor value and resistance of the brake
resistor 1.4.3 Motor
s Second
SFAVM Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous Vector Motor Running
Modulation Torque generated on output shaft and speed from zero
STW Status Word RPM to max. speed on motor.
SMPS Switch Mode Power Supply
fJOG
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
Motor frequency when the jog function is activated (via
TLIM Torque limit digital terminals).
TTL TTL encoder (5 V) pulses - Transistor Transistor
fM
Logic
Motor frequency.
UM,N Nominal motor voltage
V Volts fMAX
VT Variable Torque Maximum motor frequency.
VVCplus Voltage Vector Control fMIN
Minimum motor frequency.
Table 1.2 Abbreviations
fM,N
Conventions Rated motor frequency (nameplate data).
Numbered lists indicate procedures. IM
Bullet lists indicate other information and description of Motor current (actual).
illustrations.
IM,N
Italicised text indicates
Rated motor current (nameplate data).
cross reference
nM,N
link Rated motor speed (nameplate data).
footnote ns
parameter name, parameter group name, Synchronous motor speed
parameter option ns =
2 par . 1 23 60 s
par . 1 39
1.4 Definitions nslip
Motor slip.
1.4.1 Frequency Converter
PM,N
Rated motor power (nameplate data in kW or hp).
IVLT,MAX
Maximum output current. TM,N
Rated torque (motor).
4 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

UM RefMIN 1 1
Instantaneous motor voltage. Determines the relationship between the reference input
at 0% value (typically 0 V, 0 mA, 4 mA) and the resulting
UM,N
reference. The minimum reference value set in
Rated motor voltage (nameplate data).
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference.
Torque
175ZA078.10
Pull-out 1.4.5 Miscellaneous
Analog Inputs
The analog inputs are used for controlling various
functions of the frequency converter.
There are 2 types of analog inputs:
Current input, 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA
Voltage input, -10 to +10 V DC.
Analog Outputs
The analog outputs can supply a signal of 0-20 mA, 4-20
mA.
rpm Automatic Motor Adaptation, AMA
Illustration 1.1 Break-away Torque AMA algorithm determines the electrical parameters for
the connected motor at standstill.
Brake Resistor
Break-away torque The brake resistor is a module capable of absorbing the
VLT brake power generated in regenerative braking. This
The efficiency of the frequency converter is defined as the regenerative braking power increases the intermediate
ratio between the power output and the power input. circuit voltage and a brake chopper ensures that the
power is transmitted to the brake resistor.
Start-disable command
A stop command belonging to the group 1 control CT Characteristics
commands - see Table 1.3. Constant torque characteristics used for all applications
such as conveyor belts, displacement pumps and cranes.
Stop command
See Control commands. Digital Inputs
The digital inputs can be used for controlling various
1.4.4 References functions of the frequency converter.
Digital Outputs
Analog Reference The frequency converter features 2 Solid State outputs that
A signal transmitted to the analog inputs 53 or 54, can be can supply a 24 V DC (max. 40 mA) signal.
voltage or current. DSP
Binary Reference Digital Signal Processor.
A signal transmitted to the serial communication port. ETR
Preset Reference Electronic Thermal Relay is a thermal load calculation
A defined preset reference to be set from -100% to +100% based on present load and time. Its purpose is to estimate
of the reference range. Selection of 8 preset references via the motor temperature.
the digital terminals.
Hiperface
Pulse Reference Hiperface is a registered trademark by Stegmann.
A pulse frequency signal transmitted to the digital inputs
Initialising
(terminal 29 or 33).
If initialising is carried out (parameter 14-22 Operation
RefMAX Mode), the frequency converter returns to the default
Determines the relationship between the reference input setting.
at 100% full scale value (typically 10 V, 20 mA) and the
Intermittent Duty Cycle
resulting reference. The maximum reference value set in
An intermittent duty rating refers to a sequence of duty
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
cycles. Each cycle consists of an on-load and an off-load
period. The operation can be either periodic duty or non-
periodic duty.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 5

1 1 LCP Smart Logic Control (SLC)

The Local Control Panel makes up a complete interface for The SLC is a sequence of user-defined actions executed
control and programming of the frequency converter. The when the associated user-defined events are evaluated as
control panel is detachable and can be installed up to 3 m true by the Smart Logic Control. (Parameter group 13-**
from the frequency converter, i.e. in a front panel with the Smart Logic Control (SLC).
installation kit option.
STW
NLCP Status Word
Numerical Local Control Pandel interface for control and FC Standard Bus
programming of the frequency converter. The display is Includes RS-485 bus with FC protocol or MC protocol. See
numerical and the panel is used to display process values. 8-30 Protocol.
The NLCP has no storing and copy functions.
THD
lsb Total Harmonic Distortion states the total contribution of
Least significant bit. harmonic.
msb Thermistor
Most significant bit. A temperature-dependent resistor placed where the
MCM temperature is to be monitored (frequency converter or
Short for Mille Circular Mil, an American measuring unit for motor).
cable cross-section. 1 MCM = 0.5067mm2. Trip
On-line/Off-line Parameters A state entered in fault situations, e.g. if the frequency
Changes to on-line parameters are activated immediately converter is subject to an over-temperature or when the
after the data value is changed. Press [OK] to activate frequency converter is protecting the motor, process or
changes to off-line parameters. mechanism. Restart is prevented until the cause of the
fault has disappeared and the trip state is cancelled by
Process PID
activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
The PID control maintains the desired speed, pressure,
to reset automatically. Trip may not be used for personal
temperature, etc. by adjusting the output frequency to
safety.
match the varying load.
Trip Locked
PCD
A state entered in fault situations when the frequency
Process Control Data
converter is protecting itself and requiring physical
Power Cycle intervention, e.g. if the frequency converter is subject to a
Switch off the mains until display (LCP) is dark then turn short circuit on the output. A locked trip can only be
power on again. cancelled by disconnecting mains, removing the cause of
Pulse Input/Incremental Encoder the fault, and reconnecting the frequency converter.
An external, digital pulse transmitter used for feeding back Restart is prevented until the trip state is cancelled by
information on motor speed. The encoder is used in activating reset or, in some cases, by being programmed
applications where great accuracy in speed control is to reset automatically. The Trip Locked state may not be
required. used for personal safety.
RCD VT Characteristics
Residual Current Device. Variable torque characteristics used for pumps and fans.
Set-up VVCplus
Save parameter settings in 4 Set-ups. Change between the If compared with standard voltage/frequency ratio control,
4 parameter Set-ups and edit one Set-up, while another Voltage Vector Control (VVCplus) improves the dynamics
Set-up is active. and the stability, both when the speed reference is
changed and in relation to the load torque.
SFAVM
Switching pattern called Stator Flux oriented Asynchronous 60 AVM
Vector Modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern). Switching pattern called 60 Asynchronous Vector
Modulation (parameter 14-00 Switching Pattern).
Slip Compensation
The frequency converter compensates for the motor slip Power Factor
by giving the frequency a supplement that follows the The power factor is the relation between I1 and IRMS.
measured motor load keeping the motor speed almost 3 x U x I 1 cos
Power factor =
constant. 3 x U x IRMS
The power factor for 3-phase control:
I1 x cos1 I1
= = since cos1 = 1
IRMS IRMS
6 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

The power factor indicates to which extent the frequency Warning against unintended start 1 1
converter imposes a load on the mains supply. 1. The motor can be stopped with digital
The lower the power factor, the higher the IRMS for the commands, bus commands, references or a local
same kW performance. stop, while the frequency converter is connected
to mains. These stop functions are not sufficient
IRMS = I2 2 2 2
1 + I 5 + I 7 + .. + I n to prevent unintended motor start and thus
In addition, a high power factor indicates that the different prevent personal injury caused by e.g. contact
harmonic currents are low. with moving parts. To consider personal safety,
The frequency converters' built-in DC coils produce a high disconnect the mains supply or activate the Safe
power factor, which minimizes the imposed load on the Torque Off function.
mains supply.
2. The motor may start while setting the
1.5 Safety parameters. If this compromises personal safety
(e.g. personal injury caused by contact with
WARNING moving machine parts). Prevent motor starting,
The voltage of the frequency converter is dangerous for instance by use of the Safe Torque Off
whenever connected to mains. Incorrect installation of function or secure disconnection of the motor
the motor, frequency converter or fieldbus may cause connection.
death, serious personal injury or damage to the 3. A motor that has been stopped with the mains
equipment. Consequently, the instructions in this supply connected, may start if faults occur in the
manual, as well as national and local rules and safety electronics of the frequency converter, through
regulations, must be complied with. temporary overload, or if a fault in the power
supply grid or motor connection is remedied. If
Safety Regulations unintended start must be prevented for personal
1. Disconnect mains supply to the frequency safety reasons (e.g. risk of injury caused by
converter whenever repair work is to be carried contact with moving machine parts), the normal
out. Check that the mains supply has been stop functions of the frequency converter are not
disconnected and that the necessary time has sufficient. In such cases, disconnect mains supply
elapsed before removing motor and mains supply or activate Safe Torque Off.
plugs.
NOTICE
2. [Off] does not disconnect the mains supply and When using Safe Torque Off, always follow the
consequently, it must not be used as a safety instructions in Safe Torque Off Operating Instructions for
switch.
Danfoss VLT Frequency Converters.
3. Ground the equipment properly, protect the user
against supply voltage and protect the motor 4. Control signals from, or internally within, the
against overload in accordance with applicable frequency converter may in rare cases be
national and local regulations. activated in error, be delayed or fail to occur
4. The earth leakage current exceeds 3.5 mA. entirely. When used in situations where safety is
critical, e.g. when controlling the electromagnetic
5. Protection against motor overload is not included
brake function of a hoist application, these
in the factory setting. If this function is desired,
control signals must not be relied on exclusively.
set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to
data value [4] ETR trip 1 or data value [3] ETR
warning 1.
6. Do not remove the plugs for the motor and
mains supply while the frequency converter is
connected to mains. Check that the mains supply
has been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before removing motor and
mains plugs.
7. The frequency converter has more voltage
sources than L1, L2 and L3, when load sharing
(linking of DC intermediate circuit) or external 24
V DC are installed. Check that all voltage sources
have been disconnected and that the necessary
time has elapsed before commencing repair work.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 7

1 1 WARNING circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with

relevant standards, e.g.
High Voltage Hoists and cranes: IEC 60204-32
Touching the electrical parts may be fatal - even after Lifts: EN 81
the equipment has been disconnected from mains.
Also make sure that other voltage inputs have been Protection Mode
disconnected, such as external 24 V DC, load sharing Once a hardware limit on motor current or DC link voltage
(linkage of DC intermediate circuit), as well as the motor is exceeded, the frequency converter enters the protection
connection for kinetic back up. mode. Protection mode means a change of the PWM
Systems where frequency converters are installed must, modulation strategy and a low switching frequency to
if necessary, be equipped with additional monitoring minimise losses. This continues for 10 s after the last fault
and protective devices according to the valid safety and increases the reliability and the robustness of the
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for frequency converter while re-establishing full control of the
the prevention of accidents etc. Modifications on the motor.
frequency converters by means of the operating In hoist applications, protection mode is not usable
software are allowed. because the frequency converter usually is unable to leave
this mode again and therefore it extends the time before
NOTICE activating the brake, which is not recommended.
Hazardous situations shall be identified by the machine Protection mode can be disabled by setting
builder/integrator who is responsible for taking parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault to zero which
necessary preventive means into consideration. means that the frequency converter trips immediately, if
Additional monitoring and protective devices may be one of the hardware limits is exceeded.
included, always according to valid national safety NOTICE
regulations, e.g. law on mechanical tools, regulations for
It is recommended to disable Protection mode in
the prevention of accidents.
hoisting applications (parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at
Inverter Fault = 0)
Crane, Lifts and Hoists
The controlling of external brakes must always have a
redundant system. The frequency converter can in no
8 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1.6 Electrical Wiring 1 1
130BC931.10
91 (L1) (U) 96
3 Phase 92 (L2) (V) 97
power
input 93 (L3) (W) 98
95 PE (PE) 99
Motor
88 (-) Switch Mode

DC bus
Power Supply
89 (+)
10Vdc 24Vdc (R+) 82 Brake
15mA 130/200mA resistor
50 (+10 V OUT) + - + -
+10Vdc (R-) 81
S201
0/-10Vdc -
1 2
53 (A IN)
ON
+10Vdc relay1
ON=0/4-20mA
0/4-20 mA S202 03
OFF=0/-10Vdc -
1 2
0/-10Vdc - +10Vdc
ON
54 (A IN) 240Vac, 2A
+10Vdc 02
0/4-20 mA
55 (COM A IN) 01
* relay2
12 (+24V OUT) 06
240Vac, 2A
13 (+24V OUT) P 5-00 05
400Vac, 2A
24V (NPN)
18 (D IN) 04
0V (PNP)
24V (NPN)
19 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM A OUT) 39 Analog Output
0/4-20 mA
(A OUT) 42
20 (COM D IN)
24V (NPN)
27 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP) S801
24V ON=Terminated
1 2
ON
OFF=Open
0V 5V
* 24V (NPN)
29 (D IN/OUT) 0V (PNP)
24V
S801 0V
0V
RS-485 RS-485
(N RS-485) 69
24V (NPN) Interface
32 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (P RS-485) 68
24V (NPN) **
33 (D IN) 0V (PNP) (COM RS-485) 61
: Chassis
* : Earth
37 (D IN)
Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing
A=Analog, D=Digital
Terminal 37 is used for Safe Torque Off. For Safe Torque Off installation instructions, refer to the Operating Instructions.
* Terminal 37 is not included in FC 301 (except enclosure type A1). Relay 2 and terminal 29 have no function in FC 301.
** Do not connect cable screen.
Very long control cables and analog signals may in rare cases and depending on installation result in 50/60 Hz earth loops
due to noise from mains supply cables.
If this occurs, it may be necessary to break the screen or insert a 100 nF capacitor between screen and chassis.
The digital and analog inputs and outputs must be connected separately to the common inputs (terminal 20, 55, 39) of the
frequency converter to avoid ground currents from both groups to affect other groups. For example, switching on the
digital input may disturb the analog input signal.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 9

1 1 Input polarity of control terminals
130BA681.10
PNP (Source)
130BT106.10
+24 VDC
Digital input wiring
0 VDC
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

+24 VDC
130BT107.11
0 VDC
NPN (Sink)
Digital input wiring Illustration 1.5 Earthing of Screened/Armoured Control Cables
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
1.6.1 Start/Stop
Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No
operation (Default coast inverse)
Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available)
130BA155.12
P 5-10 [8]
P 5-12 [0]
+24V
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)
NOTICE Start/Stop Safe Stop
Control cables must be screened/armoured.

Speed
See section Grounding of Screened Control Cables in the

Design Guide for the correct termination of control cables.
Start/Stop
[18]
Illustration 1.6 Start/Stop
10 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1.6.2 Pulse Start/Stop 1 1
130BA021.12
12 +24V
Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, [9] Latched

start. 18 Par. 5-10
Terminal 27= 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, [6] Stop inverse.

Terminal 37 = Safe Torque Off (where available). 27 Par. 5-12
130BA156.12
P 5 - 12 [6]
P 5 - 10[9]
29 Par. 5-13
+24V
32 Par. 5-14
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
37
Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down
Start Stop inverse Safe Stop

1.6.4 Potentiometer Reference
Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Reference Source 1 = [1] Analog input 53 (default)
Speed
Terminal 53, Low Voltage = 0 V
Terminal 53, High Voltage = 10 V
Terminal 53, Low Ref./Feedback = 0 RPM
Terminal 53, High Ref./Feedback = 1500 RPM
Switch S201 = OFF (U)
Start (18)
+10V/30mA
130BA154.11
Start (27)
Speed RPM
P 6-15 39 42 50 53 54 55
Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop
1.6.3 Speed Up/Down Ref. voltage

P 6-11 10V
Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [9] 1 k
Start (default)
Illustration 1.9 Potentiometer Reference
Terminal 27 = 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [19]
Freeze reference
Speed up
Speed down
NOTICE
Terminal 29 only in FC x02 (x=series type).
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 11

How to Programme VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
2 How to Programme
2 2
2.1 The Graphical and Numerical Local
130BA018.13
Control Panels
The easiest programming of the frequency converter is
performed by the graphical LCP (LCP 102). Consult the Status 1(0) a
frequency converter Design Guide, when using the Numeric 1234rpm 10,4A 43,5Hz
Local Control Panel (LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups: 1 b
1. Graphical display with Status lines. 43,5Hz
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing
parameters and switching between display c
Run OK
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
Quick Main Alarm
2 Status
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs). Menu Menu Log
All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can

show up to 5 items of operating data while displaying
[Status].
Ca
ck
n
Ba
ce
l
Display lines:
a. Status line: Status messages displaying icons and
graphic.
Info
3 On OK
b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data

Warn.
defined or selected by the user. By pressing
[Status], up to one extra line can be added. Alarm
c. Status line: Status messages displaying text.
NOTICE 4
Hand
on Off
Auto
on Reset
If some operation is delaying the start-up, the LCP

displays the INITIALISING message until it is ready.
Adding or removing options may delay the start-up. Illustration 2.1 Control Panel (LCP)
12 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

2.1.1 The LCD-Display
130BP044.10
2 2
The LCD-display has backlight and a total of 6 alpha-
numeric lines. The display lines show the direction of
rotation (arrow), the selected set-up as well as the
On
programming set-up. The display is divided into 3 sections.
Top section
Warn.
shows up to 2 measurements in normal operating status.
Middle section
The top line shows up to 5 measurements with related
Alarm
Illustration 2.3 Indicator lights (LEDs)
unit, regardless of status (except in the case of alarm/
warning).
Bottom section LCP Keys
always shows the state of the frequency converter in The control keys are divided into functions. The keys
Status mode. below the display and indicator lamps are used for
parameter Set-up, including choice of display indication
130BP074.10
Status ! 1(1)
Top section during normal operation.
43 RPM 5.44 A 25.3kW
130BP045.10
Quick Main Alarm
Status
1.4 Hz Menu Menu Log
Middle section
2.9%
Illustration 2.4 LCP Keys
! Pwr.card temp (W29)
Bottom section
Auto Remote Running
[Status]
Illustration 2.2 Bottom Section
indicates the status of the frequency converter and/or the
motor. Select between 3 different readouts by pressing
[Status]: 5 line readouts, 4 line readouts or Smart Logic
The active set-up (selected as the active set-up in Control.
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) is shown. When programming Press [Status] for selecting the mode of display or for
another set-up than the active set-up, the number of the changing back to Display mode from either the Quick
programmed set-up appears to the right. Menu mode, the Main Menu mode or Alarm mode. Also
use [Status] to toggle single or double read-out mode.
Display contrast adjustment
[Quick Menu]
Press [Status] and [] for darker display
allows quick access to different Quick Menus such as Quick
Press [Status] and [] for brighter display
Menu
Most parameter set-ups can be changed immediately via
the LCP, unless a password has been created via
My Personal Menu
parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via Quick Set-up

parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password. Changes Made
Indicator lights (LEDs) Loggings
If certain threshold values are exceeded, the alarm and/or
Press [Quick Menu] to program the parameters belonging
warning LED lights up. A status and alarm text appear on
to the Quick Menu. It is possible to switch directly
the LCP.
between Quick Menu mode and Main Menu mode.
The ON LED is activated when the frequency converter
receives mains voltage or via a DC bus terminal or 24 V [Main Menu]
external supply. At the same time, the back light is on. is used for programming all parameters.
It is possible to switch directly between Main Menu mode
Green LED/On: Control section is working.
and Quick Menu mode.
Yellow LED/Warn.: Indicates a warning. Parameter shortcut can be carried out by pressing down
Flashing Red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. [Main Menu] for 3 seconds. The parameter shortcut allows
direct access to any parameter.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 13

[Alarm Log] [Hand On]

displays an Alarm list of the 5 latest alarms (numbered A1- enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
A5). To obtain additional details about an alarm, use the [Hand On] also starts the motor, and it is now possible to
2 2 navigation keys to manoeuvre to the alarm number and enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
press [OK]. Information is displayed about the condition of can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand
the frequency converter before it enters the alarm mode. on] Key on LCP
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
[Back]
reverts to the previous step or layer in the navigation serial bus override a start command via the LCP.
structure. The following control signals are still active when [Hand
On] is activated
[Cancel]
last change or command is cancelled as long as the [Hand on] - [Off] - [Auto On]
display has not been changed. Reset
[Info] Coasting stop inverse
supplies information about a command, parameter, or
function in any display window. [Info] provides detailed
Reversing
information whenever help is needed. Set-up select bit 0 - Set-up select bit 1
Exit info mode by pressing either [Info], [Back], or [Cancel]. Stop command from serial communication
Quick stop
Back
DC brake
Illustration 2.5 Back [Off]
stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP. If
no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
Cancel
voltage.
Illustration 2.6 Cancel [Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a
start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
Info bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
Illustration 2.7 Info parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
Navigation Keys
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
The 4 navigation keys are used to navigate between the
[Auto On].
different choices available in [Quick Menu], [Main Menu]
and [Alarm Log]. Use the keys to move the cursor.
[Reset]
[OK] is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
is used for selecting a parameter marked by the cursor and (trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
for enabling the change of a parameter. parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
Local Control Keys The parameter shortcut can be carried out by holding
for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP. down the [Main Menu] key for 3 seconds. The parameter
shortcut allows direct access to any parameter.
130BP046.10
Hand Auto
on
Off
on
Reset 2.1.2 Quick Transfer of Parameter Settings
between Multiple Frequency
Illustration 2.8 Local Control Keys
Converters
Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,

store the data in the LCP or on a PC via MCT 10 Set-up
Software Tool.
14 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

2.1.3 Display Mode
130BA027.10
2 2
Quick Main Alarm In normal operation, up to 5 different operating variables
Status Menu Menu Log
can be indicated continuously in the middle section: 1.1,
1.2, and 1.3 as well as 2 and 3.
2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-
Ca
ck
nc
Outs
Ba
el It is possible to toggle between 3 status read-out screens

Info
by pressing [Status].
On OK
Operating variables with different formatting are shown in
each status screen - see below.
Warn.
Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to

Alarm
each of the operating variables. When options are
mounted, additional measurements are available. Define
Hand Auto the links via parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small,
Off Reset
on on 0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large, and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
Illustration 2.9 LCP

Each readout parameter selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small to 0-24 Display Line 3 Large has its own scale
and digits after a possible decimal point. By larger numeric
Data storage in LCP value of a parameter fewer digits are displayed after the
NOTICE decimal point.
Stop the motor before performing this operation. Ex.: Current readout 5.25 A; 15.2 A 105 A.
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy
2. Press the [OK] key Operating variable Unit
Parameter 16-00 Control Word hex
3. Select [1] All to LCP
Parameter 16-01 Reference [Unit] [unit]
4. Press the [OK] key Parameter 16-02 Reference [%] %
All parameter settings are now stored in the LCP indicated Parameter 16-03 Status Word hex
by the progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK]. Parameter 16-05 Main Actual Value [%] %
Parameter 16-10 Power [kW] [kW]
Connect the LCP to another frequency converter and copy Parameter 16-11 Power [hp] [HP]
the parameter settings to this frequency converter as well. Parameter 16-12 Motor Voltage [V]
Parameter 16-13 Frequency [Hz]
Data transfer from LCP to frequency converter Parameter 16-14 Motor current [A]
NOTICE Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm] Nm

Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM] [RPM]
Stop the motor before performing this operation.
Parameter 16-18 Motor Thermal %
1. Go to 0-50 LCP Copy
Parameter 16-20 Motor Angle
2. Press the [OK] key Parameter 16-30 DC Link Voltage V
3. Select [2] All from LCP Parameter 16-32 Brake Energy /s kW
Parameter 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min kW
4. Press the [OK] key
Parameter 16-34 Heatsink Temp. C
The parameter settings stored in the LCP are now Parameter 16-35 Inverter Thermal %
transferred to the frequency converter indicated by the
Parameter 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current A
progress bar. When 100% is reached, press [OK].
Parameter 16-37 Inv. Max. Current A
Parameter 16-38 SL Controller State
parameter 16-39 Control Card Temp. C
Parameter 16-40 Logging Buffer Full
Parameter 16-50 External Reference
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 15

Operating variable Unit
130BP062.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-51 Pulse Reference 207RPM 5.25A 24.4 kW
2 2
Parameter 16-52 Feedback[Unit] [Unit] 1.1
Parameter 16-53 Digi Pot Reference 6.9 Hz

1.3
Parameter 16-60 Digital Input bin
Parameter 16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting V 1.2
Auto Remote Running
Parameter 16-62 Analog Input 53
Parameter 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting V 2
Parameter 16-64 Analog Input 54
parameter 16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] [mA] Illustration 2.11 Status Screen II
Parameter 16-66 Digital Output [bin] [bin]
Parameter 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz] [Hz]
Parameter 16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] [Hz] Status Screen III
Parameter 16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] [Hz] This state displays the event and action of the Smart Logic
Parameter 16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] [Hz] Control. For further information, see
Parameter 16-71 Relay Output [bin] chapter 3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control.
Parameter 16-72 Counter A
130BP063.10
Status 1 (1)
Parameter 16-73 Counter B 778 RPM 0.86 A 4.0 kW
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 hex
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 hex State: 0 off 0 (off )
When: -
16-84 Comm. Option STW hex Do: -
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 hex
Auto Remote Running
16-86 FC Port REF 1 hex
16-90 Alarm Word Illustration 2.12 Status Screen III
16-92 Warning Word
Parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word
2.1.5 Parameter Set-Up
Table 2.1 Measurements
The frequency converter can be used for practically all
Status Screen I assignments. The frequency converter offers a choice
This read-out state is standard after start-up or initiali- between 2 programming modes - a Main Menu and a
sation. Quick Menu mode.
Press [Info] to obtain information about the measurement The former provides access to all parameters. The latter
links to the displayed operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2 takes the user through a few parameters making it
and 3). possible to start operating the frequency converter.
See the operating variables shown in Illustration 2.10. Change a parameter in either Main Menu mode or Quick
Menu mode.
130BP041.10
Status 1 (1)
799 RPM 7.83 A 36.4 kw
1.1 2.1.6 Quick Menu Key Functions
0.000
1.2 Press [Quick Menus] to see a list of different areas
53.2 % contained in the Quick menu.
Auto Remote Ramping
2 Select My Personal Menu to display the selected personal
parameters. These parameters are selected in
3 1.3 parameter 0-25 My Personal Menu. Up to 50 different
parameters can be added in this menu.
Illustration 2.10 Status Screen I
Status Screen II
See the operating variables (1.1, 1.2, 1.3 and 2) shown in
Illustration 2.11.
In the example, speed, motor current, motor power and
frequency are selected as variables in the first and second
lines.
16 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Select Changes made to get information about:
130BC916.10
0RPM 0.00A 1(1)
Quick Menus
the last 10 changes. Use the [] [] navigation
Q1 My Personal Menu
Q2 Quick Setup keys to scroll between the last 10 changed 2 2
Q4 Smart Setup parameters.
Q5 Changes Made the changes made since default setting.
Illustration 2.13 Quick Menus Select Loggings to get information about the display line
read-outs. The information is shown as graphs.
Only display parameters selected in parameter 0-20 Display
Line 1.1 Small and 0-24 Display Line 3 Large can be viewed.
Select Q2 Quick Setup to go through a limited amount of
It is possible to store up to 120 samples in the memory for
parameters to get the motor running almost optimally. The
later reference.
default setting for the other parameters considers the
desired control functions and the configuration of signal
inputs/outputs (control terminals).
The parameter selection is effected with the navigation

keys. The parameters in Table 2.2 are accessible.
Parameter Setting
Parameter 0-01 Language
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] [kW]
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage [V]
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency [Hz]
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current [A]
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed [RPM]
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input [0] No function*
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor [1] Enable complete
Adaptation (AMA) AMA
Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference [RPM]
Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time [s]
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down [s]
Time
Parameter 3-13 Reference Site
Table 2.2 Selection of Parameter

* If terminal 27 is set to [0] No function, no connection to +24 V on
terminal 27 is necessary.
2.1.7 Initial Commissioning
The easiest way of carrying out the initial commissioning is by pressing [Quick Menu] and following the quick set-up
procedure using LCP 102 (read Table 2.3 from left to right). The example applies to open loop applications.
Press
Quick
Menu Q2 Quick Menu OK
Parameter 0-01 Language OK Set language
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] OK Set Motor nameplate power
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 17

Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage OK Set Nameplate voltage
2 2 Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency OK Set Nameplate frequency
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current OK Set Nameplate current
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed OK Set Nameplate speed in RPM
If terminal default is Coast

inverse it is possible to change
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input OK this setting to No function. No
connection to terminal 27 is
then needed for running AMA
Set desired AMA function.
Parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor
OK Enable complete AMA is
Adaptation (AMA)
recommended
Set the minimum speed of the

Parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference OK
motor shaft
Set the maximum speed of the

Parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference OK
motor shaft
Set the ramping up time with

Parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up
OK reference to synchronous
Time
motor speed, ns
Set the ramping down time
Parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
OK with reference to synchronous
Time
motor speed, ns
Set the site from where the

Parameter 3-13 Reference Site OK
reference must work
Table 2.3 Quick Set-up Procedure
18 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Another easy way of commissioning the frequency All parameters can be changed in the Main Menu.
converter is by using the Smart Application Setup (SAS), However, depending on the choice of configuration
which can also be found under the Quick Menu. Follow (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), some parameters can
the indications on the successive screens for setting up the be "missing". E.g. open loop hides all the PID parameters, 2 2
applications listed. and other enabled options make more parameter groups
visible.
[Info] can be used throughout the SAS to see help
information for various selections, settings, and messages. 2.1.9 Parameter Selection
The following 3 applications are included:
In the Main menu mode, the parameters are divided into
Mechanical Brake groups. Select a parameter group with the navigation keys.
The following parameter groups are accessible:
Conveyor
Pump/Fan
Group no. Parameter group
The following 4 field-busses can be selected: 0-** Operation/Display
Profibus 1-** Load/Motor
Profinet 2-** Brakes

3-** References/Ramps
DeviceNet 4-** Limits/Warnings
EthernetIP 5-** Digital In/Out
NOTICE 6-** Analog In/Out
7-** Controls
The start conditions are ignored while in the wizard.
8-** Comm. and Options
9-** Profibus
NOTICE 10-** CAN Fieldbus
The Smart Set-up runs automatically on the first power- 11-** Reserved Com. 1
up of the frequency converter or after a reset to factory 12-** Ethernet
settings. If no action is taken, the SAS screen automat- 13-** Smart Logic
ically disappears after 10 min. 14-** Special Functions
15-** Drive Information
2.1.8 Main Menu Mode 16-** Data Readouts
17-** Motor Feedb. Option
Start the Main Menu mode by pressing [Main Menu]. The 18-** Data Readouts 2
read-out shown below appears on the display. 30-** Special Features
The middle and bottom sections on the display show a list 32-** MCO Basic Settings
of parameter groups which can be selected by toggling [] 33-** MCO Adv. Settings
and [] keys. 34-** MCO Data Readouts
35-** Sensor Input Option
130BP066.10
1107 RPM 3.84 A 1 (1)

Main menu
Table 2.4 Accessible Parameter Goups
0 - ** Operation/Display
After selecting a parameter group, select a parameter with
1 - ** Load/Motor
the navigation keys.
2 - ** Brakes
The middle section on the display shows the parameter
3 - ** Reference / Ramps number and name as well as the selected parameter value.
Illustration 2.14 Main Menu Mode

130BP067.10
740RPM 10.64A 1 [1]

Basic Settings 0-0*
0 -01 Language
Each parameter has a name and number which remain the
same regardless of the programming mode. In the Main
Menu mode, the parameters are divided into groups. The [0] English
first digit of the parameter number (from the left) indicates

the parameter group number.
Illustration 2.15 Parameter Selection
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 19

2.1.10 Changing Data
130BP070.10
729RPM 6.21A 1(1)
Load depen. setting 1- 6*
2 2
The procedure for changing data is the same in the Quick 1 - 60 Low speed load
Menu and the Main Menu mode. Press [OK] to change the compensation
selected parameter. 16 0%
The procedure for changing data depends on whether the
selected parameter represents a numerical data value or a
text value. Illustration 2.18 Saving a Data Value
2.1.11 Changing a Text Value

2.1.13 Infinitely Variable Change of
If the selected parameter is a text value, change the text
Numeric Data Value
value with the [] [] keys.
If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value,
Place the cursor on the value to save and press [OK].
select a digit with [] [].
130BP068.10
740RPM 10.64 A 1 [1]
130BP073.10
Basic Settings 0-0* 635 RPM 0.44 A 1 (1)
Start Adjustments 1- 7*
0 -01 Language
1 - 71 Start Delay
00.0s
[0] English
Illustration 2.16 Changing a Text Value Illustration 2.19 Selecting a Digit
2.1.12 Changing Change the selected digit infinitely variably with [] [].
The selected digit is indicated by the cursor. Place the
If the selected parameter represents a numeric data value, cursor on the digit to save and press [OK].
change the selected data value by means of the [] []
navigation keys as well as the [] [] navigation keys. Press
130BP072.10
[] [] keys to move the cursor horizontally.
957RPM 11.58A 1 (1)
Start Adjustments 1-7*
1-71 High starting torque time

130BP069.10
113 RPM 1.78 A 1(1)

Load depen. setting 1- 6* 0. 4s
1 - 60 Low speed load

compensation Illustration 2.20 Saving
100%
2.1.14 Value, Step-by-Step

Illustration 2.17 Changing a Data Value
Certain parameters can be changed step by step or
infinitely varying. This applies to 1-20 Motor Power [kW],
Press [] [] keys to change the data value. [] increases 1-22 Motor Voltage and 1-23 Motor Frequency.
the data value, and [] decreases the data value. Place the The parameters are changed both as a group of numeric
cursor on the value to save and press [OK]. data values and as numeric data values infinitely varying.
2.1.15 Read-out and Programming of

Indexed Parameters
Parameters are indexed when placed in a rolling stack.

Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to
parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time contain a fault log which
can be read out. Select a parameter, press [OK], and use
[] [] to scroll through the value log.
20 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Use parameter 3-10 Preset Reference as another example:
130BA191.10
Select the parameter, press [OK], and use [] [] to scroll
through the indexed values. To change the parameter
value, select the indexed value and press [OK]. Change the 2 2
value by pressing [] []. Press [OK] to accept the new
setting. Press [Cancel] to abort. Press [Back] to leave the
parameter.
The following instructions are valid for the Numerical LCP 1 Setup
(LCP 101).
The control panel is divided into 4 functional groups:
1. Numerical display.
2. Menu keys and indicator lights - changing Status Quick Main
Setup Menu
parameters and switching between display 2 Menu
functions.
3. Navigation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
4. Operation keys and indicator lights (LEDs).
ck
Ba
Display line: Status messages displaying icons and
numeric value
Indicator lights (LEDs)
3 On OK
Green LED/On: Indicates if control section is on.
Yellow LED/Wrn.: Indicates a warning. Warn.
Flashing red LED/Alarm: Indicates an alarm. Alarm
LCP keys
[Menu] Hand Auto
4 Off Reset
on on
Select one of the following modes:
Status
Illustration 2.21 LCP Keys
Quick Setup
Main Menu
Status Mode
Displays the status of the frequency converter or the
motor.
If an alarm occurs the NLCP automatically switches to
status mode.
A number of alarms can be displayed.
NOTICE
Parameter copy is not possible with LCP 101 Numerical
Local Control Panel.
22.8
130BP077.10
rpm
Setup 1
Illustration 2.22 Status Mode
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 21

A 17
[Hand On]
130BP078.10
enables control of the frequency converter via the LCP.
[Hand On] also starts the motor and it is now possible to
2 2 Setup 1 enter the motor speed data with the arrow keys. The key
can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via 0-40 [Hand
Illustration 2.23 Alarm on] Key on LCP.
External stop signals activated with control signals or a
serial bus overrides a 'start' command via the LCP.
Main Menu/Quick Setup The following control signals are still active when [Hand
is used for programming all parameters or only the On] is activated:
parameters in the Quick Menu (see also description of the
LCP 102 earlier in chapter 2.1 The Graphical and Numerical
[Hand On] - [Off] - [Auto On]
Local Control Panels). Reset

When the value flashes, press [] or [] to change Coasting stop inverse
parameter values.
Select Main Menu by pressing [Menu] a number of times.
Reversing
Select the parameter group [xx-__] and press [OK] Set-up select lsb - Set-up select msb
Select the parameter [__-xx] and press [OK] Stop command from serial communication
If the parameter is an array parameter select the array
number and press [OK] Quick stop
Select the wanted data value and press [OK] DC brake

Parameters with functional choices display values such as
[1], [2], etc. For a description of the different choices, see [Off]
the individual description of the parameters in stops the connected motor. The key can be selected as [1]
chapter 3 Parameter Descriptions Enable or [0] Disable via parameter 0-41 [Off] Key on LCP.
[Back] If no external stop function is selected and the [Off] key is
for stepping backwards inactive the motor can be stopped by disconnecting the
voltage.
[] [] are used for manoeuvring between commands and
within parameters. [Auto On]
enables the frequency converter to be controlled via the
130BP079.10
control terminals and/or serial communication. When a

start signal is applied on the control terminals and/or the
bus, the frequency converter starts. The key can be
P 2-03
selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP.
Setup 1
NOTICE
An active HAND-OFF-AUTO signal via the digital inputs
Status Quick Main
has higher priority than the control keys [Hand On]
Menu Setup Menu [Auto On].
Illustration 2.24 Main Menu/Quick Setup

[Reset]
is used for resetting the frequency converter after an alarm
(trip). It can be selected as [1] Enable or [0] Disable via
2.1.16 LCP Keys parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP.
Keys for local control are found at the bottom of the LCP. 2.1.17 Initialisation to Default Settings
130BP046.10
Initialise the frequency converter to default settings in 2

ways.
Hand Auto
Off Reset
on on
Recommended initialisation (via
Illustration 2.25 LCP Keys parameter 14-22 Operation Mode)
1. Select 14-22 Operation Mode
2. Press [OK]
22 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3. Select [2] Initialisation

4. Press [OK]
5. Disconnect the mains supply and wait until the
display turns off.
2 2
6. Reconnect the mains supply - the frequency
converter is now reset.
14-22 Operation Mode initialises all except:
Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter
8-30 Protocol
Parameter 8-31 Address
Parameter 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
Parameter 8-35 Minimum Response Delay
Parameter 8-36 Max Response Delay
Parameter 8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay
Parameter 15-00 Operating hours to

parameter 15-05 Over Volt's
Parameter 15-20 Historic Log: Event to

parameter 15-22 Historic Log: Time
Parameter 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code to

parameter 15-32 Alarm Log: Time
Manual initialisation
1. Disconnect from mains and wait until the display

turns off.
2. 2a Press [Status] - [Main Menu] - [OK] at
the same time while power up for LCP
102, Graphical Display
2b Press [Menu] - [OK] while power up for
LCP 101, Numerical Display
3. Release the keys after 5 s.
4. The frequency converter is now programmed
according to default settings.
This procedure initialises all except:
Parameter 15-00 Operating hours
Parameter 15-03 Power Up's
Parameter 15-04 Over Temp's
Parameter 15-05 Over Volt's
NOTICE
A manual initialisation also resets serial communication,
RFI filter settings (parameter 14-50 RFI Filter) and fault
log settings.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 23

Parameter Descriptions VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
3 Parameter Descriptions
3.1 Parameter Selection 16-** Readout parameters
3 3 Parameters are grouped into various parameter groups for

easy selection of the correct parameters for optimised
17-** Encoder Option parameters
operation of the frequency converter.

18-** Readout 2 parameters
0-** Operation and Display parameters

30-** Special Features
Basic Settings, set-up handling

32-** MCO Basic Settings parameters
Display and Local Control Panel parameters for
selecting readouts, setting up selections and 33-** MCO Adv. Settings parameters
copying functions
1-** Load and Motor parameters include all load and 34-** MCO Data Readouts
motor related parameters
35-** Sensor Input Option parameters
2-** Brake parameters
NOTICE
DC brake
To see if a parameter can be used in a specific control
Dynamic brake (Resistor brake) mode, use Table 4.3.
Mechanical brake
Overvoltage Control
3-** References and ramping parameters include DigiPot
function
4-** Limits Warnings; setting of limits and warning

parameters
5-** Digital inputs and outputs include relay controls
6-** Analog inputs and outputs
7-** Controls; Setting parameters for speed and process

controls
8-** Communication and option parameters for setting of

RS-485 and USB port parameters.
9-** Profibus parameters
10-** DeviceNet and CAN Fieldbus parameters
12-** Ethernet parameters
13-** Smart Logic Control parameters
14-** Special function parameters
15-** Drive information parameters
24 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.2 Parameters: 0-** Operation and Display 0-01 Language

Option: Function:
Parameters related to the fundamental functions of the
[51] Bahasa Part of Language package 2
frequency converter, function of the LCP keys and configu-
Indonesia
ration of the LCP display.
[52] Hrvatski Part of Language package 3
3.2.1 0-0* Basic Settings 0-02 Motor Speed Unit

3 3
Option: Function:
0-01 Language
Option: Function:
NOTICE
Defines the language to be used in the This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
display. The frequency converter is motor is running.
delivered with 4 different language
packages English and German are included The display showing depends on settings in
in all packages. English cannot be erased parameter 0-02 Motor Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional
or manipulated. Settings. The default setting of parameter 0-02 Motor
Speed Unit and 0-03 Regional Settings depends on
[0] English Part of Language packages 1 - 4
which region of the world the frequency converter is
[1] Deutsch Part of Language packages 1 - 4 supplied to, but can be re-programmed as required.
[2] Francais Part of Language package 1 NOTICE

[3] Dansk Part of Language package 1 Changing the Motor Speed Unit resets certain
parameters to their initial value. It is
[4] Spanish Part of Language package 1
recommended to select the motor speed unit
[5] Italiano Part of Language package 1
first, before modifying other parameters.
[6] Svenska Part of Language package 1 [0] RPM Selects display of motor speed variables and
parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
[7] Nederlands Part of Language package 1
terms of motor speed (RPM).
[10] Chinese Part of Language package 2 [1] Hz Selects display of motor speed variables and
[20] Suomi Part of Language package 1 parameters (i.e. references, feedbacks and limits) in
terms of output frequency to the motor (Hz).
[22] English US Part of Language package 4
0-03 Regional Settings
[27] Greek Part of Language package 4
Option: Function:
[28] Bras.port Part of Language package 4 NOTICE
[36] Slovenian Part of Language package 3
This parameter cannot be adjusted while
the motor is running.
[39] Korean Part of Language package 2
[40] Japanese Part of Language package 2 [0] * Interna- Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
[41] Turkish Part of Language package 4 tional setting the motor power in kW and sets the
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
[42] Trad.Chinese Part of Language package 2 to 50 Hz.
[43] Bulgarian Part of Language package 3 [1] US Activates parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW] for
[44] Srpski Part of Language package 3 setting the motor power in hp and sets the
default value of parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency
[45] Romanian Part of Language package 3
to 60 Hz.
[46] Magyar Part of Language package 3
0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand)
[47] Czech Part of Language package 3 Option: Function:
[48] Polski Part of Language package 4 Selects the operating mode upon
reconnection of the frequency converter to
[49] Russian Part of Language package 3 mains voltage after power down in Hand
(local) operation mode.
[50] Thai Part of Language package 2
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 25

0-04 Operating State at Power-up (Hand) 0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function: Option: Function:
[0] Resume Restarts the frequency converter, maintaining [1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 are the 4 separate
the same and the same start/stop settings parameter set-ups within which all parameters
(applied by [Hand On/Off]) as before the can be programmed.
3 3 frequency converter was powered down.
[1] * Forced stop, Restarts the frequency converter with a saved

[2] Set-up 2
[3] Set-up 3
ref=old local reference, after mains voltage reappears [4] Set-up 4
and after pressing [Hand On]. [9] Multi Set- Remote selection of set-ups using digital
[2] Forced stop, Resets the local reference to 0 upon up inputs and the serial communication port. This
ref=0 restarting the frequency converter. set-up uses the settings from
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Stop the
frequency converter before making changes to
3.2.2 0-1* Set-up Operations open- and closed loop functions
Define and control the individual parameter set-ups. Use parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy to copy a set-up to one or
The frequency converter has 4 parameter set-ups that can all other set-ups. Stop the frequency converter before
be programmed independently of each other. This makes switching between set-ups where parameters marked not
the frequency converter very flexible and able to solve changeable during operation have different values. To
advanced control functionality problems, often saving the avoid conflicting settings of the same parameter within 2
cost of external control equipment. For example these can different set-ups, link the set-ups together using
be used to program the frequency converter to operate parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. Parameters which are
according to one control scheme in one set-up (e.g. motor not changeable during operation are marked FALSE in the
1 for horizontal movement) and another control scheme in parameter lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists.
another set-up (e.g. motor 2 for vertical movement).
0-11 Edit Set-up
Alternatively they can be used by an OEM machine builder
to identically program all their factory fitted frequency Option: Function:
converters for different machine types within a range to Select the set-up to be edited (i.e.
have the same parameters and then during production/ programmed) during operation; either the
commissioning simply select a specific set-up depending active set-up or one of the inactive set-ups.
on which machine the frequency converter is installed on. [0] Factory Cannot be edited but it is useful as a data
The active set-up (i.e. the set-up in which the frequency setup source to return the other set-ups to a known
converter is currently operating) can be selected in state.
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up and is displayed in the LCP.
[1] * Set-up 1 [1] Set-up 1 to [4] Set-up 4 can be edited
Using Multi set-up it is possible to switch between set-ups
freely during operation, independently of the
with the frequency converter running or stopped, via
active set-up.
digital input or serial communication commands. If it is
necessary to change set-ups whilst running, ensure [2] Set-up 2
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is programmed as [3] Set-up 3
required. Using parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up it is possible to [4] Set-up 4
edit parameters within any of the set-ups whilst continuing [9] Active Set- Can also be edited during operation. Edit the
the frequency converter operation in its active set-up up selected set-up from a range of sources: LCP,
which can be a different set-up to that being edited. Using FC RS-485, FC USB or up to 5 fieldbus sites.
parameter 0-51 Set-up Copy it is possible to copy parameter
settings between the set-ups to enable quicker commis-
sioning if similar parameter settings are required in
different set-ups.
0-10 Active Set-up

Option: Function:
Select the set-up to control the frequency
converter functions.
[0] Factory Cannot be changed. It contains the Danfoss

setup data set, and can be used as a data source
when returning the other set-ups to a known
state.
26 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
130BA199.10
1
Option: Function:
2
Set-up 2 are synchronised (or linked). Synchro-
P 0-11 nisation can be performed in 2 ways:
3 1. Change the edit set-up to [2] Set-up 2 in
4
parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up and set
parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to to [1] Set-up
3 3
Set-up 1. This starts the linking (synchronising) process.
1
130BP075.10
0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
2 Set-up Handling 0-1*
P 0-11
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
3
[1] Setup 1
4
Set-up
Illustration 3.2 Set-up 1
2 OR
P 0-11
3 2. While still in Set-up 1, copy Set-up 1 to Set-
up 2. Then set parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked
4 to to [2] Set-up 2. This starts the linking process.
130BP076.10
PLC Fieldbus 0 RPM 0.00A 1(1)
Set-up Handling 0-1*
Set-up 0-12 This Set-up Linked to
1
[2] Setup 2
2
P 0-11
Illustration 3.3 Set-up 2
3
4
Illustration 3.1 Edit Set-up After the link is complete,
parameter 0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups reads
{1,2} to indicate that all not changeable during
operation parameters are now the same in Set-
0-12 This Set-up Linked to
up 1 and Set-up 2. If there are changes to a
Option: Function: not changeable during operation parameter,
To enable conflict-free changes from one set-up e.g. parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs), in Set-
to another during operation, link set-ups up 2, they are also changed automatically in
containing parameters which are not Set-up 1. A switch between Set-up 1 and Set-up
changeable during operation. The link ensures 2 during operation is now possible.
synchronising of the not changeable during
[0] * Not linked
operation parameter values when moving from
[1] Set-up 1
one set-up to another during operation. Not
[2] Set-up 2
changeable during operation parameters can
be identified by the label FALSE in the [3] Set-up 3
parameter lists in chapter 4 Parameter Lists. [4] Set-up 4
Parameter 0-12 This Set-up Linked to is used by

Multi set-up in parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.
Multi set-up is used to move from one set-up
to another during operation (i.e. while the
motor is running).
Example:
Use Multi set-up to shift from Set-up 1 to Set-
up 2 whilst the motor is running. Programme in
Set-up 1 first, then ensure that Set-up 1 and
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 27

0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small

Array [5] Option: Function:
Range: Function: Select a variable for display in line
0* [0 - View a list of all the set-ups linked by means of 1, left position.
255 ] 0-12 This Set-up Linked to. The parameter has one [0] None No display value selected.
3 3 index for each parameter set-up. The parameter
value displayed for each index represents which
[9] Performance
Monitor
set-ups are linked to that parameter set-up.
[15] Readout: actual
Index LCP value setup
0 {0} [37] Display Text 1
1 {1,2} [38] Display Text 2
2 {1,2} [39] Display Text 3
3 {3} [748] PCD Feed Forward
4 {4} [953] Profibus Warning
Word
Table 3.2 Example: Set-up 1 and Set-up 2 are [1005] Readout Transmit
linked Error Counter
[1006] Readout Receive
Error Counter
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel
[1007] Readout Bus Off
Range: Function:
Counter
0* [-2147483648 - View the setting of parameter 0-11 Edit Set-
[1013] Warning Parameter
2147483647 ] up for each of the 4 different
[1230] Warning Parameter
communication channels. When the
[1472] Legacy Alarm Word
number is displayed as a hex number, as it
[1473] Legacy Warning
is in the LCP, each number represents one
Word
channel.
[1474] Leg. Ext. Status
Numbers 1-4 represent a set-up number; F
Word
means factory setting; and A means active
set-up. The channels are, from right to left: [1501] Running Hours
LCP, FC-bus, USB, HPFB1-5. [1502] kWh Counter
Example: The number AAAAAA21h means [1580] Fan Running Hours
that the FC bus selected Set-up 2 in [1600] Control Word Present control word
parameter 0-11 Edit Set-up, the LCP selected [1601] Reference [Unit] Total reference (sum of digital/
Set-up 1 and all others used the active set- analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
up. up and slow-down) in selected
unit.
0-15 Readout: actual setup
[1602] Reference % Total reference (sum of digital/
Range: Function:
analog/preset/bus/freeze ref./catch
0* [0 - 255 ] Makes it possible to read out the active set-up, up and slow-down) in percent.
also when multi set-up is selected in
[1603] Status Word Present status word.
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up.
[1605] Main Actual Value Actual value as a percentage.
[%]
3.2.3 0-2* LCP Display [1609] Custom Readout
[1610] Power [kW] Actual power consumed by the
Define the variables displayed in the Graphical Local
motor in kW.
Control Panel.
[1611] Power [hp] Actual power consumed by the
motor in hp.
NOTICE
[1612] Motor Voltage Voltage supplied to the motor.
Refer to 0-37 Display Text 1, 0-38 Display Text 2 and
0-39 Display Text 3 for information on how to write [1613] Frequency Motor frequency, i.e. the output
display texts. frequency from the frequency
converter in Hz
28 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small
[1614] Motor current Phase current of the motor [1647] Motor Phase W
measured as effective value. Current
[1615] Frequency [%] Motor frequency, i.e. the output [1648] Speed Ref. After
frequency from the frequency
converter in percent. [1650]
Ramp [RPM]
External Reference Sum of the external reference as a
3 3
percentage, i.e. the sum of analog/
[1616] Torque [Nm] Actual motor torque in Nm
pulse/bus.
[1617] Speed [RPM] Speed in RPM (revolutions per
[1651] Pulse Reference Frequency in Hz connected to the
* minute) i.e. the motor shaft speed
digital inputs (18, 19 or 32, 33).
in closed loop.
[1652] Feedback[Unit] Reference value from programmed
[1618] Motor Thermal Thermal load on the motor,
digital input(s).
calculated by the ETR function.
[1653] Digi Pot Reference
[1619] KTY sensor
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
temperature
[1660] Digital Input Signal states form the 6 digital
[1620] Motor Angle
terminals (18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and
[1621] Torque [%] High
33). There are 16 bits in total, but
Res.
only six of them are used. Input 18
[1622] Torque [%] Present motor load as a corresponds to the leftmost of the
percentage of the rated motor used bits. Signal low = 0; Signal
torque. high = 1.
[1623] Motor Shaft Power [1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
[kW] Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[1624] Calibrated Stator
[1662] Analog Input 53 Actual value at input 53 either as a
Resistance
reference or protection value.
[1625] Torque [Nm] High
[1630] DC Link Voltage Intermediate circuit voltage in the [1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting of input terminal 54.
frequency converter. Setting Current = 0; Voltage = 1.
[1632] Brake Energy /s Present brake power transferred to [1664] Analog Input 54 Actual value at input 54 either as
an external brake resistor. reference or protection value.
Stated as an instantaneous value. [1665] Analog Output 42 Actual value at output 42 in mA.
[1633] Brake Energy /2 Brake power transferred to an [mA] Use 6-50 Terminal 42 Output to
min external brake resistor. The mean select the value to be shown.
power is calculated continuously [1666] Digital Output [bin] Binary value of all digital outputs.
for the most recent 120 s.
[1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency
[1634] Heatsink Temp. Present heat sink temperature of applied at terminal 29 as an
the frequency converter. The cut- impulse input.
out limit is 95 5 C; cutting back
[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz] Actual value of the frequency
in occurs at 70 5 C.
applied at terminal 33 as an
[1635] Inverter Thermal Percentage load of the inverters. impulse input.
[1636] Inv. Nom. Current Nominal current of the frequency [1669] Pulse Output #27 Actual value of impulses applied to
converter. [Hz] terminal 27 in digital output mode.
[1637] Inv. Max. Current Maximum current of the frequency [1670] Pulse Output #29 Actual value of impulses applied to
converter. [Hz] terminal 29 in digital output mode.
[1638] SL Controller State State of the event executed by the [1671] Relay Output [bin]
control. [1672] Counter A Application dependent (e.g. SLC
[1639] Control Card Temp. Temperature of the control card. Control)
[1645] Motor Phase U [1673] Counter B Application dependent (e.g. SLC

Current Control)
[1646] Motor Phase V [1674] Prec. Stop Counter Display the actual counter value.
Current
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 29

[1675] Analog In X30/11 Actual value at input X30/11 either [3110] Bypass Status Word
as reference or protection value. [3111] Bypass Running
Hours
[1676] Analog In X30/12 Actual value at input X30/12 either
3 3 as reference or protection value. [3401] PCD 1 Write to
MCO
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 Actual value at output X30/8 in
[3402] PCD 2 Write to
[mA] mA. Use parameter 6-60 Terminal
MCO
X30/8 Output to select the value to
be shown.
MCO
[1678] Analog Out X45/1 [3404] PCD 4 Write to
[mA] MCO
[1679] Analog Out X45/3 [3405] PCD 5 Write to
[mA] MCO
[1680] Fieldbus CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from [3406] PCD 6 Write to
the Bus Master. MCO
[1682] Fieldbus REF 1 Main reference value sent with [3407] PCD 7 Write to
control word from the Bus Master. MCO
[1684] Comm. Option STW Extended fieldbus communication
MCO
option status word.
[1685] FC Port CTW 1 Control word (CTW) received from MCO
the Bus Master. [3410] PCD 10 Write to
[1686] FC Port REF 1 Status word (STW) sent to the Bus MCO
Master. [3421] PCD 1 Read from
MCO
[1687] Bus Readout Alarm/
[3422] PCD 2 Read from
Warning
MCO
[1689] Configurable
Alarm/Warning
MCO
Word
[1690] Alarm Word One or more alarms in a hex code.
MCO
[1691] Alarm Word 2 One or more alarms in a hex code. [3425] PCD 5 Read from
[1692] Warning Word One or more warnings in a hex MCO
code. [3426] PCD 6 Read from
MCO
[1693] Warning Word 2 One or more warnings in a hex
code.
MCO
[1694] Ext. Status Word One or more status conditions in a [3428] PCD 8 Read from
hex code. MCO
[1836] Analog Input X48/2 [3429] PCD 9 Read from
[mA] MCO
[1837] Temp. Input X48/4 [3430] PCD 10 Read from
[1838] Temp. Input X48/7 MCO
[1839] Temp. Input X48/10 [3440] Digital Inputs
[1860] Digital Input 2 [3441] Digital Outputs
[1890] Process PID Error [3450] Actual Position
[1891] Process PID Output [3451] Commanded
[1892] Process PID Position
Clamped Output [3452] Actual Master
[1893] Process PID Gain Position
Scaled Output [3453] Slave Index
[3019] Wobble Delta Freq. Position
Scaled
30 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Option: Function: Select a variable for display in line 1, right position. The options
[3454] Master Index are the same as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
Position Option: Function:
[3455] Curve Position [1610 *] * Power [kW]
[3456]
[3457]
Track Error
Synchronizing Error 0-23 Display Line 2 Large 3 3
[3458] Actual Velocity Select a variable for display in line 2. The options are the same
[3459] Actual Master as listed for parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. The options are
Velocity the same as those listed in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
[3460] Synchronizing Option: Function:
Status [1613] * Frequency
[3461] Axis Status
[3462] Program Status 0-24 Display Line 3 Large
[3464] MCO 302 Status Select a variable for display in line 3.
[3465] MCO 302 Control Option: Function:
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 [1602 *] * Reference % The options are the same as those listed
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 in 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small.
[4285] Active Safe Func.
0-25 My Personal Menu
[4286] Safe Option Info
[9913] Idle time Range: Function:
[9914] Paramdb requests Size [0 - Define up to 50 parameters to appear in the
in queue related* 9999 ] Q1 Personal Menu, accessible via the [Quick
[9917] tCon1 time Menu] key on the LCP. The parameters are
[9918] tCon2 time displayed in the Q1 Personal Menu in the
[9919] Time Optimize order they are programmed into this array
Measure parameter. Delete parameters by setting the
[9920] HS Temp. (PC1) value to 0000.
[9921] HS Temp. (PC2) For example, this can be used to provide
[9922] HS Temp. (PC3) quick, simple access to just one or up to 50
[9923] HS Temp. (PC4) parameters which require changing on a
regular basis (e.g. for plant maintenance
[9924] HS Temp. (PC5)
reasons) or by an OEM to enable simple
[9925] HS Temp. (PC6)
commissioning of their equipment.
[9926] HS Temp. (PC7)
[9927] HS Temp. (PC8)
[9951] PC Debug 0 3.2.4 0-3* LCP Custom Readout
[9952] PC Debug 1
[9953] PC Debug 2 It is possible to customise the display elements for various
[9954] PC Debug 3 purposes: *Custom Readout. Value proportional to speed
[9955] PC Debug 4 (Linear, squared or cubed depending on unit selected in
[9956] Fan 1 Feedback 0-30 Custom Readout Unit) *Display Text. Text string stored
[9957] Fan 2 Feedback in a parameter.
[9958] PC Auxiliary Temp
[9959] Power Card Temp. Custom Readout
The calculated value to be displayed is based on settings
0-21 Display Line 1.2 Small in 0-30 Custom Readout Unit, 0-31 Custom Readout Min
Option: Function: Value (linear only), parameter 0-32 Custom Readout Max
[0] * None Select a variable for display in line 1, middle Value, 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM],
position. The options are the same as listed for parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] and actual
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small. speed.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 31

Custom Readout (Value) 0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout
130BT105.12
P 16-09
Custom Readout
Unit P 0-30 Option: Function:
Max value [25] m/h
P 0-32
[30] kg/s
w) [31] kg/min
d fl o
3 3 it (
e.g
.s p ee
d an
ss
ur
e)
[32]
[33]
kg/h
t/min
n re
rU (P )
ea it er [34] t/h
Li n Un ow
tic (P
Min value d ra it [40] m/s
Linear ua Un
Q b ic
units only Cu [41] m/min
Motor Speed
P 0-31
[45] m
0 Motor Speed
High limit [60] C
P 4-13 (RPM)
P 4-14 (Hz) [70] mbar
Illustration 3.4 Custom Readout [71] bar
[72] Pa
[73] kPa
The relation depends on the type of unit selected in [74] m WG
0-30 Custom Readout Unit: [80] kW
[120] GPM
Unit Type Speed Relation [121] gal/s
Dimensionless [122] gal/min
Speed [123] gal/h
Flow, volume [124] CFM
Flow, mass Linear [125] ft/s
Velocity [126] ft/min
Length [127] ft/h
Temperature [130] lb/s
Pressure Quadratic [131] lb/min
Power Cubic [132] lb/h
[140] ft/s
Table 3.3 Speed Relations for Different Unit Types
[141] ft/min
[145] ft
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout
[160] F
Option: Function: [170] psi
It is possible to program a value to be shown in [171] lb/in
the display of the LCP. The value has a linear, [172] in WG
squared or cubed relation to speed. This relation [173] ft WG
depends on the unit selected (see Table 3.3). The
[180] HP
actual calculated value can be read in
parameter 16-09 Custom Readout, and/or shown in 0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout
the display be selecting [16-09] Custom Readout in Range: Function:
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small to
0 CustomRea- [ -999999.99 - This parameter sets the min.
0-24 Display Line 3 Large.
doutUnit* par. 0-32 value of the custom defined
[0] * None CustomRea- readout (occurs at zero speed).
[1] % doutUnit] Only possible to set different
[5] PPM from 0 is when selecting a
[10] 1/min linear unit in
[11] rpm parameter 0-30 Unit for User-
[12] Pulse/s defined Readout. For Quadratic
and Cubic units the minimum
[20] l/s
value will be 0.
[21] l/min
[22] l/h
[23] m/s
[24] m/min
32 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

0-32 Custom Readout Max Value 0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP
Range: Function: Option: Function:
100 Custom- [ par. 0-31 - This parameter sets the max the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
ReadoutUnit* 999999.99 value to be shown when the Password. Otherwise define the password in
CustomRea- speed of the motor has reached 0-60 Main Menu Password.
doutUnit] the set value for 4-13 Motor
Speed High Limit [RPM] or
[3] Hand Off/On When [Hand On] is pressed once, the LCP
switches to Off mode. When pressed again,
3 3
parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
the LCP switches to Hand on mode.
Limit [Hz] (depends on setting in
parameter 0-02 Motor Speed [4] Hand Off/On Same as [3] but a password is required (see
Unit). w. Passw. option [2] Password).
[9] Enabled, ref

0-37 Display Text 1 =0
Range: Function:
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
25 ] display by selecting [37] Display Text 1 in Option: Function:
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display [0] Disabled Avoids accidental stop of the frequency converter.
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, [1] Enabled
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3 [2] Password Avoids unauthorised stop. If parameter 0-41 [Off]
Large. Key on LCP is included in the Quick Menu, then
define the password in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu
0-38 Display Text 2 Password.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP
25 ] display by selecting [38] Display Text 2 in Option: Function:
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display [0] Disabled Avoid accidental start of the frequency converter
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small, in Auto mode.
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3
[1] Enabled
Large.
[2] Password Avoids unauthorised start in Auto mode. If
0-39 Display Text 3 parameter 0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP is included in
the Quick Menu, then define the password in
Range: Function:
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
0* [0 - Enter a text which can be viewed in the graphical
25 ] display by selecting [39] Display Text 3 in
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP
parameter 0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small, 0-21 Display
Option: Function:
Line 1.2 Small, 0-22 Display Line 1.3 Small,
0-23 Display Line 2 Large or 0-24 Display Line 3 [0] Disabled No effect when [Reset] is pressed. Avoids
Large. accidental alarm reset.
[1] Enabled
[2] Password Avoids unauthorised resetting. If
3.2.5 0-4* LCP Keypad
parameter 0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP is included
in the Quick Menu, then define the password
Enable, disable and password protect individual keys on
in parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
the LCP.
[7] Enabled Resets the frequency converter without setting
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP without OFF it in Off mode.
Option: Function:
[8] Password Resets the frequency converter without setting
[0] Disabled No effect when [Hand On] is pressed. Select without OFF it in Off mode. A password is required when
[0] Disabled to avoid accidental start of the pressing [Reset] (see [2]).
frequency converter in Hand on mode.
[1] Enabled The LCP switches to Hand on mode directly

when [Hand on] is pressed.
[2] Password After pressing [Hand on] a password is

required. If parameter 0-40 [Hand on] Key on
LCP is in included in My Personal Menu, define
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 33

3.2.6 0-5* Copy/Save 0-51 Set-up Copy

Option: Function:
Copy parameters from and to the LCP. Use these [4] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present
parameters for saving and copying set-ups from one up 4 Programming Set-up (defined in
frequency converter to another. 0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 4.
3 3 0-50 LCP Copy

Option: Function:
[9] Copy to all Copies the parameters in the present set-up
over to each of the set-ups 1 to 4.
NOTICE
This parameter cannot be 3.2.7 0-6* Password
adjusted while the motor is
running. 0-60 Main Menu Password
Range: Function:
[0] * No copy
100 * [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Main
[1] All to LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups
9999 ] Menu via the [Main Menu] key. If
from the frequency converter memory
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is
to the LCP memory.
set to [0] Full access, this parameter will be
[2] All from LCP Copies all parameters in all set-ups ignored.
from the LCP memory to the frequency
converter memory. 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password
[3] Size indep. from Copy only the parameters that are Option: Function:
LCP independent of the motor size. The [0] * Full access Disables password defined in
latter selection can be used to parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password.
programme several frequency [1] LCP: Read Prevent unauthorised editing of Main Menu
converters with the same function only parameters.
without disturbing motor data.
[2] LCP: No Prevent unauthorised viewing and editing of
[4] File from MCO to access Main Menu parameters.
LCP
[3] Bus: Read Read-only functions for parameters on
[5] File from LCP to
only Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
MCO
[6] Data from DYN to [4] Bus: No No access to parameters is allowed via
LCP access Fieldbus and/or FC standard bus.
[7] Data from LCP to [5] All: Read only Read-only function for parameters on LCP,
DYN Fieldbus or FC standard bus.
[9] Safety Par. from
[6] All: No access No access from LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard
LCP
bus is allowed.
[10] Delete LCP copy Use to delete the copy after the
data transfer is complete.
If [0] Full access is selected, parameter 0-60 Main Menu
Password, 0-65 Personal Menu Password and 0-66 Access to
0-51 Set-up Copy
Personal Menu w/o Password are ignored.
Option: Function:
[0] No copy No function
NOTICE
A more complex password protection is available for
[1] Copy to set- Copies all parameters in the present
OEMs upon request.
up 1 Programming Set-up (defined in
0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 1.
0-65 Quick Menu Password
up 2 Programming Set-up (defined in Range: Function:
0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 2. 200* [-9999 - Define the password for access to the Quick
9999 ] Menu via the [Quick Menu] key. If
parameter 0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o
up 3 Programming Set-up (defined in
Password is set to [0] Full access, this
0-11 Programming Set-up) to Set-up 3.
parameter is ignored.
34 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password

If 0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password is set to [0] Full access
then this parameter is ignored.
Option: Function:
[0] * Full access Disables the password defined in
parameter 0-65 Quick Menu Password.
3 3
[1] LCP: Read only Prevents unauthorised editing of Quick
Menu parameters.
[3] Bus: Read only Read only functions for Quick Menu
parameters on Fieldbus and/or FC standard
bus.
[5] All: Read only Read only function for Quick Menu
parameters on LCP, Fieldbus or FC standard
bus.
0-67 Bus Password Access

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] Writing to this parameter enables users to
unlock the frequency converter from bus/MCT
10 Set-up Software.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 35

3.3 Parameters: 1-** Load and Motor 1-01 Motor Control Principle
Option: Function:
3.3.1 1-0* General Settings
NOTICE
Define whether the frequency converter operates in speed This parameter cannot be adjusted while
mode or torque mode; and whether the internal PID the motor is running.
3 3 control should be active or not.
Select which motor control principle to
1-00 Configuration Mode
employ.
Option: Function:
[0] U/f Special motor mode, for parallel connected
Select the application control principle to be
motors in special motor applications. When U/f
used when a Remote Reference (i.e. via analog
is selected the characteristic of the control
input or fieldbus) is active. A Remote Reference
principle can be edited in parameter 1-55 U/f
can only be active when
Characteristic - U and parameter 1-56 U/f
parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0] Linked
Characteristic - F.
to Hand/Auto or [1] Remote.
[1] VVC+ Voltage Vector Control principle suitable for
[0] Speed Enables speed control (without feedback signal
most applications. The main benefit of VVCplus
open loop from motor) with automatic slip compensation
operation is that it uses a robust motor model.
for almost constant speed at varying loads.
Compensations are active but can be disabled in [2] Flux Flux Vector control without encoder feedback,
parameter group 1-0* Load/Motor. The speed sensorless for simple installation and robustness against
control parameters are set in parameter group sudden load changes. FC 302 only.
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
[3] Flux w/ Very high accuracy speed and torque control,
[1] Speed Enables Speed closed loop control with feed- motor feedb suitable for the most demanding applications.
closed back. Obtain full holding torque at 0 RPM. FC 302 only.
loop For increased speed accuracy, provide a
feedback signal and set the speed PID control. The best shaft performance is normally achieved using
The speed control parameters are set in either of the 2 Flux Vector control modes [2] Flux sensorless
parameter group 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl. and [3] Flux with encoder feedback.
[2] Torque Enables torque closed loop control with feed- NOTICE
back. Only possible with Flux with motor
An overview of possible combinations of the settings in
feedback option, parameter 1-01 Motor Control
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and
Principle. FC 302 only.
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle can be found in
[3] Process Enables the use of process control in the chapter 4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive
frequency converter. The process control Control Modes.
parameters are set in parameter groups 7-2*
Process Ctrl. Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl. 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source
[4] Torque Enables the use of torque open loop in VVCplus Option: Function:
open loop mode (parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle).
NOTICE
The torque PID parameters are set in parameter
group 7-1* Torque PI Control. This parameter cannot be adjusted
while the motor is running.
[5] Wobble Enables the wobble functionality in
parameter 30-00 Wobble Mode to
Select the interface at which to receive
parameter 30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled.
feedback from the motor.
[6] Surface Enables the surface winder control specific
[1] * 24V encoder A and B channel encoder, which can be
Winder parameters in parameter group 7-2* Process Ctrl.
connected to the digital input terminals
Feedb. and 7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
32/33 only. Terminals 32/33 must be
[7] Extended Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2* programmed to No operation.
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
[2] MCB 102 Encoder module option which can be
OL
configured in parameter group 17-1* Inc. Enc.
[8] Extended Specific parameters in parameter group 7-2*
Interface, FC 302 only.
PID Speed Process Ctrl. Feedb. to 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
CL
36 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source 1-04 Overload Mode

[3] MCB 103 Optional resolver interface module which can NOTICE
be configured in parameter group 17-5*
Resolver Interface.
[4] MCO
Encoder 1
Encoder interface 1 of the optional
programmable motion controller MCO 305.
3 3
Use this parameter to configure the frequency
X56 converter for either High or Normal overload.
[5] MCO Encoder interface 2 of the optional When selecting the frequency converter size,
Encoder 2 programmable motion controller MCO 305. always review the technical data in the
X55 Operating Instructions or the Design Guide to
know the available output current.
1-03 Torque Characteristics
Option: Function: [0] * High Allows up to 160% over torque.
torque
NOTICE [1] Normal For oversized motor - allows up to 110% over
This parameter cannot be adjusted while torque torque.
1-05 Local Mode Configuration
Select the torque characteristic required. Option: Function:
VT and AEO are both energy saving operations.
Select which application configuration mode
[0] Constant Motor shaft output provides constant torque (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode), i.e.
* torque under variable speed control. application control principle, to use when a
Local (LCP) Reference is active. A Local
[1] Variable Motor shaft output provides variable torque
Reference can be active only when
torque under variable speed control. Set the variable
parameter 3-13 Reference Site is set to [0]
torque level in parameter 14-40 VT Level.
Linked to Hand/Auto or [2] Local. By default the
[2] Auto Automatically optimises energy consumption by local reference is active in Hand Mode only.
Energy minimising magnetisation and frequency via
[0] Speed
Optim. parameter 14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation and
open loop
parameter 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency.
[1] Speed
[5] Constant The function provides a constant power in the Closed
Power field weakening area. Loop
The torque shape of motor mode is used as a [2] * As mode
limit in the generator mode. This is done to limit par 1-00
the power in generator mode that otherwise
becomes considerable larger than in motor 1-06 Clockwise Direction
mode, due to the high DC-link voltage available Option: Function:
in generator mode.
NOTICE
Pshaft W = mech rad / s T Nm
This relationship with the constant power is
illustrated in Illustration 3.5:
T[Nm] P[W]
130BB655.10
This parameter defines the term Clockwise

Tnom corresponding to the LCP direction arrow. Used for
Pnom P easy change of direction of shaft rotation without
swapping motor wires.
T
[0] * Normal Motor shaft turns in clockwise direction when the
nom 2nom [rad/S]
frequency converter is connected U U; V V,
Illustration 3.5 Constant Power and W W to motor.
[1] Inverse Motor shaft turns in counter clockwise direction

when the frequency converter is connected U U;
V V, and W W to motor.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 37

1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust parameter 1-14 Damping Gain

This parameter is only valid for FC 302 and only in combination parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration
with a PM motor with feedback.
parameter 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current
Range: Function:
parameter 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
0* [Manual] The functionality of this option depends on
3 3 the type of the feedback device. This option

sets the frequency converter to use the motor
parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode
parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
angle offset entered in parameter 1-41 Motor
parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
Angle Offset if an absolute feedback device is
used. NOTICE
If an incremental feedback device is selected
Standard parameters still need configuration (e.g.
the frequency converter automatically adjusts
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency etc.).
the motor angle offset on the first start after
the power up or when the motor data is
Application Settings
changed.
Low inertia applications 1-17 Voltage filter time const. to be
[1] Auto The frequency converter adjusts the motor ILoad/IMotor <5 increased by factor 5 to 10
angle offset automatically on the first start 1-14 Damping Gain should be
after the power up or when the motor data is reduced
changed no matter what feedback device is 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
selected. This means that options [0] and [1] should be reduced (<100%)
are identical for the incremental encoder. Low inertia applications Keep calculated values
[2] Auto Every The frequency converter adjusts the motor 50>ILoad/IMotor >5
Start angle offset automatically on every start or High inertia applications 1-14 Damping Gain,
when the motor data is changed. ILoad/IMotor > 50 parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time
Const. and parameter 1-16 High
[3] Off Selecting this option turns the automatic offset
Speed Filter Time Const. should be
adjustment off.
increased
High load at low speed 1-17 Voltage filter time const. should
3.3.2 1-1* Special Settings <30% (rated speed) be increased
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
NOTICE should be increased (>100% for
longer time can overheat the motor)
The parameters within this parameter group cannot be
adjusted while the motor is running. Table 3.4 Recommendations for VVCplus Applications
3.3.3 PM Settings If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase

1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
If [2] Std. PM, non salient is selected in Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value.
parameters manually, in the following order:
Adjust starting torque in 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed.
1. parameter 1-24 Motor Current 100% provides nominal torque as starting torque.
2. parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque

3. parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
4. parameter 1-39 Motor Poles
5. parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
6. parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
7. parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
The following parameters have been added for PM motors.
parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset

parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust
38 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Application Settings 1-11 Motor Model

Low inertia applications Keep calculated values Option: Function:
High inertia applications parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
are loaded automatically for this specific
Speed
motor.
Increase speed to a value between
[11] Danfoss Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
3 3
default and maximum depending on
application. OGD V206 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Set ramp times matching the Only available for T4, T5 in 0.75-3 kW.
application. Too fast ramp up causes Settings are loaded automatically for this
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast specific motor.
ramp down causes an overvoltage
OGD Auto-Detection and Model Change Function
trip.
The function is activated when one of the following
High load at low speed parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
options is selected: either [10] Danfoss OGD LA10 or [11]
Speed
Danfoss OGD V206 in parameter 1-11 Motor Model.
The frequency converter checks if the correct OGD model
is selected. If a wrong OGD model is selected, the
application.
frequency converter performs the following actions:
Table 3.5 Recommendations for FLUX Applications Trips
Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Issues an alarm

Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting Sets the parameters defined for the correct model
torque. type
1-10 Motor Construction Waits for the Reset signal from the operator
Option: Function: The model check takes place every time the frequency
Select the motor design type. converter gets a start signal from the LCP, a digital input
or a fieldbus.
[0] * Asynchron For asynchronous motors.
1-14 Damping Gain
[1] PM, non salient For salient or non-salient PM motors.
SPM PM motors are divided into 2 groups, Range: Function:
with either surface-mounted (non-salient) 140 [0 - The damping gain stabilises the PM machine to
or interior (salient) magnets. %* 250 %] run the PM machine smooth and stable. The
value of damping gain controls the dynamic
[3] SynRM
performance of the PM machine. High damping
1-11 Motor Model gain gives high dynamic performance and low
damping gain gives low dynamic performance.
Option: Function:
The dynamic performance is related to the
NOTICE machine data and load type. If the damping gain
This parameter is valid for FC 302 and is too high or low the control becomes unstable.
FCD 302 only.
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const.
Automatically sets the manufacturers values Range: Function:
for the selected motor. If the default value [1] Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used below 10%
is used, settings must be determined s] rated speed. Obtain quick control
manually, according to the choice in through a short damping time
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction. constant. However, if this value is too
[1] Std. Default motor model when [0]* Asynchron is short, the control gets unstable.
Asynchron selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
Enter motor parameter manually. 1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const.
[2] Std. PM, non Selectable when [1] PM, non salient SPM is
Range: Function:
salient selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction. Size related* [0.01 - 20 This time constant is used above 10%
Enter motor parameter manually. s] rated speed. Obtain quick control
through a short damping time
[10] Danfoss Selectable when [1] PM, non-salient SPM is
constant. However, if this value is too
OGD LA10 selected in parameter 1-10 Motor Construction.
short, the control gets unstable.
Only available for T4, T5 in 1.5-3 kW. Settings
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 39

1-17 Voltage filter time const. 1-21 Motor Power [HP]

Range: Function: Range: Function:
Size [0.001 - 1 Reduces the influence of high nominal rated output of the unit. This
related* s] frequency ripple and system parameter is visible in LCP if
resonance in the calculation of supply parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [1] US
3 3 voltage. Without this filter, the ripples

in the currents can distort the 1-22 Motor Voltage
calculated voltage and affect the Range: Function:
stability of the system.
Size [ 10 - Enter the nominal motor voltage
related* 1000 V] according to the motor nameplate
1-18 Min. Current at No Load data. The default value corresponds to
Range: Function: the nominal rated output of the unit.
0 %* [0 - 50 %] Adjust this parameter to achieve a smoother
motor operation. 1-23 Motor Frequency
Range: Function:
3.3.4 1-2* Motor Data Size [20 - Min - Max motor frequency: 20-1000 Hz.
related* 1000 Select the motor frequency value from the
Hz] motor nameplate data. If a value different
This parameter group contains input data from the
from 50 Hz or 60 Hz is selected, adapt the
nameplate on the connected motor.
load independent settings in
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
NOTICE Speed to parameter 1-53 Model Shift Frequency.
Changing the value of these parameters affects the For 87 Hz operation with 230/400 V motors,
setting of other parameters. set the nameplate data for 230 V/50 Hz. To
run at 87 Hz, adapt parameter 4-13 Motor
NOTICE Speed High Limit [RPM] and

1-20 Motor Power [kW], 1-21 Motor Power [HP], 1-22 Motor
Voltage and 1-23 Motor Frequency have no effect when 1-24 Motor Current
1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM.
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.10 - Enter the nominal motor current
1-20 Motor Power [kW] related* 10000.00 A] value from the motor nameplate
Range: Function: data. The data are used for
Size [ 0.09 - NOTICE calculating torque, motor
related* 3000.00 protection etc.
This parameter cannot be adjusted
kW]
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
Range: Function:
Enter the nominal motor power in kW
according to the motor nameplate data. Size [10 - 60000 Enter the nominal motor speed
The default value corresponds to the related* RPM] value from the motor nameplate
nominal rated output of the unit. data. The data are used for
This parameter is visible in LCP if calculating motor compensations.
parameter 0-03 Regional Settings is [0] nm,n = ns - nslip.
International.
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
NOTICE Range: Function:
4 sizes down, 1 size up from Size [0.1 - Enter the value from the motor nameplate
nominal unit rating. related* 10000 data. The default value corresponds to the
Nm] nominal rated output. This parameter is
available when parameter 1-10 Motor
1-21 Motor Power [HP]
Construction is set to [1] PM, non-salient
Range: Function: SPM, i.e. the parameter is valid for PM and
Size [ 0.09 - Enter the nominal motor power in hp non-salient SPM motors only.
related* 3000.00 according to the motor nameplate data.
hp] The default value corresponds to the
40 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA) NOTICE

Option: Function: It is important to set motor parameter group 1-2* Motor
NOTICE Data correctly, since these form part of the AMA
algorithm. An AMA must be performed to achieve
optimum dynamic motor performance. It may take up to
10 min, depending on the power rating of the motor.
3 3
The AMA function optimises dynamic motor
performance by automatically optimising the
NOTICE
advanced motor parameters Avoid generating external torque during AMA.
(parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)) at motor NOTICE
standstill.
If one of the settings in parameter group 1-2* Motor
Activate the AMA function by pressing [Hand Data is changed, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
on] after selecting [1] or [2] Enable Reduced parameter 1-39 Motor Poles, the advanced motor
AMA. See also the section Automatic Motor parameters, return to default setting.
Adaptation in the Design Guide. After a normal
sequence, the display reads: "Press [OK] to
finish AMA". After pressing [OK], the frequency
NOTICE
converter is ready for operation. AMA works problem-free on 1 motor size down, typically
works on 2 motor sizes down, rarely works on 3 sizes
[0] Off
down and never work on 4 sizes down. Keep in mind
*
that the accuracy of the measured motor data is poorer
[1] Enable Performs AMA of the stator resistance RS, the
when operating on motors smaller than nominal
Complete rotor resistance Rr, the stator leakage reactance
frequency converter size.
AMA X1, the rotor leakage reactance X2 and the main
reactance Xh. Do not select this option if an LC
filter is used between the frequency converter
3.3.5 1-3* Adv. Motor Data
and the motor.
FC 301: The Complete AMA does not include Xh Parameters for advanced motor data. Ensure that the
measurement for FC 301. Instead, the Xh value motor data in parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to
is determined from the motor database. RS is parameter 1-39 Motor Poles match the motor. The default
the best adjustment method (see 1-3* Adv. settings are based on standard motor values. If the motor
Motor Data). parameters are not set correctly, a malfunction of the
It is recommended to obtain the Advanced frequency converter system may occur. If the motor data
Motor Data from the motor manufacturer to are unknown, running an AMA (Automatic Motor
enter into parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) Adaptation) is recommended. See
through parameter 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) parameter 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation (AMA).
for best performance. Parameter groups 1-3* Adv. Motor Data and 1-4* Adv. Motor
Complete AMA cannot be performed on Data II cannot be adjusted while the motor is running.
permanent magnet motors.
[2] Enable Performs a reduced AMA of the stator

NOTICE
Reduced resistance Rs in the system only. This option is A simple check of the X1 + Xh sum value is to divide the
AMA available for standard asynchronous motors and line to line motor voltage by the sqrt(3) and divide this
non-salient PM motors. value by the motor no load current. [VL-L/sqrt(3)]/INL =
X1 + Xh, see Illustration 3.6. These values are important
Note: to magnetise the motor properly. For high pole motors it
is highly recommended to perform this check.
For the best adaptation of the frequency
converter, run AMA on a cold motor.
AMA cannot be performed while the motor is

running.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 41

P 1-34 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)
130BA065.12
P 1-30 P 1-33
I1 Rs X1 X'2
Range: Function:
motor. All compensations are
reset to 100%.
U1
P 1-36 P 1-35 P 1-31 2. Enter the Rr value manually.
3 3 RFe Xh R'r Obtain the value from the
motor supplier.
3. Use the Rr default setting. The

frequency converter establishes
Illustration 3.6 Motor Equivalent Diagram for an
the setting based on the motor
Asynchronous Motor
nameplate data.
NOTICE
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
Parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) does not have effect
Range: Function: when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non-salient SPM.
Size [ 0.0140 - Set the line to common stator resistance
related* 140.0000 value. Enter the value from a motor
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1)
Ohm] datasheet or perform an AMA on a cold
motor.
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0400 - Set the stator leakage reactance of the
NOTICE related* 400.0000 motor using one of these methods:
For salient PM motors and Ohm] 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor.
synchronous reluctance motors: The frequency converter
AMA is not available. measures the value from the
If only line-line data are available, motor.
divide the line-line value by 2 to
2. Enter the X1 value manually.
achieve the line to common
Obtain the value from the
(starpoint) value. Alternatively
motor supplier.
measure the value with an
ohmmeter, this also takes the 3. Use the X1 default setting. The
resistance of the cable into account. frequency converter establishes
Divide the measured value by 2 and the setting based on the motor
enter the result. nameplate data.
See Illustration 3.6.

NOTICE NOTICE
The parameter value is updated
after each torque calibration if
option [3] 1st start with store or
option [4] Every start with store is
selected in parameter
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) NOTICE

Range: Function: This parameter is only relevant for
Size [ 0.0100 - Set the rotor resistance value Rr to ASM.
related* 100.0000 improve shaft performance.
Ohm]
1. Run an AMA on a cold motor.
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2)
The frequency converter
measures the value from the
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.0400 - Set the rotor leakage reactance of the
related* 400.0000 motor using one of these methods:
Ohm]
42 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) 1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe)
1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. unknown, leave parameter 1-36 Iron
The frequency converter Loss Resistance (Rfe) on default setting.
2.
motor.
Enter the X2 value manually.

1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
Range: Function:
3 3
Obtain the value from the Size [0.0 - Enter line to common direct axis
motor supplier. related* 1000.0 inductance of the PM motor. Obtain the
3. Use the X2 default setting. The mH] value from the permanent magnet motor
frequency converter establishes data sheet.
the setting based on the motor If only line-line data are available, divide
nameplate data. the line-line value by 2 to achieve the
line-common (starpoint) value. Alterna-
See Illustration 3.6.
tively measure the value with an
NOTICE inductancemeter, this also takes the
inductance of the cable into account.
Divide the measured value by 2 and enter
the result.
This parameter is only active when
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction has the
value [1] PM, non-salient SPM (Permanent
Magnet Motor).
For a selection with one decimal, use this
NOTICE parameter. For a selection with three
This parameter is only relevant for decimals, use parameter 30-80 d-axis
ASM. Inductance (Ld).
FC 302 only.
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh)

NOTICE
Range: Function: The parameter value is updated
Size [ 1.0000 - Set the main reactance of the motor
related* 10000.0000 using one of these methods:
Ohm] 1. Run an AMA on a cold motor. selected in parameter
The frequency converter parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration.
motor.
NOTICE
2. Enter the Xh value manually.
This parameter is only relevant for
Obtain the value from the
ASM.
motor supplier.
3. Use the Xh default setting.

The frequency converter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq)
establishes the setting based Range: Function:
on the motor nameplate data. Size related* [0.000 - 1000 Set the value of the q-axis
mH] inductance. See the motor data
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) sheet.
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the equivalent iron loss 1-39 Motor Poles
related* 10000.000 resistance (RFe) value to compensate Range: Function:
Ohm] for iron loss in the motor. Size related* [2 - 128 ] Enter the number of motor poles.
The RFe value cannot be found by
performing an AMA.
The RFe value is especially important in
torque control applications. If RFe is
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 43

Poles ~nn@ 50 Hz ~nn@ 60 Hz 1-41 Motor Angle Offset

2 2700-2880 3250-3460 Range: Function:
4 1350-1450 1625-1730
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] PM,
6 700-960 840-1153
non-salient SPM (Permanent Magnet Motor).
3 3 Table 3.6 Number of Poles for Normal Speed Ranges

1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat)
Table 3.6 shows the number of poles for normal speed Range: Function:
ranges of various motor types. Define motors designed for Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
other frequencies separately. The motor pole value is related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Ld. Ideally; this
always an even number, because it refers to the total parameter has the same value as
number of poles, not pairs of poles. The frequency parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). If
converter creates the initial setting of parameter 1-39 Motor the motor supplier provides an induction
Poles based on parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency and curve, enter the induction value at 200%
parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed. of the nominal value here.
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM

1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat)
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Set the nominal back EMF for the motor
Size [0 - This parameter corresponds to the
related* 9000 V] when running at 1000 RPM.
related* 1000 mH] inductance saturation of Lq. Ideally; this
Back EMF is the voltage generated by a PM
parameter has the same value as
motor when no frequency converter is
parameter 1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq). If
connected and the shaft is turned
the motor supplier provides an induction
externally. Back EMF is normally specified
curve, enter the induction value at 200%
for nominal motor speed or for 1000 RPM
of the nominal value here.
measured between 2 lines. If the value is
not available for a motor speed of 1000
1-46 Position Detection Gain
RPM, calculate the correct value as follows.
If back EMF is eg. 320 V at 1800 RPM, it can Range: Function:
be calculated at 1000 RPM as follows: 100 %* [20 - 200 Adjusts the amplitude of the test pulse
Example %] during position detection at start. Adjust
Back EMF 320 V at 1800 RPM. Back EMF= this parameter to improve the position
(Voltage/RPM)*1000 = (320/1800)*1000 = measurement.
178.

1-47 Torque Calibration
parameter 1-10 Motor Construction is set to Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full
[1] PM motor (Permanent Magnet Motor). speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power,
FC 302 only. Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the
correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the
NOTICE power loss in both the motor, the cable and the frequency
When using PM motors, it is converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust
recommended to use brake resistors. parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter
to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this
1-41 Motor Angle Offset function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it
Range: Function: starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal
0* [-32768 - Enter the correct offset angle between the PM performance.
32767 ] motor and the index position (single-turn) of the Option: Function:
attached encoder or resolver. The value range of
[0] Off
0 - 32768 corresponds to 0 - 2 * pi (radians). To
[1] 1st start after Calibrates at the first start-up after
obtain the offset angle value: After frequency
pwr-up power up and keeps this value until
converter start-up apply DC-hold and enter the
reset by a power cycle.
value of parameter 16-20 Motor Angle into this
parameter. [2] Every start Calibrates at every start-up, compen-
sating for a possible change in motor
44 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-47 Torque Calibration 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed

Use this parameter to optimise the torque estimate in the full Range: Function:
speed range. The estimated torque is based on the shaft power, Magn. current
130BA045.11
Pshaft = Pm - Rs * I2. This means that it is important to have the
100%
correct Rs value. The Rs value in this formula is equal to the Par.1-50
power loss in both the motor, the cable and the frequency
converter. Sometimes it is not possible to adjust Par.1-51 Hz
3 3
Par.1-52 RPM
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) on each frequency converter
to compensate for the cable length, frequency converter losses Illustration 3.7 Motor Magnetisation
and the temperature deviation on the motor. When enabling this
function, the frequency converter calculates the Rs value when it
starts, ensuring the optimal torque estimate and thereby optimal
performance.
NOTICE
Option: Function: Parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed has no
effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient
temperature since last start-up. The
SPM.
value is reset after a power cycle.
[3] 1st start with The frequency converter calibrates the

1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM]
store torque at the first start-up after power-
up. This option is used to update Range: Function:
motor parameters Size [10 - Set the required speed for normal
parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs), related* 300 magnetising current. If the speed is set
parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage RPM] lower than the motor slip speed,
Reactance (X1), parameter 1-34 Rotor parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
Leakage Reactance (X2) and Speed and parameter 1-51 Min Speed
parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld). Normal Magnetising [RPM] are of no signif-
icance.
[4] Every start The frequency converter calibrates the
Use this parameter along with
with store torque at every start-up, compensating
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero
for a possible change in motor
Speed. See Table 3.6.
temperature since last start-up. This
option is used to update motor
parameters parameter 1-30 Stator
NOTICE
Resistance (Rs), parameter 1-33 Stator Parameter 1-51 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] has
Leakage Reactance (X1), no effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non
parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance salient SPM.
(X2) and parameter 1-37 d-axis
Inductance (Ld). 1-52 Min Speed Normal Magnetising [Hz]
Range: Function:
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point
Size [0 - Set the required frequency for normal
Range: Function: related* 250.0 Hz] magnetising current. If the frequency is
35 %* [1 - 500 %] Inductance Saturation Point. set lower than the motor slip frequency,
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
Zero Speed is inactive.
3.3.6 1-5* Load Indep. Setting Use this parameter along with
parameter 1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at Zero Speed Zero Speed. See Illustration 3.7.
Range: Function:
100 [0 - Use this parameter along with parameter 1-51 Min 1-53 Model Shift Frequency
%* 300 Speed Normal Magnetising [RPM] to obtain a Range: Function:
%] different thermal load on the motor when running Size [4 - NOTICE
at low speed. related* 18.0
Enter a value which is a percentage of the rated This parameter cannot be adjusted
Hz]
magnetising current. If the setting is too low, the while the motor is running.
torque on the motor shaft may be reduced.
Flux Model shift
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 45

1-53 Model Shift Frequency 1-54 Voltage reduction in fieldweakening

Enter the frequency value for shift between 2 0 V* [0 - 100 The value of this parameter reduces the
models for determining motor speed. Select V] maximal voltage available for the flux of the
the value based on settings in motor in fieldweakning, giving more voltage
3 3 parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode and

parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle. There
available for torque. Be aware that too high
value may give stall problems at high speed.
are 2 options: shift between Flux model 1 and
Flux model 2; or shift between Variable 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U
Current mode and Flux model 2. FC 302 only. Range: Function:
Flux Model 1 Flux model 2 Size [0 - Enter the voltage at each frequency point
This model is used when related* 1000 V] to manually form a U/f characteristic
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to matching the motor.
Speed closed loop [1] or Torque [2] and The frequency points are defined in
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to parameter 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F.
Flux w/motor feedback [3]. With this parameter This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
it is possible to make an adjustment of the and is only accessible when
shifting point where FC 302 changes between parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set
Flux model 1 and Flux model 2, which is to [0] U/f.
useful in some sensitive speed and torque
control applications. 1-56 U/f Characteristic - F
fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125 Range: Function:
130BA146.11
Size [0 - Enter the frequency points to manually

Flux model 1 Flux model 2 related* 1000.0 form a U/f-characteristic matching the
Hz] motor.
P 1-53 fout The voltage at each point is defined in
Illustration 3.8 Parameter 1-00 Configu- parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U.
ration Mode = [1] Speed closed loop or [2] This parameter is an array parameter [0-5]
Torque and parameter 1-01 Motor Control and is only accessible when
Principle = [3] Flux w/motor feedback parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is
set to [0] U/f.
Motor Voltage
130BA166.10
Variable Current - Flux model - Sensorless Par 1-55 [x]
This model is used when
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
1-55[5]
[0] Speed open loop and parameter 1-01 Motor
1-55[4]
Control Principle is set to [2] Flux sensorless.
1-55[3]
In speed open loop in flux mode, the speed is
determined from the current measurement.
Below fnorm x 0.1, the frequency converter 1-55[2]
runs on a Variable Current model. Above fnorm
1-55[1]
x 0.125 the frequency converter runs on a 1-55[0]
Flux model. 1-56
1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56 1-56
[0] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
fN,M x 0.1 fN,M x 0.125
130BA147.10
Output Frequency
Variable Par 1-56 [x]
current Flux model 2
model Illustration 3.10 U/f Characteristic
P 1-53 fout
Illustration 3.9 Parameter 1-00 Configu-

1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current
ration Mode = [0] Speed open loop,
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle = Range: Function:
[2] Flux sensorless Size [0 - Sets the current level for the flystart test
related* 200 %] pulses that are used to detect the motor
direction. 100% means Im,n. Adjust the
value to be big enough to avoid noise
46 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current Um
130BA046.11
Par.1-60 Par.1-61
Range: Function: 100%
influence but low enough to avoid
affecting the accuracy (current must be
able to drop to zero before the next pulse).
Reduce the value to reduce the generated
torque.
60% 3 3
Default is 30% for asynchronous motors,
but may vary for PM motors. For PM
motors adjusting, the value tunes for back
EMF and d-axis inductance of the motor.
This parameter is only available in VVCplus.
0% fout
1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency Changeover
Illustration 3.11 Changeover
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Sets the frequency of the flystart test pulses
related* 500 %] that are used to detect the motor direction.
100% means means 2 x fslip. Increase this 1-61 High Speed Load Compensation
value to reduce the generated torque. For Range: Function:
PM motors this value is the percentage 100 %* [0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in
nm,n of the free running PM motor. Above %] relation to load when the motor is running
this value flystart is always performed. at high speed and obtain the optimum U/f
Below this value, the start mode is selected characteristic. The motor size determines the
in parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode frequency range within which this parameter
This parameter is only available in VVCplus. is active.
Motor size Changeover

3.3.7 1-6* Load Depend. Setting
0.25 kW - 7.5 kW > 10 Hz
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation Table 3.7 Changeover Frequency

Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 300 Enter the % value to compensate voltage in 1-62 Slip Compensation
%] relation to load when the motor is running Range: Function:
at low speed and obtain the optimum U/f Size [-500 Enter the % value for slip compensation, to
characteristic. The motor size determines the related* - 500 compensate for tolerances in the value of
frequency range within which this parameter %] nM,N. Slip compensation is calculated automat-
is active. ically, i.e. on the basis of the rated motor
speed nM,N.
Motor size Changeover This function is not active when
0.25 kW-7.5 kW <10 Hz parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to
[1] Speed closed loop or [2] Torque Torque
control with speed feedback or when
parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to
[0] U/f special motor mode.
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant

Range: Function:
Size [0.05 - 5 Enter the slip compensation reaction
related* s] speed. A high value results in slow
reaction, and a low value results in
quick reaction. If low-frequency
resonance problems arise, use a longer
time setting.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 47

NOTICE 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed

Parameter 1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant has no This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient Range: Function:
SPM. parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
composed of the torque generating
3 3 1-64 Resonance Dampening current and the magnetising current.

Example: Set parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Range: Function:
Motor Mode to 100% and set
100 [0 - Enter the resonance dampening value. Set
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator
%* 500 %] parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
Mode to 60%. parameter 1-66 Min. Current
parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
at Low Speed automatically adjusts to
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
about 127%, depending on the motor size.
resonance problems. To reduce resonance
FC 302 only.
oscillation, increase the value of
parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening.
1-67 Load Type
NOTICE This parameter is valid for FC 302 only.
Parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening has no effect when Option: Function:

1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM. [0] * Passive load For conveyers, fan and pump applications.
[1] Active load For hoisting applications, used in slip

1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant compensation at low speed. When [1] Active
Range: Function: Load is selected, set parameter 1-66 Min.
Current at Low Speed to a level which
5 ms* [5 - 50 Set parameter 1-64 Resonance Dampening and
corresponds to maximum torque.
ms] parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time
Constant to help eliminate high-frequency
1-68 Minimum Inertia
resonance problems. Enter the time constant
that provides the best dampening. Range: Function:
Size NOTICE
[ 0.0001 -
NOTICE related* par. 1-69
kgm]
Parameter 1-65 Resonance Dampening Time Constant has while motor is running.
no effect when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non
salient SPM. Needed for average inertia calculation.
Enter the minimum moment of inertia of
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed the mechanical system.
This parameter is valid for FC 302 only. Parameter 1-68 Minimum Inertia and
parameter 1-69 Maximum Inertia are used
Range: Function:
for pre-adjustment of the Proportional
Size [1 - Enter the minimum motor current at low Gain in the speed control, see
related* 200 %] speed, see parameter 1-53 Model Shift parameter 30-83 Speed PID Proportional
Frequency. Increasing this current improves Gain.
motor torque at low speed. FC 302 only.
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
enabled when parameter 1-00 Configu- 1-69 Maximum Inertia
ration Mode [0] Speed open loop only. The
Range: Function:
frequency converter runs with constant
current through motor for speeds below Size NOTICE
[ par. 1-68 -
10 Hz. related* 0.4800
This parameter cannot be
For speeds above 10 Hz, the motor flux kgm]
adjusted while motor is running.
model in the frequency converter controls
the motor. parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Active in Flux Open Loop only. Used
Motor Mode and/or parameter 4-17 Torque to compute the acceleration torque at
Limit Generator Mode automatically adjust low speed. Used in the torque limit
parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed. controller.
The parameter with the highest value FC 302 only.
adjusts parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low
Speed. The current setting in
48 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.3.8 1-7* Start Adjustments 1-72 Start Function

Option: Function:
1-70 PM Start Mode applications without counterweight and
Select the PM motor start-up mode. This is done to initialise the especially in applications with a Cone-motor,
VVCplus control core for previously free running PM motor. Both where the start is clockwise, followed by
selections estimate the speed and angle. Active for PM motors in
VVCplus only. [4] Horizontal
rotation in the reference direction.
Only possible with VVCplus.

3 3
Option: Function: operation For obtaining the function described in
[0] * Rotor Detection Estimates the electrical angle of parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and
the rotor and uses this as a parameter 1-76 Start Current during the start
starting point. Standard delay time. The motor rotates in the reference
selection for AutomationDrive direction. If the reference signal equals zero
applications. (0), parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] is ignored
and the output speed equals zero (0). The
[1] Parking The Parking function applies
output current corresponds to the setting of
DC current across the stator
the start current in parameter 1-76 Start
winding and rotates the rotor
Current.
to electrical zero position
(typically selected for HVAC [5] VVC+/Flux For the function described in
applications). clockwise parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] only. The
start current is calculated automatically. This
1-71 Start Delay function uses the start speed in the start delay
time only. Regardless of the value set by the
Range: Function:
reference signal, the output speed equals the
0 s* [0 - 25.5 s] This parameter refers to the start function
setting of the start speed in
selected in parameter 1-72 Start Function.
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. [3] Start
Enter the time delay required before
speed/current clockwise and [5] VVCplus/Flux
commencing acceleration.
clockwise are typically used in hoisting
applications. [4] Start speed/current in reference
1-72 Start Function
direction is particularly used in applications
Option: Function: with counterweight and horizontal movement.
Select the start function during start delay.
This parameter is linked to
[6] Hoist Mech. For utilising mechanical brake control
parameter 1-71 Start Delay.
Brake Rel functions, parameter 2-24 Stop Delay to
[0] DC Hold/ Energises motor with a DC holding current parameter 2-28 Gain Boost Factor. This
delay time (parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current) during the parameter is only active when
start delay time. parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle is set to
[1] DC Brake/ Energises motor with a DC braking current [3] Flux w/ motor feedback (FC 302 only).
delay time (parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current) during the [7] VVC+/Flux
start delay time. counter-cw
[2] Coast/delay Motor coasted during the start delay time
1-73 Flying Start
* time (inverter off).
Option: Function:
[3] Start speed Only possible with VVCplus.
cw Connect the function described in
NOTICE
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] and This parameter cannot be adjusted
parameter 1-76 Start Current in the start delay while the motor is running.
time.
Regardless of the value applied by the This function makes it possible to catch a
reference signal, the output speed applies the motor which is spinning freely due to a mains
setting of the start speed in drop-out.
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM] or
[0] Disabled No function
parameter 1-75 Start Speed [Hz] and the output
current corresponds to the setting of the start [1] Enabled Enables the frequency converter to catch
current in parameter 1-76 Start Current. This and control a spinning motor.
function is typically used in hoisting When parameter 1-73 Flying Start is enabled,
parameter 1-71 Start Delay and
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 49

1-73 Flying Start 1-76 Start Current

Option: Function: Range: Function:
parameter 1-72 Start Function have no This parameter can be used for hoist applications
function. (cone rotor).
[2] Enabled
3 3 Always 3.3.9 1-8* Stop Adjustments
[3] Enabled Ref.
Dir.
1-80 Function at Stop
[4] Enab. Always
Option: Function:
Ref. Dir.
Select the frequency converter function
NOTICE after a stop command or after the speed is
This function is not recommended for hoisting ramped down to the settings in
applications. parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at
For power levels above 55 kW, flux mode must be used Stop [RPM].
to achieve the best performance. [0] Coast Leaves motor in free mode. The motor is
* disconnected from the frequency converter.
NOTICE [1] DC hold Energises motor with a DC holding current
To obtain the best flying start performance the advanced (see parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current).
motor data, parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) to [2] Motor check Checks if a motor has been connected.
parameter 1-35 Main Reactance (Xh), must be correct.
[3] Pre- Builds up a magnetic field while the motor
magnetizing is stopped. This allows the motor to
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] produce torque quickly at subsequent start
Range: Function: commands (asynchronous motors only). This
Size [0 - Set a motor start speed. After the start pre-magnetising function does not help the
related* 600 signal, the output speed leaps to set value. very first start command. 2 different
RPM] Set the start function in solutions are available to pre-magnetise the
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start machine for the first start command:
speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or [5] VVC 1. Start the frequency converter
+/Flux clockwise, and set a start delay time with a 0 RPM reference and wait 2
in parameter 1-71 Start Delay. to 4 rotor time constants (see
below) before increasing the speed
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] reference.
Range: Function: 2a. Set parameter 1-71 Start Delay
Size [0 - This parameter can be used for hoist to the desired pre-mag time (2 to
related* 500.0 applications (cone rotor). Set a motor start 4 rotor time constants - see
Hz] speed. After the start signal, the output below).
speed leaps to set value. Set the start
2b. Set parameter 1-72 Start
function in parameter 1-72 Start Function to
Function to either [0] DC-hold or [1]
[3] Start speed cw, [4] Horizontal operation or
DC-Brake.
[5] VVC+/Flux clockwise, and set a start delay
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay. Set the DC-hold or DC-brake
current magnitude
1-76 Start Current (parameter 2-00 DC Hold Current or
parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current)
Range: Function:
to be equal to I_pre-mag = Unom/
0 [0 - Some motors, e.g. cone rotor motors, need extra
(1.73 x Xh)
A* par. current/starting speed to disengage the rotor. To
1-24 A] obtain this boost, set the required current in Sample rotor time constants =
parameter 1-76 Start Current. Set (Xh+X2)/(6.3*Freq_nom*Rr)
parameter 1-74 Start Speed [RPM]. Set 1 kW = 0.2 s
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [3] Start speed cw 10 kW = 0.5 s
or [4] Horizontal operation, and set a start delay 100 kW = 1.7 s
time in parameter 1-71 Start Delay. 1000 kW = 2.5 s
50 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1-80 Function at Stop 1-83 Precise Stop Function

[4] DC Voltage When the motor is stopped, the [3] Speed Stops at precisely the same point, regardless of
U0 parameter 1-55 U/f Characteristic - U [0] comp the present speed, the stop signal is delayed
parameter defines the voltage at 0 Hz. stop internally when the present speed is lower than
[5] Coast at low

reference
When the reference is below 1-81 Min Speed
for Function at Stop [RPM], the motor is
the maximum speed (set in parameter 4-19 Max
Output Frequency).
3 3
The delay is calculated on the basis of the
disconnected from the frequency converter.
reference speed of the frequency converter and
[6] Motor check, not on the basis of the actual speed. Make sure
alarm that the frequency converter has ramped up
before activating the speed compensated stop.
1-81 Min Speed for Function at Stop [RPM]
Range: Function: [4] Com cnt Same as [3] but after each precise stop the
stop number of pulses counted during ramp down to
Size related* [0 - 600 RPM] Set the speed at which to activate
w/rst 0 RPM is reset.
1-80 Function at Stop.
[5] Comp Same as [3] but the number of pulses counted
1-82 Min Speed for Function at Stop [Hz] cnt stop during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the
Range: Function: w/o r counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise
Stop Counter Value.
Size related* [ 0 - 20.0 Hz] Set the output frequency at which
This reset function can for example be used to
to activate 1-80 Function at Stop.
compensate for the extra distance done during
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of
1-83 Precise Stop Function
gradual wear of mechanical parts.
Option: Function:
NOTICE The Precise Stop Functions are advantageous in
applications where high precision is required.
If using a standard stop command, the accuracy is
determined by the internal task time. That is not the case
when using the precise stop function; it eliminates the task
FC 302 only.
time dependence and increases the accuracy substantially.
[0] Precise Only optimal when the operational speed - of e.g. The frequency converter tolerance is normally given by its
* ramp the conveyor belt - is constant. This is an open task time. However, by using its special precise stop
stop loop control. Achieves high repetitive precision at function the tolerance is independent of the task time
the stopping point. because the stop signal immediately interrupts the
execution of the frequency converter program. The precise
[1] Cnt stop Counts the number of pulses, typically from an
stop function gives a highly reproducible delay from the
with encoder and generates a stop signal after a pre-
stop signal is given until the ramping down starts. A test
reset programmed number of pulses -
must be done to find this delay as it is a sum of sensor,
parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value - has
PLC, frequency converter and mechanical parts.
been received at T29 or T33 [30].
To ensure optimum accuracy there should be at least 10
This is a direct feedback with one-way closed loop
cycles during ramping down, see parameter 3-42 Ramp 1
control.
Ramp Down Time, parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,
The counter function is activated (starts timing) at
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time and
the edge of the start signal (when it changes
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
from stop to start). After each precise stop the
The Precise Stop Function is set up here and enabled from
number of pulses counted during ramp down to
DI T29 or T33.
0 RPM is reset.
[2] Cnt stop Same as [1] but the number of pulses counted 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value
w/o during ramp down to 0 RPM is deducted from the Range: Function:
reset counter value entered in parameter 1-84 Precise 100000* [0 - Enter the counter value to be used in
Stop Counter Value. 999999999 ] the integrated precise stop function,
This reset function can for example be used to parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
compensate for the extra distance done during The maximum permissible frequency at
ramping down and to reduce the impacts of terminal 29 or 33 is 110 kHz.
gradual wear of mechanical parts.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 51

1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection

NOTICE For the North American market: The ETR
functions provide class 20 motor overload
Not used for selections [0] Precise
protection in accordance with NEC.
ramp stop and [3] Speed comp stop
3 3 in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop [0] No
protection
Continuously overloaded motor, when no
warning or trip of the frequency converter is
Function
required.
[1] Thermistor Activates a warning when the connected

1-85 Precise Stop Speed Compensation Delay
warning thermistor or KTY-sensor in the motor reacts
Range: Function: in the event of motor over-temperature.
10 ms* [0 - Enter the delay time for sensors, PLCs, etc. for
[2] Thermistor Stops (trips) the frequency converter when
100 ms] use in parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. In
trip connected thermistor or KTY sensor in the
speed compensated stop mode, the delay time
motor reacts in the event of motor over-
at different frequencies has a major influence
temperature.
on the stop function.
The thermistor cut-out value must be > 3 k.
NOTICE
Integrate a thermistor (PTC sensor) in the
Not used for selections [0] Precise ramp motor for winding protection.
stop, [1] Cnt stop with reset and [2] Cnt
stop w/o reset in parameter 1-83 Precise [3] ETR Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active
Stop Function warning 1 and activates a warning on the display when
the motor is overloaded. Programme a
warning signal via one of the digital outputs.
[4] ETR trip 1 Calculates the load when set-up 1 is active

3.3.10 1-9* Motor Temperature
and stops (trips) frequency converter when the
motor is overloaded. Programme a warning
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection
signal via one of the digital outputs. The
Option: Function: signal appears in the event of a warning and
Thermal motor protection can be if the frequency converter trips (thermal
implemented using a range of techniques: warning).
Via a PTC sensor in the motor [5] ETR

windings connected to one of the warning 2
analog or digital inputs [6] ETR trip 2
(parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source). [7] ETR
See chapter 3.3.11.1 PTC Thermistor warning 3
Connection. [8] ETR trip 3
Via a KTY sensor in the motor [9] ETR
winding connected to an analog warning 4
input (parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor [10] ETR trip 4
Resource). See chapter 3.3.11.2 KTY [20] ATEX ETR Activates the thermal monitoring function for
Sensor Connection. Ex-e motors for ATEX. Enables
parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed
Via calculation (ETR = Electronic
Thermal Relay) of the thermal load, reduction, parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol.
based on the actual load and time. points freq. and parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
The calculated thermal load is interpol points current.
compared with the rated motor [21] Advanced
current IM,N and the rated motor ETR
frequency fM,N. See
chapter 3.3.11.3 ETR and NOTICE
chapter 3.3.11.4 ATEX ETR. If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, follow the instructions in the
Via a mechanical thermal switch dedicated chapter of the VLT AutomationDrive Design
(Klixon type). See Guide and the instructions given by the motor
chapter 3.3.11.5 Klixon. manufacturer.
52 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE
+10V
130BA153.11
If [20] ATEX ETR is selected, parameter 4-18 Current Limit 39 42 50 53 54 55
OFF
must be set to 150%.
3.3.11.1 PTC Thermistor Connection

ON
3 3
175HA183.10
R
() PTC / Thermistor <3.0 k R
>3.0 k
Illustration 3.14 PTC Thermistor Connection - Analog Input
4000
Input Supply voltage Threshold
3000 digital/analog cut-out values
Digital 10 V < 800 - > 2.7 k
1330
Analog 10 V < 3.0 k - > 3.0 k
550
NOTICE
Check that the selected supply voltage follows the
250
specification of the used thermistor element.
[C]
3.3.11.2 KTY Sensor Connection
-20C nominel -5C nominel +5C
nominel (FC 302 only)
Illustration 3.12 PTC Profile KTY sensors are used especially in permanent magnet
servo motors (PM motors) for dynamic adjusting of motor
parameters as stator resistance (parameter 1-30 Stator
Using a digital input and 10 V as power supply: Resistance (Rs)) for PM motors and also rotor resistance
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor (parameter 1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr)) for asynchronous
temperature is too high. motors, depending on winding temperature. The
Parameter set-up: calculation is:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] Rs = Rs20 C x 1 + cu x T where cu = 0.00393
Thermistor Trip
KTY sensors can be used for motor protecting
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input
(parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold level).
FC 302 can handle 3 types of KTY sensors, defined in
+10V
130BA152.10
39 42 50 53 54 55
parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor Type. The actual sensor
temperature can be read out from parameter 16-19 KTY
sensor temperature.
OFF
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
ON
PTC / Thermistor <800 >2.7 k R
Illustration 3.13 PTC Thermistor Connection - Digital Input
Using an analog input and 10 V as power supply:

Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
temperature is too high.
Parameter set-up:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2]
Thermistor Trip
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [2] Analog Input 54
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 53

4500 3.3.11.4 ATEX ETR
130BB917.10
4000
The B option MCB 112 PTC Thermistor option offers ATEX
3500 approved monitoring of motor temperature. Alternatively,
an external ATEX approved PTC protection device can be
used.
3 3
3000
NOTICE
Resistance [Ohm]
2500
2000 Only ATEX Ex-e approved motors may be used for this
function. See motor nameplate, approval certificate, data
1500
sheet or contact motor supplier.
1000
When controlling an Ex-e motor with Increased Safety, it
500 is important to ensure certain limitations. The parameters
that must be programmed are presented in the following
0
-25 0 25 50 75 100 125 150 application example.
Temperature [C]
KTY type 1 KTY type 2 KTY type 3 Function Setting

parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [20] ATEX ETR
Illustration 3.15 KTY Type Selection
Protection
parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR 20%
cur.lim. speed reduction
KTY Sensor 1: 1 k at 100 C (e.g. Philips KTY 84-1) parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR
KTY Sensor 2: 1 k at 25 C (e.g. Philips KTY 83-1) interpol. points freq.
KTY Sensor 3: 2 k at 25 C (e.g. Infineon KTY-10 Motor name plate
parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
NOTICE interpol points current
Parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency Enter the same value as for
If the temperature of the motor is utilised through a
parameter 4-19 Max Output
thermistor or KTY sensor, the PELV is not complied with
Frequency
in case of short circuits between motor windings and
parameter 4-19 Max Output Motor name plate, possibly
sensor. To comply with PELV the sensor must be extra
Frequency reduced for long motor
isolated.
cables, sinus filter or reduced
supply voltage
3.3.11.3 ETR parameter 4-18 Current Limit Forced to 150% by 1-90 [20]
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [80] PTC Card 1
The calculations estimate the need for a lower load at parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe [4] PTC 1 Alarm
lower speed due to less cooling from the fan incorporated Stop
in the motor.
parameter 14-01 Switching Check that the default value
Frequency fulfils the requirement from
175ZA052.12
t [s]
Motor name plate. If not, use
2000 sine wave filter.
1000 parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at 0
600
500 Inverter Fault
400
300 Table 3.8 Parameters
200
CAUTION
fOUT = 1 x f M,N(par. 1-23)
100
fOUT = 2 x f M,N
60
50 fOUT = 0.2 x f M,N Compare the minimum switching frequency requirement
40 stated by the motor manufacturer to the minimum
30 switching frequency of the frequency converter, the
20 IM
10 default value in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency. If
1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0 IMN(par. 1-24) the frequency converter does not meet this requirement,
Illustration 3.16 ETR Profile use a sine wave filter.
More information about ATEX ETR Thermal Monitoring can

be found in the Application Note MN33G.
54 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.3.11.5 Klixon 1-93 Thermistor Source

Option: Function:
The Klixon type thermal circuit breaker uses a KLIXON [2] Analog Input
metal dish. At a predetermined overload, the heat caused 54
by the current through the disc causes a trip. [3] Digital input 18
Using a digital input and 24 V as power supply:
Example: The frequency converter trips when the motor
[4] Digital input 19
[5] Digital input 32
3 3
temperature is too high [6] Digital input 33
Parameter set-up:
Set parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection to [2] NOTICE
Thermistor Trip Digital input should be set to [0] PNP - Active at 24 V in
Set parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source to [6] Digital Input 5-00 Digital I/O Mode.
130BA151.11
+24V
GND
OFF 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction

B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
FC 302 only.
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
[20].
ON Range: Function:
PTC / Thermistor
<6.6 k >10.8 k R 0 %* [0 - 100 %]
Illustration 3.17 Thermistor Connection
The reaction for operating in Ex-e current limit must be
configured.
0%: The frequency converter does not change anything
1-91 Motor External Fan besides issuing warning 163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning.
Option: Function: >0%: The frequency converter issuing warning 163 and
[0] No No external fan is required, i.e. the motor is derated at reduces motor speed following ramp 2 (parameter group
low speed. 3-5* Ramp 2).
[1] Yes Applies an external motor fan (external ventilation), so

no derating of the motor is required at low speed. The
Example:
upper curve in graph above (fout = 1 x fM,N) is
Actual reference = 50 RPM
followed if the motor current is lower than nominal
Parameter 1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction = 20%
motor current (see 1-24 Motor Current). If the motor
Resulting reference = 40 RPM
current exceeds nominal current, the operation time 1-95 KTY Sensor Type
still decreases as if no fan were installed.
Option: Function:
Select the used type of KTY sensor. FC 302
1-93 Thermistor Source
only.
Option: Function:
[0] * KTY Sensor 1 1 k at 100 C
NOTICE
[1] KTY Sensor 2 1 k at 25 C
while the motor is running. [2] KTY Sensor 3 2 k at 25 C
Select the input to which the thermistor 1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource
(PTC sensor) should be connected. An Option: Function:
analog input option [1] Analog Input 53 or Selecting analog input terminal 54 to be used
[2] Analog Input 54 cannot be selected if the as KTY sensor input. Terminal 54 cannot be
analog input is already in use as a reference selected as KTY source if otherwise used as
source (selected in 3-15 Reference 1 Source, reference (see parameter 3-15 Reference Resource
3-16 Reference 2 Source or 3-17 Reference 3 1 to parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3).
Source).
FC 302 only.
When using MCB 112, [0] None must always
be selected. NOTICE
[0] None Connection of KTY-sensor between term.
[1] Analog Input 54 and 55 (GND). See Illustration 3.15.
53
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 55

1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource of a machine current greater than 1.5 times the rated
Option: Function: current, shut down is immediate.
[0] * None 1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current

[2] Analog FC 302 only.
Input 54 Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
3 3 1-97 KTY Threshold level

[20] or [21].
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 100 %] Definition of thermal limitation curve.
80 C* [-40 - 140 C] Select the KTY sensor threshold level for
For example, see parameter 1-98 ATEX
motor thermal protection.
ETR interpol. points freq.
FC 302 only.
Use the 4 current points [A] from the motor name plate.
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. Calculate the values as percentage of nominal motor
FC 302 only. current, Im/Im,n x 100 [%], and enter into this array.
Only visible if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection is set to
[20].
Together with parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq.,
Range: Function: these make up a table (f [Hz],I [%]).
Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 Hz]
Enter the 4 frequency points [Hz] from the motor name NOTICE
plate into this array. Together with parameter 1-99 ATEX All frequency/current limit points from the motor name
ETR interpol points current, these can be presented in plate or motor data sheet must be programmed.
Table 3.9.
3.3.12 PM Settings
NOTICE
All frequency/current limit points from the motor name If [2] Std. PM, non salient is selected in
plate or motor data sheet must be programmed. parameter 1-10 Motor Construction, enter the motor
parameters manually, in the following order:
130BB909.10
100% 1. parameter 1-24 Motor Current

2. parameter 1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque
80 %
3. parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal Speed
4. parameter 1-39 Motor Poles
40 %
5. parameter 1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs)
6. parameter 1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld)
7. parameter 1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM
The following parameters have been added for PM motors.
5 Hz 15 Hz 25 Hz 50 Hz
Illustration 3.18 Example of ATEX ETR thermal limitation curve.
x-axis: fm [Hz]
parameter 1-41 Motor Angle Offset
y-axis: Im/Im,n x 100 [%] parameter 1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust
parameter 1-14 Damping Gain
parameter 1-47 Torque Calibration
Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
interpol. points freq. interpol points current parameter 1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current
[0] = 5 Hz [0] = 40% parameter 1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency
[1] = 15 Hz [1] = 80%
parameter 1-70 PM Start Mode
[2] = 25 Hz [2] = 100%
[3] = 50 Hz [3] = 100% parameter 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
parameter 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
All operating points underneath the curve are allowed
continuously. Above the line, however, only for a limited
time calculated as a function of the overload. In the event
56 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE 3.4 Parameters: 2-** Brakes

Standard parameters still need configuration (e.g.
parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency etc.).
3.4.1 2-0* DC-Brakes
Parameter group for configuring the DC brake and DC

Application Settings
hold functions.
Low inertia applications
ILoad/IMotor <5
1-17 Voltage filter time const. to be
increased by factor 5 to 10 2-00 DC Hold Current
3 3
1-14 Damping Gain should be Range: Function:
reduced 50 [0 - Enter a value for holding current as a percentage
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed %* 160 %] of the rated motor current IM,N set in
should be reduced (<100%) parameter 1-24 Motor Current. 100% DC holding
Low inertia applications Keep calculated values current corresponds to IM,N.
50>ILoad/IMotor >5 This parameter holds the motor function (holding
High inertia applications 1-14 Damping Gain, torque) or pre-heats the motor.
ILoad/IMotor > 50 parameter 1-15 Low Speed Filter Time This parameter is active if DC hold is selected in
Const. and parameter 1-16 High parameter 1-72 Start Function [0] or
Speed Filter Time Const. should be parameter 1-80 Function at Stop [1].
increased
High load at low speed 1-17 Voltage filter time const. should NOTICE
<30% (rated speed) be increased
The maximum value depends on the rated motor
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed
current.
should be increased (>100% for
Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
longer time can overheat the motor)
motor.
Table 3.9 Recommendations for VVCplus Applications
Low values of DC hold produces larger than expected
currents with larger motor power sizes. This error
If the motor starts oscillating at a certain speed, increase increases as the motor power increases.
1-14 Damping Gain. Increase the value in small steps.
Depending on the motor, a good value for this parameter 2-01 DC Brake Current
can be 10% or 100% higher than the default value. Range: Function:
50 [0 - Enter a value for current as a percentage of the
Adjust starting torque in 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed. %* 1000 rated motor current IM,N, see parameter 1-24 Motor
100% provides nominal torque as starting torque. %] Current. 100% DC braking current corresponds to
IM,N.
Application Settings DC brake current is applied on a stop command,
Low inertia applications Keep calculated values when the speed is lower than the limit set in
High inertia applications parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]; when
Speed the DC Brake Inverse function is active; or via the
Increase speed to a value between serial communication port. The braking current is
default and maximum depending on active during the time period set in
application. parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time.
Set ramp times matching the
application. Too fast ramp up causes NOTICE
an overcurrent/overtorque. Too fast The maximum value depends on the rated motor
ramp down causes an overvoltage current.
trip. Avoid 100 % current for too long. It may damage the
High load at low speed parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low motor.
Speed
2-02 DC Braking Time
application. Range: Function:
10 s* [0 - 60 s] Set the duration of the DC braking current set
Table 3.10 Recommendations for FLUX Applications in 2-01 DC Brake Current, once activated.
Adjust starting torque in parameter 1-66 Min. Current at

Low Speed. 100% provides nominal torque as starting
torque.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 57

2-03 DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM] 2-10 Brake Function

Size related* [ 0 - 60000 Set the DC brake cut-in speed for [1] Resistor A brake resistor is incorporated in the system, for
RPM] activation of the DC braking current brake dissipation of surplus brake energy as heat.
set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake Connecting a brake resistor allows a higher DC-
3 3 Current, upon a stop command. link voltage during braking (generating operation).
The resistor brake function is only active in
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] frequency converters with an integral dynamic
Range: Function: brake.
Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 Set the DC brake cut-in speed for [2] AC brake Is selected to improve braking without using a
Hz] activation of the DC braking current brake resistor. This parameter controls an
set in parameter 2-01 DC Brake overmagnetisation of the motor when running
Current, upon a stop command. with a generatoric load. This function can improve
the OVC-function. Increasing the electrical losses
NOTICE in the motor allows the OVC function to increase
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] has no effect the braking torque without exceeding the over
when 1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM. voltage limit.
NOTICE
2-05 Maximum Reference The AC brake is not as efficient as dynamic
Range: Function: braking with resistor.
Size [ par. 3-02 - This is an access parameter to AC brake is for VVCplus mode in both open
related* 999999.999 parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference and closed loop.
ReferenceFeed- for legacy products. The maximum
backUnit] reference is the highest value AC brake is for VVCplus and flux mode in both
obtainable by summing all open and closed loop.
references. The maximum reference
unit matches the choice of configu- 2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm)
ration in Range: Function:
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
Size [ 5.00 - Set the brake resistor value in . This
and the unit in
related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power
parameter 3-01 Reference/Feedback
Ohm] to the brake resistor in 2-13 Brake Power
Unit.
Monitoring. This parameter is only active
in frequency converters with an integral
2-06 Parking Current
dynamic brake.
Range: Function: Use this parameter for values without
50 %* [ 0 - 1000 Set current as percentage of rated motor decimals. For a selection with 2 decimals,
%] current, parameter 1-24 Motor Current. Is use parameter 30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm).
used when enabled in parameter 1-70 PM
Start Mode. 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW)
Range: Function:
2-07 Parking Time
Size [ 0.001 - Parameter 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) is
Range: Function: related* 2000.000 the expected average power dissipated in
3 s* [0.1 - 60 s] Set the duration of the Parking Current set in kW] the brake resistor over a period of 120 s.
parameter 2-06 Parking Current, once activated. It is used as the monitoring limit for
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min and thereby
specifies when a warning/alarm is to be
3.4.2 2-1* Brake Energy Funct. given.
To calculate parameter 2-12 Brake Power
Parameter group for selecting dynamic braking parameters. Limit (kW), the following formula can be
Only valid for frequency converters with brake chopper. used.
2-10 Brake Function U2br V t br s
Pbr,avg W =
R br T br s
Option: Function:
Pbr,avg is the average power dissipated in
[0] Off No brake resistor is installed.
the brake resistor, Rbr is the resistance of
58 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) 2-15 Brake Check

the brake resistor. tbr is the active parameter 2-15 Brake Check is only active in
breaking time within the 120 s period, Tbr. frequency converters with an integral dynamic
Ubr is the DC voltage where the brake brake.
resistor is active. This depends on the unit
as follows:
Select type of test and monitoring function to
check the connection to the brake resistor, or
3 3
T2 units: 390 V whether a brake resistor is present, and then
T4 units: 778 V display a warning or an alarm in the event of a
T5 units: 810 V fault.
T6 units: 943 V/1099 V for D F frames
T7 units: 1099 V NOTICE
NOTICE The brake resistor disconnection function
is tested during power-up. However, the
If Rbr is not known, or if Tbr is brake IGBT test is performed when there is
different from 120 s, the practical no braking. A warning or trip disconnects
approach is to run the brake the brake function.
application, readout 16-33 Brake
Energy /2 min and then enter this +
The testing sequence is as follows:
20% in 2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW).
1. The DC-link ripple amplitude is
measured for 300 ms without braking.
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring 2. The DC-link ripple amplitude is
Option: Function: measured for 300 ms with the brake
This parameter is only active in frequency turned on.
converters with an integral dynamic brake. 3. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
This parameter enables monitoring of the power braking is lower than the DC link ripple
to the brake resistor. The power is calculated on amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake
the basis of the resistance (parameter 2-11 Brake check has failed by returning a warning
Resistor (ohm)), the DC link voltage, and the or alarm.
resistor duty time. 4. If the DC-link ripple amplitude while
[0] Off No brake power monitoring required. braking is higher than the DC-link ripple
* amplitude before braking + 1%: Brake
[1] Warning Activates a warning on the display when the check is OK.
power transmitted over 120 s exceeds 100% of [0] Off Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a
the monitoring limit (parameter 2-12 Brake Power * short-circuit during operation. If a short-circuit
Limit (kW) occurs, warning 25 appears.
The warning disappears when the transmitted
[1] Warning Monitors brake resistor and brake IGBT for a
power falls below 80% of the monitoring limit.
short-circuit, and runs a test for brake resistor
[2] Trip Trips frequency converter and displays an alarm disconnection during power-up.
when the calculated power exceeds 100% of the
[2] Trip Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
monitoring limit.
the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
[3] Warning Activates both of the above, including warning, IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
and trip trip and alarm. cuts out while displaying an alarm (trip locked).
If power monitoring is set to [0] Off or [1] Warning, the [3] Stop and Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
brake function remains active, even if the monitoring limit trip the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
is exceeded. This may lead to thermal overload of the IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
resistor. It is also possible to generate a warning via a ramps down to coast and then trips. A trip lock
relay/digital outputs. The measuring accuracy of the power alarm is displayed (e.g. warning 25, 27 or 28).
monitoring depends on the accuracy of the resistance of [4] AC brake Monitors for a short-circuit or disconnection of
the resistor (better than 20%). the brake resistor, or a short-circuit of the brake
IGBT. If a fault occurs, the frequency converter
performs a controlled ramp-down. This option is
available for FC 302 only.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 59

2-15 Brake Check 2-19 Over-voltage Gain

[5] Trip Lock 100 %* [0 - 200 %] Select overvoltage gain.
NOTICE
3.4.3 2-2* Mechanical Brake
3 3 Remove a warning arising in connection with [0] Off or
[1] Warning by cycling the mains supply. The fault must
be corrected first. For [0] Off or [1] Warning, the Parameters for controlling operation of an electro-
frequency converter keeps running even if a fault is magnetic (mechanical) brake, typically required in hoisting
located. applications.
To control a mechanical brake, a relay output (relay 01 or
relay 02) or a programmed digital output (terminal 27 or
2-16 AC brake Max. Current
29) is required. Normally, this output must be closed
Range: Function: during periods when the frequency converter is unable to
100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] Enter the maximum permissible current hold the motor, e.g. due to an excessive load. Select [32]
when using AC brake to avoid Mechanical Brake Control for applications with an electro-
overheating of motor windings. magnetic brake in parameter 5-40 Function Relay,
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output, or 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital
NOTICE Output. When selecting [32] Mechanical brake control, the
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max. Current has no effect when mechanical brake is closed from start up until the output
1-10 Motor Construction = [1] PM, non salient SPM. current is above the level selected in
parameter 2-20 Release Brake Current. During stop, the
mechanical brake activates when the speed falls below the
2-17 Over-voltage Control
level specified in parameter 2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM].
Option: Function: If the frequency converter enters an alarm condition or an
Overvoltage control (OVC) reduces the risk overcurrent or overvoltage situation, the mechanical brake
of the frequency converter tripping due to immediately cuts in. This is also the case during Safe
an overvoltage on the DC link caused by Torque Off.
generative power from the load.
[0] * Disabled No OVC required. NOTICE

[1] Enabled (not Activates OVC except when using a stop Protection mode and trip delay features
at stop) signal to stop the frequency converter. (parameter 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit and
parameter 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault) may delay
[2] Enabled Activates OVC.
the activation of the mechanical brake in an alarm
condition. These features must be disabled in hoisting
NOTICE applications.
Do not enable OVC in hoisting applications.
2-18 Brake Check Condition

Range: Function:
[0] * At Power Up Brake check is performed at power
up.
[1] After Coast Situations Brake check is performed after coast

situations.
60 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

130BA074.12
Start 1=on
term.18 0=off
Par 1-71
Start delay time
3 3
Par 2-21
Activate brake
Shaft speed speed
Par 1-74
Start speed
Output current
Pre-magnetizing
current or
DC hold current Par 2-20
Par 1-76 Start current/
Release brake current
Par 2-23 Par 2-00 DC hold current
Brake delay time
Reaction time EMK brake

on
Relay 01
off
Mechanical brake
locked
Mechanical brake
free
Time
Illustration 3.19 Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current 2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]

Size [0 - Set the motor current for release of the brake, when a stop condition is
related* par. mechanical brake, when a start condition is present.
16-37 A] present. The default value is the maximum
current the inverter can provide for the 2-23 Activate Brake Delay
particular power size. The upper limit is Range: Function:
specified in parameter 16-37 Inv. Max.
0 s* [0 - Enter the brake delay time of the coast after ramp-
Current.
5 s] down time. The shaft is held at zero speed with full
NOTICE holding torque. Ensure that the mechanical brake
has locked the load before the motor enters coast
When Mechanical brake control
mode. See Mechanical Brake Control section in the
output is selected but no mechanical
Design Guide.
brake is connected, the function does
not work by default setting due to To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical
too low motor current. brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
Setting of brake delay parameters does not impact

2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] the torque. The frequency converter does not
Range: Function: register that mechanical brake is holding the load.
Size [0 - Set the motor speed for activation of After setting parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay the
related* 30000 the mechanical brake, when a stop torque drops to zero in few minutes. The sudden
RPM] condition is present. The upper speed torque change leads to movement and noise.
limit is specified in
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. 2-24 Stop Delay
Range: Function:
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz]
0 s* [0 - 5 Set the time interval from the moment when the
Range: Function:
s] motor is stopped until the brake closes.
Size related* [ 0 - 5000.0 Set the motor frequency for
Hz] activation of the mechanical
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 61

2-24 Stop Delay frequency converters are connected to the same

Range: Function: shaft.
To adjust transition of the load to the mechanical No ramp up until feedback confirms mechanical
brake, set parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delay and brake is open.
parameter 2-24 Stop Delay.
Improved load control at stop. If
3 3 This parameter is a part of the stopping function. parameter 2-23 Activate Brake Delayis set too
short, W22 is activated and the torque is not
2-25 Brake Release Time allowed to ramp down.
Range: Function: The transition when motor takes over the load
0.20 s* [0 - 5 s] This value defines the time it takes for the from the brake can be configured. 2-28 Gain
mechanical brake to open. This parameter Boost Factor can be increased to minimise the
must act as a time-out when brake feedback is movement. For very smooth transition change
activated. the setting from the speed control to the position
control during the change-over.
3.4.4 Hoist Mechanical Brake Set 2-28 Gain Boost Factor to 0 to enable
Position Control during 2-02 DC Braking
Time. This enables parameters 2-30 to
The hoist mechanical break control supports the following
2-33 which are PID parameters for the
functions:
Position Control.
2 channels for mechanical brake feedback to offer
further protection against unintended behaviour
resulting from broken cable.
Monitoring of mechanical brake feedback

throughout the complete cycle. This helps protect
the mechanical brake - especially if more
130BA642.12
Motor
Speed Torque Ramp Brake Release Ramp 1 Up Ramp 1 Down Stop Delay Activate Brake Torque Ramp
Up Time Time P. 3-41 P. 3-42 P. 2-24 Delay Down Time
p. 2-27 p. 2-25 P. 2-23 p. 2-29
Torque Ref. p. 2-26
W22 A22 A22

Active Active Active W22
Torque
Active
Ref.
Brake
Relay
High Contact no.1
E.g. DI32 [70] Mech. Brake Feedback
Mech Brake Low
Feedback
High
Contact no.2
Low OPTIONAL
E.g. DI33 [71] Mech. Brake Feedback
Open
Mech Brake
Position
Closed
Gain Boost. p. 2-28

Gain Boost or
Postion Control
Illustration 3.20 Brake release sequence for hoist mechanical brake control. This brake control is available in FLUX with motor
feedback only, available for asynchronous and non-salient PM motors.
62 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Parameters 2-26 to 2-33 are only available for the hoist 2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time
mechanical brake control (FLUX with motor feedback). Range: Function:
200.0 ms* [1.0 - 20000.0 ms]
2-26 Torque Ref
Range: Function: 2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter Time
0
%*
[ -300 - The value defines the torque applied against the
300 %] closed mechanical brake, before release.
Range:
10.0 ms* [0.1 - 100.0 ms]
Function:
3 3
The torque/load on a crane is positive and
between 10% and 160%. To obtain the best
starting point, set parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to
approximately 70%.
The torque/load on a lift can be both positive
and negative and between -160% and 160% To
obtain the best starting point, set
parameter 2-26 Torque Ref to 0%.
The higher the torque error
(parameter 2-26 Torque Ref vs. actual torque) is,
the more movement during load take over.
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time

Range: Function:
0.2 s* [0 - 5 s] The value defines the duration of the torque
ramp in clockwise direction.
2-28 Gain Boost Factor

Range: Function:
1* [0 - Only active in flux closed loop. The function ensures
4] a smooth transition from torque control mode to
speed control mode when the motor takes over the
load from the brake.
Increase to minimise the movement. Activate the
Advanced Mechanical Brake (parameter group 2-3*
Adv. Mech Brake) by setting parameter 2-28 Gain
Boost Factor to 0.
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time

Range: Function:
0 s* [0 - 5 s] Torque Ramp Down Time.
Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 can be set up for very smooth

transition change from speed control to position control
during 2-25 Brake Release Time - the time when the load is
transferred from the mechanical brake to the frequency
converter. Parameters 2-30 to 2-33 are activated when 2-28
Gain Boost Factor is set to 0. See Illustration 3.20 for more
information.
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.0000* [0.0000 - 1.0000 ]
2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.0150* [0.0000 - 1.0000 ]
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 63

3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/Ramps 3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit

Option: Function:
Parameters for reference handling, definition of limitations,
[60] C
and configuration of the reaction of the frequency
[70] mbar
converter to changes.
[71] bar
3 3 3.5.1 3-0* Reference Limits [72]

[73]
Pa
kPa
[74] m WG
3-00 Reference Range
[80] kW
Option: Function: [120] GPM
Select the range of the reference signal and the [121] gal/s
feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [122] gal/min
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [123] gal/h
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[124] CFM
control or [3] Process is selected in
[125] ft/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[126] ft/min
[0] Min - Select the range of the reference signal and the [127] ft/h
Max feedback signal. Signal values can be positive only, [130] lb/s
or positive and negative. The minimum limit may [131] lb/min
have a negative value, unless [1] Speed closed loop
[132] lb/h
control or [3] Process is selected in
[140] ft/s
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[141] ft/min
[1] -Max - For both positive and negative values (both [145] ft
+Max directions, relative to parameter 4-10 Motor Speed [150] lb ft
Direction). [160] F
[170] psi
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit [171] lb/in
Option: Function: [172] in WG
Select the unit to be used in Process PID Control [173] ft WG
references and feedbacks. Parameter 1-00 Configu- [180] HP
ration Mode must be either [3] Process or [8]
Extended PID Control. 3-02 Minimum Reference
[0] None Range: Function:

[1] % Size [ -999999.999 - Enter the minimum reference. The
[2] RPM related* par. 3-03 minimum reference is the lowest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all
[3] Hz
backUnit] references.
[4] Nm
Minimum reference is active only
[5] PPM
when parameter 3-00 Reference Range
[10] 1/min
is set to [0] Min.- Max.
[12] Pulse/s
The minimum reference unit matches:
[20] l/s
[21] l/min The configuration of
parameter 1-00 Configuration
[22] l/h
Mode: for [1] Speed closed
[23] m/s
loop, RPM; for [2] Torque,
[24] m/min
Nm.
[25] m/h
[30] kg/s The unit selected in
parameter 3-01 Reference/
[31] kg/min
Feedback Unit.
[32] kg/h
[33] t/min
[34] t/h
[40] m/s
[41] m/min
[45] m
64 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3-03 Maximum Reference
130BA149.10
12 (+24V)
Range: Function:
Preset 76543210
Size [ par. 3-02 - Enter the Maximum Reference. The
10101010 29 [P 5-13=Preset ref. bit 0]
related* 999999.999 Maximum Reference is the highest
ReferenceFeed- value obtainable by summing all 11001100 32 [P 5-14=Preset ref. bit 1]
backUnit] references.
The Maximum Reference unit

11110000 33 [P 5-15=Preset ref. bit 2]
3 3
matches:
The choice of configuration
in parameter 1-00 Configu-
Illustration 3.21 Preset Reference
ration Mode: for [1] Speed
closed loop, RPM; for [2]
Torque, Nm.
Preset ref. bit 2 1 0
The unit selected in
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0
parameter 3-00 Reference
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1
Range.
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1
3-04 Reference Function
Preset ref. 4 1 0 0
Option: Function:
Preset ref. 5 1 0 1
[0] Sum Sums both external and preset reference
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
sources.
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
[1] External/ Use either the preset or the external reference
Preset source. Table 3.11 Preset Ref. Bit
Shift between external and preset via a
command or a digital input. 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz]
Range: Function:
Size [ 0 - par. The jog speed is a fixed output speed
3.5.2 3-1* References
related* 4-14 Hz] at which the frequency converter is
running, when the jog function is
Select the preset reference(s). Select Preset ref. bit 0/1/2
activated.
[16], [17] or [18] for the corresponding digital inputs in
See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
3-10 Preset Reference 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value

Array [8] Range: Function:
Range: 0-7 0 %* [0 - Enter a percentage (relative) value to be either
Range: Function: 100 %] added to or deducted from the actual reference
0 %* [-100 - Enter up to 8 different preset references (0-7) in for Catch up or Slow down respectively. If Catch
100 %] this parameter, using array programming. The up is selected via one of the digital inputs
preset reference is stated as a percentage of the (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
value RefMAX (parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference) Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
If a RefMIN different from 0 added to the total reference. If Slow down is
(parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference) is selected via one of the digital inputs
programmed, the preset reference is calculated (5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input to 5-15 Terminal 33
as a percentage of the full reference range, i.e. Digital Input), the percentage (relative) value is
on the basis of the difference between RefMAX deducted from the total reference. Obtain
and RefMIN. Afterwards, the value is added to extended functionality with the DigiPot function.
RefMIN. When using preset references, select See parameter group 3-9* Digital Potentiometer.
Preset ref. bit 0/1/2 [16], [17] or [18] for the
corresponding digital inputs in parameter group
5-1* Digital Inputs.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 65

3-13 Reference Site 3-15 Reference Resource 1

Select which reference site to activate. signals. The sum of these reference
signals defines the actual reference.
[0] Linked to Use local reference when in Hand mode; or
Hand / Auto remote reference when in Auto mode. [0] No function
3 3 [1] Remote Use remote reference in both Hand mode and
[1] Analog Input 53
Auto mode. [2] Analog Input 54

[7] Frequency input
[2] Local Use local reference in both Hand mode and
29
Auto mode.
[8] Frequency input
NOTICE 33
[11] Local bus
When set to [2] Local, the frequency
reference
converter starts with this setting again
following a 'power down'. [20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input (General Purpose I/O Option Module)
X30-11
3-14 Preset Relative Reference [22] Analog input (General Purpose I/O Option Module)
Range: Function: X30-12
0 %* [-100 - The actual reference, X, is increased or [29] Analog Input

100 %] decreased with the percentage Y, set in X48/2
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference. This
3-16 Reference Resource 2
results in the actual reference Z. Actual
Option: Function:
reference (X) is the sum of the inputs selected in
3-15 Reference 1 Source, 3-16 Reference 2 Source, Select the reference input to be used
3-17 Reference 3 Source and 8-02 Control Source. for the second reference signal.
parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2
130BA059.12
Y
Relative Z Resulting and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference 3 define up to 3 different reference
signals. The sum of these reference
Illustration 3.22 Preset Relative Reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
[1] Analog Input 53
130BA278.10
Z
[2] Analog Input 54
10 0
*Y/ [7] Frequency input 29
X+X
[8] Frequency input 33
X
[11] Local bus reference
[20] Digital pot.meter
[21] Analog input
X30-11
Y
[22] Analog input
-100 0 100 %
X30-12
P 3-14
[29] Analog Input X48/2
Illustration 3.23 Actual Reference
3-17 Reference Resource 3
Option: Function:
3-15 Reference Resource 1 Select the reference input to be used
Option: Function: for the third reference signal.
Select the reference input to be used parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1,
for the first reference signal. parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2
parameter 3-15 Reference Resource 1, and parameter 3-17 Reference Resource
parameter 3-16 Reference Resource 2 and 3 define up to 3 different reference
parameter 3-17 Reference Resource 3 signals. The sum of these reference
define up to 3 different reference signals defines the actual reference.
[0] No function
66 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3-17 Reference Resource 3 3-19 Jog Speed [RPM]

[1] Analog Input 53 Size [0 - Enter a value for the jog speed nJOG, which
[2] Analog Input 54 related* par. 4-13 is a fixed output speed. The frequency
[7] Frequency input 29 RPM] converter runs at this speed when the jog
[8] Frequency input 33
[11] Local bus reference
function is activated. The maximum limit is
defined in parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High
3 3
[20] Digital pot.meter Limit [RPM].
[21] Analog input See also parameter 3-80 Jog Ramp Time.
X30-11
[22] Analog input 3.5.3 Ramps
X30-12 3-4* Ramp 1
3-18 Relative Scaling Reference Resource For each of 4 ramps (parameter groups 3-4* Ramp 1, 3-5*
Ramp 2, 3-6* Ramp 3 and 3-7* Ramp 4) configure the ramp
Option: Function:
parameters: ramp type, ramping times (duration of
NOTICE acceleration and deceleration) and level of jerk compen-
This parameter cannot be sation for S ramps.
running. Start by setting the linear ramping times corresponding to
Illustration 3.25 and Illustration 3.26.
Select a variable value to be added to
the fixed value (defined in
130BA872.10
RPM
parameter 3-14 Preset Relative Reference).
The sum of the fixed and variable P 4-13
High-limit
values (labelled Y in Illustration 3.24) is Reference
ns
multiplied with the actual reference
P 4-11
(labelled X in Illustration 3.24). This Low limit
product is then added to the actual
reference (X+X*Y/100) to give the P 3-*1 P 3-*2 Time
Ramp (X)Up Ramp (X) Down
resultant actual reference. Time (Acc) Time (Dec)
tacc tdec
130BA059.12
Y
Relative Z Resulting Illustration 3.25 Linear Ramping Times
actual
X Z=X+X*Y/100 reference
Illustration 3.24 Resultant Actual

If S-ramps are selected then set the level of non-linear jerk
Reference
compensation required. Set jerk compensation by defining
the proportion of ramp-up and ramp-down times where
acceleration and deceleration are variable (i.e. increasing or
[0] * No function decreasing). The S-ramp acceleration and deceleration
[1] Analog Input 53 settings are defined as a percentage of the actual ramp
[2] Analog Input 54 time.
[7] Frequency input
29
[8] Frequency input
33
[11] Local bus
reference
[21] Analog input
X30-11
[22] Analog input
X30-12
[29] Analog Input
X48/2
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 67

3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
130BA168.10
Speed
Range: Function:
Ramp (X) S-Ramp
motor speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-
Ramp (X) S-Ramp
Ratio at Dec.End down time such that no overvoltage arises
Ratio at Accel.End
Ramp (X) in the inverter due to regenerative operation
3 3 Ramp (X) Linear S-Ramp of the motor, and such that the generated
S-Ramp Ratio at
Jerk compensated current does not exceed the current limit set
Ratio at Dec.End
Accel.End in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The value
0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed mode.
Ramp (X) Ramp (X)
Up Time Down Time
See ramp-up time in parameter 3-41 Ramp 1
Illustration 3.26 Linear Ramping Times Ramp Up Time.
tdec s x ns RPM
Par . 3 42 =
ref RPM
3-40 Ramp 1 Type 3-45 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Select the ramp type, depending on 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. %] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
A linear ramp gives constant acceleration which the acceleration torque increases. The
during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear larger the percentage value, the greater the
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
application. lower the torque jerks occurring in the
application.
[0] * Linear
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk.
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
Const Jerk
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in Range: Function:
Const parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time and 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Time parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time. %] (parameter 3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time) in
which the acceleration torque decreases. The
NOTICE larger the percentage value, the greater the
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
lower the torque jerks in the application.
during ramping is changed the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may
3-47 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
result in a longer start or stop time.
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching Range: Function:
initiators may be necessary. 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
%] time (parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time)
where the deceleration torque increases. The
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
larger the percentage value, the greater the
Range: Function: jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration lower the torque jerks in the application.
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the synchronous motor
s] speed nS. Select a ramp-up time such that 3-48 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
the output current does not exceed the
Range: Function:
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
during ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds
to 0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
time in parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down
Time.
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 41 =
ref RPM

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, that is, the
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the synchronous
s]
68 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.5.4 3-5* Ramp 2 3-55 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start

Range: Function:
To select ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4* 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Ramp 1. %] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
3-50 Ramp 2 Type which the acceleration torque increases. The
Option: Function:
3 3
Select the ramp type, depending on
requirements for acceleration/deceleration. A
linear ramp gives constant acceleration during
3-56 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End
ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
acceleration, compensating for jerk in the Range: Function:
application. 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
%] (parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time) in
[0] * Linear
[1] S-ramp Acceleration with lowest possible jerk
Const Jerk
[2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in lower the torque jerks in the application.
Const parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and
Time parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 3-57 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start
Range: Function:
NOTICE
If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference %] time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
during ramping is changed the ramp time may be where the deceleration torque increases The
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement, which may larger the percentage value, the greater the
result in a longer start or stop time. jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching lower the torque jerks in the application.
initiators may be necessary.
3-58 Ramp 2 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time Range: Function:
Range: Function: 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration %] time (parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time)
related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed where the deceleration torque decreases. The
s] ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the larger the percentage value, the greater the
output current does not exceed the current jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during lower the torque jerks in the application.
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01
s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time. 3.5.5 3-6* Ramp 3
tacc s x ns RPM
Par . 3 51 = Configure ramp parameters, see 3-4* Ramp 1.
ref RPM
3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time 3-60 Ramp 3 Type

Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the Select the ramp type, depending on
related* - 3600 deceleration time from the rated motor requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
s] speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down time A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
such that no overvoltage arises in the during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
frequency converter due to regenerative acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
operation of the motor, and such that the application.
generated current does not exceed the [0] * Linear
current limit set in parameter 4-18 Current [1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
Limit. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s Const Jerk
in speed mode. See ramp-up time in [2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in
parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time. Const parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time and
Par . 3 52 =
tdec s x ns RPM Time parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time
ref RPM
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 69

NOTICE 3-67 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start

If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference Range: Function:
during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement which may %] time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time)
result in a longer start or stop time. where the deceleration torque increases. The
3 3 Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching

3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time
3-68 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
related* 3600 s] time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed 50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-
ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the %] downdecel time (parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp
output current does not exceed the current down Time) where the deceleration torque
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during decreases. The larger the percentage value, the
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to greater the jerk compensation achieved, and
0.01 s in speed mode. See ramp-down time thus the lower the torque jerks in the
in parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time. application.
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time 3.5.6 3-7* Ramp 4

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the Configure ramp parameters, see parameter group 3-4*
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor Ramp 1.
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
3-70 Ramp 4 Type
time such that no overvoltage arises in the
inverter due to regenerative operation of Option: Function:
the motor, and such that the generated Select the ramp type, depending on
current does not exceed the current limit requirements for acceleration and deceleration.
set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The A linear ramp gives constant acceleration
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed during ramping. An S-ramp gives non-linear
mode. See ramp-up time in acceleration, compensating for jerk in the
parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time. application
tdec s x ns RPM [0] * Linear
Par . 3 62 =
ref RPM
[1] S-ramp Accelerates with lowest possible jerk.
3-65 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start Const Jerk
Range: Function: [2] S-ramp S-ramp based on the values set in

Const parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time and
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
Time parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time.
%] (parameter 3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time) in
which the acceleration torque increases. The
NOTICE
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the If [1] S-ramp Const Jerk is selected and the reference
lower the torque jerks in the application. during ramping is changed, the ramp time may be
prolonged to realise a jerk-free movement which may
3-66 Ramp 3 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End result in a longer start or stop time.
Range: Function: Additional adjustment of the S-ramp ratios or switching
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time
which the acceleration torque decreases. The 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time
larger the percentage value, the greater the Range: Function:
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the Size [ 0.01 Enter the ramp-up time, i.e. the acceleration
lower the torque jerks in the application. related* - 3600 time from 0 RPM to the rated motor speed
s] ns. Select a ramp-up time such that the
output current does not exceed the current
limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit during
70 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time 3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End
ramping. The value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 larger the percentage value, the greater the
s in speed mode. See ramp-down time in jerk compensation achieved, and thus the
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time. lower the torque jerks in the application.
Par . 3 71 =
tacc s x ns RPM
ref RPM 3 3
3.5.7 3-8* Other Ramps
Range: Function: 3-80 Jog Ramp Time
Size [ 0.01 - Enter the ramp-down time, i.e. the Range: Function:
related* 3600 s] deceleration time from the rated motor
Size [0.01 Enter the jog ramp time, i.e. the acceleration/
speed ns to 0 RPM. Select a ramp-down
related* - 3600 deceleration time between 0 RPM and the
time such that no overvoltage arises in the s] rated motor frequency ns. Ensure that the
inverter due to regenerative operation of
resultant output current required for the
the motor, and such that the generated
given jog ramp time does not exceed the
current does not exceed the current limit
current limit in parameter 4-18 Current Limit.
set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. The
The jog ramp time starts upon activation of a
value 0.00 corresponds to 0.01 s in speed
jog signal via the LCP, a selected digital input,
mode. See ramp-up time in
or the serial communication port. When jog
parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time.
state is disabled then the normal ramping
tdec s x ns RPM times are valid.
Par . 3 72 =
ref RPM
130BA070.10
RPM
3-75 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. Start
Range: Function:
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time P 4-13 RPM
%] (parameter 3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time) in high limit
which the acceleration torque increases. The P 1-25

Motor speed
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the P 3-19
Jog speed
P 4-11 RPM
low limit
3-76 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End t jog t jog Time
P 3-80 P 3-80
Range: Function: Ramp up Ramp down
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-up time (acc) (dec)

Illustration 3.27 Jog Ramp Time
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the t jog s x ns RPM
Par . 3 80 =
lower the torque jerks in the application. jog speed par . 3 19 RPM
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time

3-77 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size [0.01 - Enter the quickstop ramp-down time, i.e.
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down related* 3600 s] the deceleration time from the
%] time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time) synchronous motor speed to 0 RPM. Ensure
where the deceleration torque increases. The that no resultant over-voltage arises in the
larger the percentage value, the greater the inverter due to regenerative operation of
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the the motor required to achieve the given
lower the torque jerks in the application. ramp-down time. Ensure also that the
generated current required to achieve the
3-78 Ramp 4 S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End given ramp-down time does not exceed
Range: Function: the current limit (set in
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down parameter 4-18 Current Limit). Quick-stop is
%] time (parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time) activated by means of a signal on a
where the deceleration torque decreases. The
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 71

3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time 3.5.8 3-9* Digital Pot.Meter

Range: Function:
selected digital input, or via the serial The digital potentiometer enables increase or decrease of
communication port. the actual reference by adjusting the set-up of the digital
inputs using the functions Increase, Decrease or Clear. To
activate the function, at least one digital input must be set
3 3
130BA069.10
RPM
up to Increase or Decrease.
Speed
130BA158.11
P 4-13 RPM
high limit
Reference
P 1-25
Motor speed
P 3-95
P 4-11 RPM Time (s)
low limit
Inc
Illustration 3.29 Increase Actual Reference
Time
P 3-81
Qramp
Speed
130BA159.11
Qstop
Illustration 3.28 Quick Stop Ramp Time

P 3-95
3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type Time (s)

Dec
Option: Function:
Select the ramp type, depending on Inc
requirements for acceleration and Illustration 3.30 Increase/Decrease Actual Reference
deceleration. A linear ramp gives constant
acceleration during ramping. An S-ramp
gives non-linear acceleration, compen-
3-90 Step Size
sating for jerk in the application.
Range: Function:
[0] * Linear
0.10 [0.01 - Enter the increment size required for
[1] S-ramp Const
%* 200 %] INCREASE/DECREASE, as a percentage of the
Jerk
synchronous motor speed, ns. If INCREASE/
[2] S-ramp Const
DECREASE is activated, the resulting
Time
reference is increased/decreased by the
3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. Start amount set in this parameter.
Range: Function:
3-91 Ramp Time
Range: Function:
where the deceleration torque increases. The 1 [0 - Enter the ramp time, i.e. the time for adjustment of
larger the percentage value, the greater the s* 3600 s] the reference from 0% to 100% of the specified
jerk compensation achieved, and thus the digital potentiometer function (Increase, Decrease
lower the torque jerks in the application. or Clear).
If Increase/ Decrease is activated for longer than
3-84 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel. End the ramp delay period specified in
parameter 3-95 Ramp Delay the actual reference
Range: Function:
isramped up/down according to this ramp time.
50 %* [ 1 - 99 Enter the proportion of the total ramp-down The ramp time is defined as the time used to
%] time (3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time) where adjust the reference by the step size specified in
the deceleration torque decreases. The larger parameter 3-90 Step Size.
the percentage value, the greater the jerk
compensation achieved, and thus the lower
the torque jerks in the application.
72 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3-92 Power Restore

Option: Function:
[0] Off Resets the Digital Potentiometer reference to 0% after
power up.
[1] On Restores the most recent Digital Potentiometer

reference at power up. 3 3
3-93 Maximum Limit
Range: Function:
100 %* [-200 - 200 Set the maximum permissible value for
%] the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.
3-94 Minimum Limit

Range: Function:
-100 %* [-200 - 200 Set the minimum permissible value for
%] the resultant reference. This is advisable if
the Digital Potentiometer is used for fine
tuning of the resulting reference.
3-95 Ramp Delay

Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the delay required from activation of
related* 0] the digital potentiometer function until the
frequency converter starts to ramp the
reference. With a delay of 0 ms, the reference
starts to ramp as soon as INCREASE/DECREASE
is activated. See also parameter 3-91 Ramp
Time.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 73

3.6 Parameters: 4-** Limits/Warnings 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Range: Function:
3.6.1 4-1* Motor Limits setting in parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High
Limit [Hz].
Define torque, current and speed limits for the motor, and
the reaction of the frequency converter when the limits are
3 3 exceeded.
4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:
A limit may generate a message on the display. A warning
always generates a message in the display or on the Size [ par. Enter the maximum limit for motor
fieldbus. A monitoring function may initiate a warning or a related* 4-11 - speed. The Motor Speed High Limit can
trip, upon which the frequency converter stops and 60000 be set to correspond to the
generates an alarm message. RPM] manufacturers maximum rated motor
speed. The Motor Speed High Limit must
4-10 Motor Speed Direction exceed the setting in
Option: Function: parameter 4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit
NOTICE [RPM].

NOTICE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
inverter switching frequency (parameter 14-01 Switching
Select the motor speed direction(s) required. Use
Frequency).
this parameter to prevent unwanted reversing.
When parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set
to [3] Process, parameter 4-10 Motor Speed 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
Direction is set to [0] Clockwise as default. The Range: Function:
setting in parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction Size [ par. Enter the max limit for motor speed.
does not limit options for setting related* 4-12 - parameter 4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]. par. 4-19 can match the manufacturer's
[0] Clockwise The reference is set to CW rotation. Reversing Hz] recommended maximum motor speed.
input (default term 19) must be open. The Motor Speed High Limit must exceed
the value in 4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit
[1] Counter The reference is set to CCW rotation. Reversing
[Hz]. The output frequency must not
clockwise input (default term 19) must be closed. If
exceed 10% of the switching frequency.
reversing is required with Reverse input open
the motor direction can be changed by
parameter 1-06 Clockwise Direction
NOTICE
Max. output frequency cannot exceed 10% of the
[2] Both Allows the motor to rotate in both directions.
inverter switching frequency (14-01 Switching Frequency).
directions
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
Size [ 0 - par. Enter the minimum limit for motor speed. Size related* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the
related* 4-13 The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to Application [Application torque on the shaft to
RPM] correspond to the manufacturers dependent* dependant] protect the mechanical
recommended minimum motor speed. installation.
The Motor Speed Low Limit must not
exceed the setting in NOTICE
parameter 4-13 Motor Speed High Limit
Changing parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode when
[RPM].
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [0] Speed
open loop, parameter 1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed is
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
automatically readjusted.
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Enter the minimum limit for motor speed.
related* par. 4-14 The Motor Speed Low Limit can be set to
Hz] correspond to the minimum output
frequency of the motor shaft. The Motor
Speed Low Limit must not exceed the
74 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE 4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source

The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated Option: Function:
torque, including torque spikes. This is not the torque corresponding to 0% and 100% are
that is seen from the LCP or the Fieldbus as that is defined in the analog input scaling, e.g.
filtered. parameter group 6-1* Analog Input 1.
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode

parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in
3 3
Speed Open Loop or Speed Closed Loop.
Range: Function:
100 %* [ 0 - 1000.0 %] This function limits the torque on the [0] * No function
shaft to protect the mechanical instal- [2] Analog in 53
lation. [4] Analog in 53 inv
[6] Analog in 54
NOTICE [8] Analog in 54 inv
[10] Analog in
The torque limit reacts on the actual, non-filtrated
X30-11
torque, including torque spikes. This is not the torque
that is seen from the LCP or the Fieldbus as that is [12] Analog in
filtered. X30-11 inv
[14] Analog in
X30-12
4-18 Current Limit
[16] Analog in
Range: Function: X30-12 inv
Size [ 1.0 - This is a true current limit function that
related* 1000.0 %] continues in the oversynchronous range, 4-21 Speed Limit Factor SourceOption
however due to field weakening the Option: Function:
motor torque at current limit will drop Select an analog input for scaling the
accordingly when the voltage increase settings in parameter 4-19 Max Output
stops above the synchronised speed of Frequency from 0% to 100% (or vice
the motor. versa). The signal levels corresponding
to 0% and 100% are defined in the
4-19 Max Output Frequency analog input scaling, e.g. parameter
Range: Function: group 6-1* Analog Input 1. This
Size [1 - NOTICE parameter is only active when
related* 590 parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is in
This parameter cannot be adjusted Torque Mode.
Hz]
while the motor is running. [0] * No function
[2] Analog input 53
NOTICE [4] Analog input 53
Max. output frequency cannot exceed inv
10% of the inverter switching frequency [6] Analog input 54
(parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency). [8] Analog input 54
inv
Provides a final limit on the output frequency [10] Analog input
for improved safety in applications where you X30-11
want to avoid accidental over-speeding. This [12] Analog input
limit is final in all configurations (independent X30-11 inv
of the setting in parameter 1-00 Configuration [14] Analog input
Mode). X30-12
[16] Analog input
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source X30-12 inv
Option: Function:
Select an analog input for scaling the
settings in parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
Motor Mode and parameter 4-17 Torque
Limit Generator Mode from 0% to 100%
(or inverse). The signal levels
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 75

3.6.2 4-3* Motor Feedback Monitoring Speed
130BA221.10
[rpm]
The parameter group includes monitoring and handling of

motor feedback devices as encoders, resolvers etc.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function

3 3 Option: Function: ncalc
This function is used to monitor for nactual
consistency in feedback signal, i.e. if the
feedback signal is available.
Select which reaction the frequency P 4-31
converter should take if a feedback fault
is detected. The selected action is to take
place when the feedback signal differs
from the output speed by the value set in
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error P 4-32 Time
[sec]
for longer than the value set
Illustration 3.31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
inparameter 4-32 Motor Feedback Loss
Timeout.
[0] Disabled
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout
[1] Warning
Range: Function:
[2] * Trip
0.05 s* [0 - 60 Set the timeout value allowing the speed
[3] Jog
s] error set in parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback
[4] Freeze Output
Speed Error to be exceeded before enabling
[5] Max Speed
the function selected in parameter 4-30 Motor
[6] Switch to Open
Feedback Loss Function.
Loop
[7] Select Setup 1
4-34 Tracking Error Function
[8] Select Setup 2
Option: Function:
[9] Select Setup 3
This function is used to monitor that the
[10] Select Setup 4
application follows the expected speed profile.
[11] stop & trip
In Closed loop the speed reference to the PID is
Warning 90 is active as soon as the value in compared to the encoder feedback (filtered) In
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error is exceeded, open loop the speed reference to the PID is
regardless of the setting of parameter 4-32 Motor Feedback compensated for slip and compared to the
Loss Timeout. Warning/Alarm 61 Feedback Error is related frequency that is sent to the motor
to the Motor Feedback Loss Function. (16-13 Frequency).
The reaction is activated, if the measured
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error
difference is more than specified in
Range: Function: parameter 4-35 Tracking Error for the time
300 RPM* [1 - 600 RPM] Select the max allowed error in speed specified in parameter 4-36 Tracking Error
(output speed vs. feedback). Timeout.
A tracking error in closed loop does not imply
that there is a problem with the feedback
signal! A tracking error can be the result of
torque limit at too big loads.
[0] Disable
[1] Warning
[2] Trip
[3] Trip after
stop
Warning/Alarm 78 Tracking Error is related to the Tracking

Error Function.
76 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4-35 Tracking Error 3.6.3 4-5* Adjustable Warnings

Range: Function:
10 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed error
Use these parameters to adjust warning limits for current,
RPM* RPM] between the motor speed and the output
speed, reference and feedback.
of the ramp when not ramping. In open Warnings are shown on the LCP, and can be programmed
loop the motor speed is estimated and in
closed loop it is the feedback from
to be outputs or to be read out via serial bus in the
Extended Status Word.
3 3
encoder/resolver.
130BA064.10
Imotor
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout
Range: Function:
ILIM ON REF
1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error (P 4-18)
greater than the value set in
IHIGH
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is permissible. (P 4-51)
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping IN RANGE
Range: Function:
100 [1 - 600 Enter the maximum permissible speed ILOW
(P 4-50)
RPM* RPM] error between the motor speed and the
output of the ramp when ramping. In nmotor [RPM]
open loop the motor speed is estimated nMIN nLOW REF nHIGH nMAX
and in closed loop it is the feedback from (P 4-11) (P 4-52) (P 4-53) (P 4-13)
encoder/resolver. Illustration 3.32 Adjustable Warnings
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout

Range: Function: 4-50 Warning Current Low
1 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period during which an error Range: Function:
greater than the value set in
0 A* [ 0 - par. Enter the ILOW value. When the motor current
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping while
4-51 A] falls below this limit, the display reads Current
Ramping is permissible.
Low. The signal outputs can be programmed to
produce a status signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC
4-39 Tracking Error After Ramping Timeout 302 only) and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
Range: Function: only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.
5 s* [0 - 60 s] Enter the time-out period after ramping where
parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping and 4-51 Warning Current High
parameter 4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout Range: Function:
are still active.
Size [ par. Enter the IHIGH value. When the motor
related* 4-50 - par. current exceeds this limit, the display
16-37 A] reads Current High. The signal outputs
can be programmed to produce a status
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only)
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC 302
only). Refer to Illustration 3.32.
4-52 Warning Speed Low

Range: Function:
0 RPM* [ 0 - par. Enter the nLOW value. When the motor
4-53 RPM] speed exceeds this limit, the display reads
Speed Low. The signal outputs can be
programmed to produce a status signal on
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only) and on relay
output 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 77

4-53 Warning Speed High 4-57 Warning Feedback High

Size [ par. 4-52 Enter the nHIGH value. When the motor only) and on relay output
related* - 60000 speed exceeds this value, the display 01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
RPM] reads SPEED HIGH. The signal outputs
3 3 can be programmed to produce a

status signal on terminals 27 or 29 and
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function
Option: Function:
on relay outputs 01 or 02.
NOTICE
4-54 Warning Reference Low This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Range: Function:
-999999.999* [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower reference limit.
Displays alarm 30, 31 or 32 in the event of a
par. 4-55 ] When the actual reference falls
missing motor phase. It is strongly
below this limit, the display
recommended to enable to avoid motor
indicates RefLOW. The signal
damage.
outputs can be programmed to
produce a status signal on [0] Disabled The frequency converter does not issue a
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 only) missing motor phase alarm. Not recommended
and on relay output 01 or 02 (FC due to risk of motor damage.
302 only).
[1] Trip 100 For a quick detection time and alarm in the
ms event of a missing motor phase.
4-55 Warning Reference High
[2] Trip 1000 For a slow detection time and alarm in the
Range: Function:
* ms event of a missing motor phase.
999999.999* [ par. 4-54 - Enter the upper reference limit.
999999.999 ] When the actual reference exceeds [3] Trip 100ms Special option relevant for crane applications
this limit, the display reads Ref 3ph detec. when lowering a small load that lets the
High. The signal outputs can be frequency converter avoid false detections of
programmed to produce a status missing motor phase.
signal on terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 This option is a reduced version of option [1]
only) and on relay output 01 or 02 Trip 100 ms.
(FC 302 only). 1 phase missing is handled as in option [1] Trip
100 ms. 3-phase detection is reduced compared
4-56 Warning Feedback Low to option [1] Trip 100 ms.
The 3-phase detection is only working at start-
Range: Function:
up and in the low speed range where a
-999999.999 [ -999999.999 - Enter the lower feedback
significant current is running, avoiding false
ReferenceFeed- par. 4-57 limit. When the feedback
trips during small motor current.
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- falls below this limit, the
Only available for FC 302 FLUX closed loop.
backUnit] display reads Feedb Low.
The signal outputs can be [5] Motor The frequency converter detects automatically
programmed to produce Check when the motor is disconnected and resumes
a status signal on operation once the motor is connected again.
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 Valid for FC 302 only.
only) and on relay output
01 or 02 (FC 302 only).
3.6.4 4-6* Speed Bypass
4-57 Warning Feedback High
Some systems call for avoiding certain output frequencies
Range: Function: or speeds, due to resonance problems in the system. A
999999.999 [ par. 4-56 - Enter the upper feedback maximum of 4 frequency or speed ranges can be avoided.
ReferenceFeed- 999999.999 limit. When the feedback
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- exceeds this limit, the 4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]
backUnit] display reads Feedb High. Array [4]
The signal outputs can be Range: Function:
programmed to produce Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
a status signal on 4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to
terminal 27 or 29 (FC 302 resonance problems in the system.
78 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz]

3 3
Array [4]
Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - par. Some systems call for avoiding
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
resonance problems in the system.
Enter the lower limits of the speeds
to be avoided.
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
4-13 RPM] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the
speeds to be avoided.
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz]

Array [4]
Range: Function:
4-14 Hz] certain output speeds due to
Enter the upper limits of the speeds
to be avoided.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 79

3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out Digital input function Select Terminal
No operation [0] All *term 32, 33
3.7.1 5-0* Digital I/O Mode Reset [1] All
Coast inverse [2] All *term 27
Parameters for configuring the input and output using Coast and reset inverse [3] All
NPN and PNP.
3 3 5-00 Digital I/O Mode
Quick stop inverse
DC-brake inverse
[4]
[5]
All
All
Stop inverse [6] All
Option: Function:
Start [8] All *term 18
Digital inputs and programmed digital outputs are
Latched start [9] All
pre-programmable for operation either in PNP or NPN
Reversing [10] All *term 19
systems.
Start reversing [11] All
[0] * PNP Action on positive directional pulses (). PNP systems
Enable start forward [12] All
are pulled down to GND.
Enable start reverse [13] All
[1] NPN Action on negative directional pulses (). NPN Jog [14] All *term 29
systems are pulled up to +24 V, internally in the Preset reference on [15] All
frequency converter. Preset ref bit 0 [16] All
Preset ref bit 1 [17] All
NOTICE Preset ref bit 2 [18] All
Once this parameter has been changed, it must be Freeze reference [19] All
activated by performing a power cycle. Freeze output [20] All
Speed up [21] All
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode Speed down [22] All
Set-up select bit 0 [23] All
Option: Function:
Set-up select bit 1 [24] All
NOTICE Precise stop inverse [26] 18, 19
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the Precises start, stop [27] 18, 19
motor is running. Catch up [28] All
Slow down [29] All
[0] Input Defines terminal 27 as a digital input. Counter input [30] 29, 33
[1] Output Defines terminal 27 as a digital output. Pulse input Edge Trigged [31] 29, 33
Pulse input Time Based [32] 29, 33
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode Ramp bit 0 [34] All
Option: Function: Ramp bit 1 [35] All
[0] * Input Defines terminal 29 as a digital input. Latched precise start [40] 18, 19
Latched precise stop [41] 18, 19
[1] Output Defines terminal 29 as a digital output.
inverse
External interlock [51]
This parameter is available for FC 302 only.
DigiPot Increase [55] All
DigiPot Decrease [56] All
3.7.2 5-1* Digital Inputs DigiPot Clear [57] All
Digipot Hoist [58] All
The digital inputs are used for selecting various functions
Counter A (up) [60] 29, 33
in the frequency converter. All digital inputs can be set to
Counter A (down) [61] 29, 33
the following functions:
Reset Counter A [62] All
Functions in group 1 have higher priority than functions in Counter B (up) [63] 29, 33
group 2. Counter B (down) [64] 29, 33
Reset Counter B [65] All
Group 1 Reset, Coasting stop, Reset and Coasting stop,
Quick-stop, DC braking, Stop and the [Off] key. Mech. Brake Feedb. [70] All
Group 2 Start, Pulse start, Reversing, Start reversing, Jog Mech. Brake Feedb. Inv. [71] All
and Freeze output PID Error Inv. [72] All
PID Reset I-part [73] All
Table 3.12 Function Groups PID enable [74] All
MCO Specific [75]
80 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Digital input function Select Terminal NOTICE

PTC Card 1 [80] All
When the frequency converter is at the
Profidrive OFF2 [91]
torque limit and has received a stop
Profidrive OFF3 [92] command, it may not stop by itself. To
Start edge triggered [98] ensure that the frequency converter
Safe Option Reset [100] stops, configure a digital output to [27]
Torque limit & stop and connect this
3 3
Table 3.13 Digital Input Function
digital output to a digital input that is
configured as coast.
FC 300 standard terminals are 18, 19, 27, 29, 32 and 33.
MCB 101 terminals are X30/2, X30/3 and X30/4. [8] Start (Default Digital input 18): Select start for a
Terminal 29 functions as an output only in FC 302. start/stop command. Logic 1 = start, logic 0
= stop.
Functions dedicated to only one digital input are stated in [9] Latched The motor starts, if a pulse is applied for min.
the associated parameter. start 2 ms. The motor stops when Stop inverse is
activated or a reset command (via DI) is given.
All digital inputs can be programmed to these functions: [10] Reversing (Default Digital input 19). Change the direction
of motor shaft rotation. Select Logic 1 to
[0] No No reaction to signals transmitted to the reverse. The reversing signal only changes the
operation terminal. direction of rotation. It does not activate the
[1] Reset Resets frequency converter after a TRIP/ALARM. start function. Select both directions in
Not all alarms can be reset. parameter 4-10 Motor Speed Direction. The
[2] Coast (Default Digital input 27): Coasting stop, function is not active in process closed loop.
inverse inverted input (NC). The frequency converter [11] Start Used for start/stop and for reversing on the
leaves the motor in free mode. Logic 0 reversing same wire. Signals on start are not allowed at
coasting stop. the same time.
[3] Coast and Reset and coasting stop Inverted input (NC). [12] Enable Disengages the counterclockwise movement
reset Leaves motor in free mode and resets start and allows for the clockwise direction.
inverse frequency converter. Logic 0 coasting stop forward
and reset. [13] Enable Disengages the clockwise movement and
[4] Quick stop Inverted input (NC). Generates a stop in start allows for the counterclockwise direction.
inverse accordance with quick-stop ramp time set in reverse
parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. When [14] Jog (Default Digital input 29): Use to activate jog
motor stops, the shaft is in free mode. Logic 0 speed. See parameter 3-11 Jog Speed [Hz].
Quick-stop. [15] Preset Shifts between external reference and preset
[5] DC-brake Inverted input for DC braking (NC). Stops reference reference. It is assumed that [1] External/preset
inverse motor by energising it with a DC current for a on has been selected in parameter 3-04 Reference
certain time period. See parameter 2-01 DC Function. Logic '0' = external reference active;
Brake Current to parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut In logic '1' = one of the 8 preset references is
Speed [RPM]. The function is only active when active.
the value in parameter 2-02 DC Braking Time is [16] Preset ref Preset ref. bit 0,1, and 2 enables a choice
different from 0. Logic 0 DC braking. bit 0 between one of the 8 preset references
[6] Stop Stop Inverted function. Generates a stop according to Table 3.14.
inverse function when the selected terminal goes from [17] Preset ref Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
logical level 1 to 0. The stop is performed bit 1
according to the selected ramp time [18] Preset ref Same as Preset ref bit 0 [16].
(parameter 3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time, bit 2
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time,
parameter 3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time,
parameter 3-72 Ramp 4 Ramp Down Time).
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 81

Preset ref. bit 2 1 0 [24] Set-up (Default Digital input 32): Same as [23] Set-up
Preset ref. 0 0 0 0 select bit select bit 0.
Preset ref. 1 0 0 1 1
Preset ref. 2 0 1 0 [26] Precise Sends an inverted stop signal when the precise
Preset ref. 3 0 1 1 stop inv. stop function is activated in
parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
3 3 Preset ref. 4
Preset ref. 5
1
1
0
0
0
1 Precise stop inverse function is available for
terminals 18 or 19.
Preset ref. 6 1 1 0
[27] Precise Use when [0] Precise ramp stop is selected in
Preset ref. 7 1 1 1
start, stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function.
Table 3.14 Preset Ref. Bit Precise start, stop is available for terminals 18
and 19.
[19] Freeze Freezes the actual reference, which is now the Precise start makes sure that the angle that the
ref point of enable/condition for Speed up and Speed rotor turns from standing still to reference is the
down to be used. If Speed up/down is used, the same for each start (for same ramp time, same
speed change always follows ramp 2 set-point). This is the equivalent to the precise
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and stop where the angle that the rotor turns from
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the reference to standing still is the same for each
range 0 - parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference. stop.
[20] Freeze Freezes the actual motor frequency (Hz), which is When using parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function
output now the point of enable/condition for Speed up option [1] or [2]:
and Speed down to be used. If Speed up/down is The frequency converter needs a Precise Stop
used, the speed change always follows ramp 2 signal before the value of parameter 1-84 Precise
(parameter 3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time and Stop Counter Value is reached. If this is not
parameter 3-52 Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time) in the supplied, the frequency converter does not stop
range 0 - parameter 1-23 Motor Frequency. when the value in parameter 1-84 Precise Stop
NOTICE Counter Value is reached.

Precise start, stop must be triggered by a Digital
When Freeze output is active, the frequency Input and is available for terminals 18 and 19.
converter cannot be stopped via a low [8]
[28] Catch up Increases reference value by percentage
Start signal. Stop the frequency converter
(relative) set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow
via a terminal programmed for [2] Coasting
Down Value.
inverse or [3] Coast and reset inverse.
[29] Slow Reduces reference value by percentage (relative)
[21] Speed Select Speed up and Speed down if digital control down set in parameter 3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value.
up of the up/down speed is desired (motor potenti- [30] Counter Precise stop function in parameter 1-83 Precise
ometer). Activate this function by selecting either input Stop Function acts as Counter stop or speed
[19] Freeze ref or [20] Freeze output. When Speed compensated counter stop with or without
up/down is activated for less than 400 ms the reset. The counter value must be set in
resulting reference is increased/decreased by 0.1 %. parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value.
If Speed up/down is activated for more than 400 [31] Pulse Counts the number of pulse flanks per sample
ms the resulting reference follows the setting in edge time. This gives a higher resolution at high
ramping up/down parameter 3-x1/3-x2. triggered frequencies, but is not as precise at lower
frequencies. Use this pulse principle for
Shut down Catch up
encoders with very low resolution (e.g. 30 ppr).
Unchanged speed 0 0
130BB463.10
Pulse
Reduced by %-value 1 0
Sample time
Increased by %-value 0 1
Reduced by %-value 1 1
Illustration 3.33 Pulse Flanks per Sample
Table 3.15 Shut Down/Catch Up Time
[22] Speed Same as [21] Speed up.

down [32] Pulse Measures the duration between pulse flanks.
[23] Set-up Select Set-up select bit 0 or Select Set-up select time This gives a higher resolution at lower
select bit bit 1 to select one of the 4 set-ups. Set based frequencies, but is not as precise at higher
0 parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to Multi Set-up. frequencies. This principle has a cut-off
frequency which makes it unsuited for encoders
82 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

with very low resolutions (e.g. 30 ppr) at low [57] DigiPot Clears the Digital Potentiometer reference
speeds. Clear described in parameter group 3-9* Digital Pot.
Meter
Speed [rpm] Speed [rpm]
130BB462.10
[60] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment
counting in the SLC counter.
3 3
a Time[sec] b Time[sec] [61] Counter A (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement
a: very low encoder b: standard encoder counting in the SLC counter.
resolution resolution [62] Reset Input for reset of counter A.
Counter A
Table 3.16 [63] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for increment
counting in the SLC counter.
Pulse
[64] Counter B (Terminal 29 or 33 only) Input for decrement
130BB464.10
Timer
Sample time
Time counter
Time Start Read Timer: Read Timer: counting in the SLC counter.
20 timer tides 20 timer tides
[65] Reset Input for reset of counter B.
Counter B
Illustration 3.34 Duration Between Pulse
Flanks [70] Mech. Brake Brake feedback for hoisting applications: Set
Feedback parameter 1-01 Motor Control Principle to [3]
flux w/ motor feedback; set
parameter 1-72 Start Function to [6] Hoist
[34] Ramp bit Enables a choice between one of the 4 ramps
mech brake Ref.
0 available, according to Table 3.17.
[71] Mech. Brake Inverted brake feedback for hoisting
[35] Ramp bit Same as Ramp bit 0.
Feedback applications
1
inv.
Preset ramp bit 1 0 [72] PID error When enabled, it inverts the resulting error
Ramp 1 0 0 inverse from the process PID controller. Available
only if "Configuration Mode" is set to
Ramp 2 0 1
"Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed OL"
Ramp 3 1 0
or "Extended PID Speed CL".
Ramp 4 1 1
[73] PID reset I- When enabled, resets the I-part of the
Table 3.17 Preset Ramp Bit part Process PID controller. Equivalent to
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset.
[40] Latched A latched Precise Start only requires a pulse Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
Precise of 3 ms on T18 or T19. to "Surface Winder", "Extended PID Speed
Start When using for 1-83 Precise Stop Function [1] OL" or "Extended PID Speed CL".
Cnt stop with reset or [2] Cnt stop w/o reset: [74] PID enable When enabled, enables the extended process
When the reference is reached, the frequency PID controller. Equivalent to
converter internally enables the Precise Stop parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.
signal. This means that the frequency Available only if "Configuration Mode" is set
converter does the Precise Stop when the "Extended PID Speed OL" or "Extended PID
counter value of parameter 1-84 Precise Stop Speed CL".
Counter Value is reached. [80] PTC Card 1 All Digital Inputs can be set to [80] PTC Card
[41] Latched Sends a latched stop signal when the precise 1. However, only one Digital Input must be
Precise stop function is activated in set to this choice.
Stop parameter 1-83 Precise Stop Function. The [91] Profidrive The functionality is the same as the
inverse Latched Precise stop inverse function is OFF2 according control word bit of the Profibus/
available for terminals 18 or 19. Profinet option.
[51] External This function makes it possible to give an [92] Profidrive The functionality is the same as the
interlock external fault to the frequency converter. This OFF3 according control word bit of the Profibus/
fault is treated in the same way as an Profinet option.
internally generated alarm. [98] Start edge Edge triggered start command. Keeps the
[55] DigiPot INCREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer triggered start command alive. It can be used for a
Increase function described in parameter group 3-9* start push-button.
Digital Pot. Meter [100] Safe Option
[56] DigiPot DECREASE signal to the Digital Potentiometer Reset
Decrease function described in parameter group 3-9*
Digital Pot. Meter
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 83

5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input 5-18 Terminal X30/4 Digital Input

[8] * Start Functions are described under parameter group 5-1* converter. Functions are described under
Digital Inputs 5-1* Digital Inputs
5-11 Terminal 19 Digital Input 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop

3 3 Option: Function: Option: Function:
[10] * Reversing Functions are described under parameter group [1] Safe Stop Coasts frequency converter when safe stop is
5-1* Digital Inputs Alarm activated. Manual reset from LCP, digital input
or fieldbus.
5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input
[3] Safe Stop Coasts frequency converter when safe stop is
Option: Function:
Warning activated (T-37 off). When safe stop circuit is
[2] * Coast inverse Functions are described under parameter
reestablished, the frequency converter will
group 5-1* Digital Inputs
continue without manual reset.
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input [4] PTC 1 Alarm Coasts frequency converter when Safe Torque
Option: Function: Off is activated. Manual reset from LCP, digital
Select the function from the available digital input input or fieldbus.
range and the additional options [60], [61], [63] and [5] PTC 1 Coasts frequency converter when Safe Torque
[64]. Counters are used in Smart Logic Control Warning Off is activated (T-37 off). When Safe Torque
functions.This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Off circuit is reestablished, the frequency
[14] * Jog Functions are described under parameter group 5-1* converter continues without manual reset,
Digital Inputs unless a Digital Input set to[80] PTC Card 1 is
still enabled.
5-14 Terminal 32 Digital Input
[6] PTC 1 & This choice is used when the PTC option is
Option: Function:
Relay A gated together with a Stop button through a
Select the function from the available digital
Safety relay to T-37. Coasts frequency
input range.
converter when safe stop is activated. Manual
No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital Inputs
reset from LCP, digital input or fieldbus.
5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input [7] PTC 1 & This option is used when the PTC option is
Option: Function: Relay W gated together with a Stop button through a
Select the function from the available digital Safety relay to T-37. Coasts frequency
input range and the additional options [60], converter when Safe Torque Off is activated
[61], [63] and [64]. Counters are used in (T-37 off). When safe stop circuit is reestab-
Smart Logic Control functions. lished, the frequency converter continuea
without manual reset, unless a Digital Input
[0] * No operation Functions are described under 5-1* Digital
set to [80] PTC Card 1 is (still) enabled.
Inputs
[8] PTC 1 & This option makes it possible to use a
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input Relay A/W combination of Alarm and Warning.
Option: Function:
[9] PTC 1 & This option makes it possible to use a
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
Relay W/A combination of Alarm and Warning.
MCB 101 is installed in the frequency
converter. Functions are described under
5-1* Digital Inputs
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input

Option: Function:
5-1* Digital Inputs

Option: Function:
84 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE 5-23 Terminal X46/7 Digital Input

Options [4]-[9] are only available when the MCB 112 PTC Option: Function:
Thermistor Card is connected. [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
NOTICE converter. Functions are described under
When Auto Reset/Warning is selected the frequency

3 3
converter opens up for automatic restart. 5-24 Terminal X46/9 Digital Input
Option: Function:
Function No. PTC Relay
No Function [0] - -
Safe Stop Alarm [1]* - Safe Stop [A68]
Safe Stop Warning [3] - Safe Stop [W68]
PTC 1 Alarm [4] PTC 1 Safe Stop - Option: Function:
[A71] [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
PTC 1 Warning [5] PTC 1 Safe Stop - MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
[W71] converter. Functions are described under
PTC 1 & Relay A [6] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [A68] parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
[A71]
PTC 1 & Relay W [7] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [W68] 5-26 Terminal X46/13 Digital Input
[W71] Option: Function:
PTC 1 & Relay A/W [8] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [W68] [0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module
[A71] MCB 113 is installed in the frequency
PTC 1 & Relay W/A [9] PTC 1 Safe Stop Safe Stop [A68] converter. Functions are described under
[W71] parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs.
Table 3.18 Overview of Functions, Alarms and Warnings

3.7.3 5-3* Digital Outputs
W means warning and A means alarm. For further information, see
Alarms and Warnings in section Troubleshooting in the Design Guide
The 2 solid-state digital outputs are common for terminals
or the Operating Instructions
27 and 29. Set the I/O function for terminal 27 in
A dangerous failure related to Safe Torque Off issues parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode, and set the I/O function
Alarm: Dangerous Failure [A72]. for terminal 29 in parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
Refer to Table 5.1.

NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
Option: Function: running.
MCB 113 is installed in the frequency [0] No operation Default for all digital outputs and relay
converter. Functions are described under outputs
[1] Control ready The control card is ready. E.g.: Feedback
5-21 Terminal X46/3 Digital Input from a frequency converter where the
control is supplied by an external 24 V
Option: Function:
(MCB 107) and the main power to the unit
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module is not detected.
[2] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
operation and applies a supply signal on
the control board.
5-22 Terminal X46/5 Digital Input [3] Drive ready / The frequency converter is ready for
remote operation and is in [Auto On] mode.
Option: Function:
control
[4] Enable / no Ready for operation. No start or stop
warning command is been given (start/disable). No
warnings are active.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 85

[5] VLT running Motor is running and shaft torque present. specified voltage range (see General
[6] Running / no Output speed is higher than the speed set Specifications section in the Design Guide).
warning in parameter 1-81 Min Speed for Function at [25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
Stop [RPM]. The motor is running and clockwise when logic=0 and counter
there are no warnings. clockwise when logic=1. The output
changes as soon as the reversing signal is
3 3
[7] Run in range / Motor is running within the programmed
no warning current and speed ranges set in applied.
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low to [26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) via
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. There the serial communication port.
are no warnings. [27] Torque limit Use in performing a coasting stop and in
[8] Run on Motor runs at reference speed. No and stop torque limit condition. If the frequency
reference / no warnings. converter has received a stop signal and is
warning at the torque limit, the signal is Logic 0.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. There are [28] Brake, no Brake is active and there are no warnings.
no warnings. brake warning
[10] Alarm or An alarm or a warning activates the [29] Brake ready, Brake is ready for operation and there are
warning output. no fault no faults.
[11] At torque The torque limit set in [30] Brake fault Output is Logic 1 when the brake IGBT is
limit parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode or (IGBT) short-circuited. Use this function to protect
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator the frequency converter if there is a fault
Mode has been exceeded. on the brake modules. Use the output/
[12] Out of current The motor current is outside the range set relay to cut out the main voltage from the
range in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. frequency converter.
[13] Below current, Motor current is lower than set in [31] Relay 123 Relay is activated when Control Word [0] is
low parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low. selected in parameter group 8-**
[14] Above Motor current is higher than set in Communications and Options.
current, high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. [32] Mechanical Enables control of an external mechanical
[15] Out of range Output frequency is outside the frequency brake control brake, see description in the section
range set in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Control of Mechanical Brake, and parameter
Low and parameter 4-53 Warning Speed group 2-2* Mechanical Brake
High. [33] Safe stop Indicates that the Safe Torque Off on
[16] Below speed, Output speed is lower than the setting in activated (FC terminal 37 has been activated.
low parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low. 302 only)
[17] Above speed, Output speed is higher than the setting in [40] Out of ref Active when the actual speed is outside
high parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. range settings in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed
[18] Out of Feedback is outside the range set in Low to parameter 4-55 Warning Reference
feedback parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low and High.
range parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [41] Below Active when actual speed is below speed
[19] Below Feedback is below the limit set in reference low reference setting.
feedback low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low. [42] Above Active when actual speed is above speed
[20] Above Feedback is above the limit set in reference high reference setting
feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [43] Extended PID
[21] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the Limit
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the [45] Bus Ctrl Controls output via bus. The state of the
motor, the frequency converter, the brake output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
resistor, or the thermistor. Relay Bus Control. The output state is
[22] Ready, no Frequency converter is ready for operation retained in the event of bus time-out.
thermal and there is no over-temperature warning. [46] Bus Ctrl On at Controls output via bus. The state of the
warning timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
[23] Remote, Frequency converter is ready for operation Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus time-
ready, no and is in [Auto On] mode. There is no out the output state is set high (On).
thermal over-temperature warning. [47] Bus Ctrl Off at Controls output via bus. The state of the
warning timeout output is set in parameter 5-90 Digital &
[24] Ready, no Frequency converter is ready for operation Relay Bus Control. In the event of bus time-
over-/ under and the mains voltage is within the out the output state is set low (Off).
voltage
86 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

[51] MCO Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305 is the Smart Logic Action [34] Set dig. out. C
controlled connected. The output is controlled from low is executed.
option. [83] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
[55] Pulse output Output D The input goes high whenever the Smart
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If Logic Action [41] Set dig. out. D high is
executed. The input goes low whenever
3 3
Comparator 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the Smart Logic Action [35] Set dig. out. D
[61] Comparator 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If low is executed.
Comparator 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the [84] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. Output E The input goes high whenever the Smart
[62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If Logic Action [42] Set dig. out. E high is
Comparator 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the executed. The input goes low whenever
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the Smart Logic Action [36] Set dig. out. E
Comparator 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the [85] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. Output F The input goes high whenever the Smart
[64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators. If Logic Action [43] Set dig. out. F high is
Comparator 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the executed. The input goes low whenever
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the Smart Logic Action [37] Set dig. out. F
Comparator 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the [90] kWh counter Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse width) to
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. pulse output terminal whenever kWh counter
[70] Logic Rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If changes (15-02 kWh Counter).
Logic Rule 0 is evaluated as TRUE, the [120] Local referen- Output is high when
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. ce active parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local or
[71] Logic Rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If when parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [0]
Logic Rule 1 is evaluated as TRUE, the Linked to hand auto at the same time as
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. the LCP is in Hand On mode.
[72] Logic Rule 2 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Reference site Local Remote
Logic Rule 2 is evaluated as TRUE, the
set in referen reference
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
parameter 3-13 ce active
[73] Logic Rule 3 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If
Reference Site active [121]
Logic Rule 3 is evaluated as TRUE, the
[120]
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low.
Reference site: 1 0
[74] Logic Rule 4 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If Local
Logic Rule 4 is evaluated as TRUE, the parameter 3-13 Ref
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. erence Site [2]
[75] Logic Rule 5 See parameter group 13-4* Logic Rules. If Reference site: 0 1
Logic Rule 5 is evaluated as TRUE, the Remote
output goes high. Otherwise, it is low. parameter 3-13 Ref
[80] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. erence Site [1]
Output A The output goes high whenever the Smart Reference site:
Logic Action [38] Set dig. out. A high is Linked to Hand/
executed. The output goes low whenever Auto
the Smart Logic Action[32] Set dig. out. A
Hand 1 0
low is executed.
Hand off 1 0
[81] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action.
Auto off 0 0
Output B The input goes high whenever the Smart
Auto 0 1
Logic Action [39] Set dig. out. B high is
Table 3.19 Local Reference Active
the Smart Logic Action [33] Set dig. out. B
low is executed.
[121] Remote Output is high when
[82] SL Digital See parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action. reference parameter 3-13 Reference Site = [1] Remote
Output C The input goes high whenever the Smart active or [0] Linked to hand/auto while the LCP is
Logic Action [40] Set dig. out. C high is in Auto on mode. See above.
[122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is present.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 87

[123] Start Output is high when there is an active 5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output
command Start command (i.e. via digital input bus
Option: Function:
active connection or Hand on or Auto on), and
[0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter
no Stop or Start command is active.
group 5-3* Digital Outputs
[124] Running Output is high when the frequency
reverse converter is running counter clockwise (the 5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output
3 3 logical product of the status bits running
Option: Function:
AND reverse).
[0] * No operation Functions are described under parameter
[125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency
group 5-3* Digital Outputs
mode converter is in Hand On mode (as
This parameter is applicable for FC 302 only
indicated by the LED light above [Hand
on]). 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[126] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency Option: Function:
mode converter is in Hand On mode (as
[0] No operation This parameter is active when
indicated by the LED light above Auto On).
option module MCB 101 is
[151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
mounted in the frequency
alarm Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21]
converter. Functions are described
Advanced ETR. If the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
under parameter group 5-3*
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1.
Digital Outputs
[152] ATEX ETR Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
freq. alarm Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21] [1] Control Ready
Advanced ETR. If the alarm 166 ATEX ETR [2] Drive ready
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output is 1. [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[153] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, ifparameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [4] Enable / no warning
warning Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21] [5] Running
Advanced ETR. If the alarm 163 ATEX ETR [6] Running / no warning
cur.lim.warning is active, the output is 1. [7] Run in range/no warn
[154] ATEX ETR Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal [8] Run on ref/no warn
freq. warning Protection is set to [20] ATEX ETR or [21] [9] Alarm
Advanced ETR. If the warning 165 ATEX ETR [10] Alarm or warning
freq.lim.warning is active, the output is 1. [11] At torque limit
[188] AHF Capacitor The capacitors are turned on at 20% [12] Out of current range
Connect (hysteresis of 50% gives an interval of 10% [13] Below current, low
- 30%). The capacitors are disconnected [14] Above current, high
below 10%. The off delay is 10 s and [15] Out of speed range
restarts if the nominal power goes above
[16] Below speed, low
10% during the delay. Parameter 5-80 AHF
[17] Above speed, high
Cap Reconnect Delay is used to guarantee a
[18] Out of feedb. range
minimum off-time for the capacitors.
[19] Below feedback, low
[189] External fan The internal logics for the internal fan
[20] Above feedback, high
control control is transferred to this output to
[21] Thermal warning
make it possible to control an external fan
(relevant for HP duct cooling). [22] Ready,no thermal W
[190] Safe Function [23] Remote,ready,no TW

active [24] Ready, Voltage OK
[191] Safe Opt. [25] Reverse
Reset req. [26] Bus OK
[192] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [27] Torque limit & stop
[193] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [28] Brake, no brake war
[194] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [29] Brake ready, no fault
[195] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[196] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [31] Relay 123
[197] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [32] Mech brake ctrl
[198] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [33] Safe stop active
[199] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [38] Motor feedback error
[39] Tracking error
[40] Out of ref range
88 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) 5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[41] Below reference, low [199] RS Flipflop 7
[42] Above ref, high
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101)
[43] Extended PID Limit
[45]
[46]
Bus ctrl.
Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
Option:
[0] No operation
Function:
This parameter is active when
3 3
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout option module option module
[51] MCO controlled MCB 101 is mounted in the
frequency converter. Functions are
[55] Pulse output
described under parameter group
[60] Comparator 0
5-3* Digital Outputs
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2 [1] Control Ready
[63] Comparator 3 [2] Drive ready
[64] Comparator 4 [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl
[65] Comparator 5 [4] Enable / no warning
[70] Logic rule 0 [5] Running
[71] Logic rule 1 [6] Running / no warning
[72] Logic rule 2 [7] Run in range/no warn
[73] Logic rule 3 [8] Run on ref/no warn
[74] Logic rule 4 [9] Alarm
[75] Logic rule 5 [10] Alarm or warning
[80] SL digital output A [11] At torque limit
[81] SL digital output B [12] Out of current range
[82] SL digital output C [13] Below current, low
[83] SL digital output D [14] Above current, high
[84] SL digital output E [15] Out of speed range
[85] SL digital output F [16] Below speed, low
[90] kWh counter pulse Sends a pulse (200 ms pulse [17] Above speed, high
width) to output terminal [18] Out of feedb. range
whenever kWh counter changes [19] Below feedback, low
(15-02 kWh Counter). [20] Above feedback, high
[120] Local ref active [21] Thermal warning
[121] Remote ref active [22] Ready,no thermal W
[122] No alarm [23] Remote,ready,no TW
[123] Start command activ [24] Ready, Voltage OK
[124] Running reverse [25] Reverse
[125] Drive in hand mode [26] Bus OK
[126] Drive in auto mode [27] Torque limit & stop
[151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [28] Brake, no brake war
[152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [29] Brake ready, no fault
[153] ATEX ETR cur. warning [30] Brake fault (IGBT)
[154] ATEX ETR freq. warning [31] Relay 123
[188] AHF Capacitor Connect [32] Mech brake ctrl
[189] External Fan Control [33] Safe stop active
[190] Safe Function active [39] Tracking error
[191] Safe Opt. Reset req. [40] Out of ref range
[192] RS Flipflop 0 [41] Below reference, low
[193] RS Flipflop 1 [42] Above ref, high
[194] RS Flipflop 2 [43] Extended PID Limit
[195] RS Flipflop 3 [45] Bus ctrl.
[196] RS Flipflop 4 [46] Bus ctrl, 1 if timeout
[197] RS Flipflop 5 [47] Bus ctrl, 0 if timeout
[198] RS Flipflop 6 [51] MCO controlled
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 89

5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) 3.7.4 5-4* Relays
Option: Function:
[60] Comparator 0
Parameters for configuring the timing and the output
functions for the relays.
[61] Comparator 1
[62] Comparator 2 5-40 Function Relay
3 3 [63]
[64]
Comparator 3
Comparator 4
Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
[65] Comparator 5 113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
[70] Logic rule 0 (MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
[71] Logic rule 1 Option: Function:
[72] Logic rule 2 [0] No operation All digital and relay outputs are
[73] Logic rule 3 default set to No Operation.
[74] Logic rule 4
[1] Control Ready The control card is ready. E.g.:
[75] Logic rule 5
Feedback from a frequency converter
[80] SL digital output A
where the control is supplied by an
[81] SL digital output B
external 24 V (MCB 107) and the main
[82] SL digital output C
power to frequency converter is not
[83] SL digital output D detected.
[84] SL digital output E
[2] Drive ready Frequency converter is ready to
[85] SL digital output F
operate. Mains and control supplies
[120] Local ref active
are OK.
[121] Remote ref active
[122] No alarm [3] Drive rdy/rem ctrl The frequency converter is ready for
[123] Start command activ operation and is in Auto On mode
[124] Running reverse [4] Enable / no Ready for operation. No start or stop
[125] Drive in hand mode warning commands have been applied (start/
[126] Drive in auto mode disable). No warnings are active.
[151] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [5] Running Motor is running, and shaft torque
[152] ATEX ETR freq. alarm present.
[153] ATEX ETR cur. warning
[6] Running / no Output speed is higher than the
[154] ATEX ETR freq. warning
warning speed set in 1-81 Min Speed for
[189] External Fan Control
Function at Stop [RPM] Min Speed for
[190] Safe Function active
Function at Stop [RPM]. The motor is
[191] Safe Opt. Reset req. running and no warnings.
[192] RS Flipflop 0
[7] Run in range/no Motor is running within the
[193] RS Flipflop 1
warn programmed current and speed
[194] RS Flipflop 2
ranges set in parameter 4-50 Warning
[195] RS Flipflop 3
Current Low and
[196] RS Flipflop 4
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[197] RS Flipflop 5
No warnings.
[198] RS Flipflop 6
[8] Run on ref/no Motor runs at reference speed. No
[199] RS Flipflop 7
warn warnings.
[9] Alarm An alarm activates the output. No

warnings
[10] Alarm or warning An alarm or a warning activates the

output.
[11] At torque limit The torque limit set in

parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor
Mode or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit
Generator Mode has been exceeded.
90 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

5-40 Function Relay 5-40 Function Relay

Array [9] Array [9]
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6] 113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6]
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105)) (MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
Option:
[12] Out of current
Function:
The motor current is outside the
Option: Function:
changes as soon as the reversing
3 3
range range set in parameter 4-18 Current signal is applied.
Limit.
[26] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out)
[13] Below current, low Motor current is lower than set in via the serial communication port.
parameter 4-50 Warning Current Low.
[27] Torque limit & Use in performing a coasted stop and
[14] Above current, Motor current is higher than set in stop frequency converter in torque limit
high parameter 4-51 Warning Current High. condition. If the frequency converter
has received a stop signal and is in
[15] Out of speed Output speed/frequency is outside the
torque limit, the signal is Logic 0.
range frequency range set in
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low [28] Brake, no brake Brake is active and there are no
and parameter 4-53 Warning Speed war warnings.
High.
[29] Brake ready, no Brake is ready for operation and there
[16] Below speed, low Output speed is lower than the fault are no faults.
setting in parameter 4-52 Warning
[30] Brake fault (IGBT) Output is Logic 1 when the brake
Speed Low
IGBT is short-circuited. Use this
[17] Above speed, high Output speed is higher than the function to protect the frequency
setting in parameter 4-53 Warning converter, if there is a fault on the
Speed High. brake module. Use the digital output/
relay to cut out the main voltage from
[18] Out of feedb. Feedback is outside the range set in
the frequency converter.
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback [31] Relay 123 Digital output/relay is activated when
High. [0] Control Word is selected in
parameter group 8-** Comm. and
[19] Below feedback, Feedback is below the limit set in
Options.
low parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low.
[32] Mech brake ctrl Selection of mechanical brake control.
[20] Above feedback, Feedback is above the limit set in
When selected parameters in
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
parameter group 2-2* Mechanical
[21] Thermal warning Thermal warning turns on when the Brake are active. The output must be
temperature exceeds the limit either reinforced to carry the current for the
in motor, frequency converter, brake coil in the brake. Usually, solved by
resistor, or connected thermistor. connecting an external relay to the
[22] Ready,no thermal Frequency converter is ready for selected digital output.
W operation and there is no over- [33] Safe stop active (FC 302 only) Indicates that the Safe
temperature warning. Torque Off on terminal 37 has been
[23] Remote,ready,no Frequency converter is ready for activated.
TW operation and is in Auto On mode. [36] Control word bit Activate relay 1 by control word from
There is no over-temperature warning. 11 fieldbus. No other functional impact in
[24] Ready, Voltage OK Frequency converter is ready for the frequency converter. Typical
operation and the mains voltage is application: controlling auxiliary
within the specified voltage range device from fieldbus. The function is
(see General Specifications section in valid when [0] FC profile in
Design Guide). parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is
selected.
[25] Reverse The motor runs (or is ready to run)
clockwise when logic=0 and counter [37] Control word bit Activate relay 2 (FC 302 only) by
clockwise when logic=1. The output 12 control word from fieldbus. No other
functional impact in the frequency
converter. Typical application:
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 91


Array [9] Array [9]
3 3 Option: Function:
controlling auxiliary device from
Option:
[61] Comparator 1
Function:
See parameter group 13-1*
fieldbus. The function is valid when [0] Comparators. If Comparator 1 in SLC is
FC profile in parameter 8-10 Control TRUE, the output goes high.
Word Profile is selected. Otherwise, it is low.
[38] Motor feedback Failure in the speed feedback loop [62] Comparator 2 See parameter group 13-1*
error from motor running in closed loop. Comparators. If Comparator 2 in SLC is
The output can eventually be used to TRUE, the output goes high.
prepare switching the frequency Otherwise, it is low.
converter in open loop in emergency
[63] Comparator 3 See parameter group 13-1*
case.
Comparators. If Comparator 3 in SLC is
[39] Tracking error When the difference between TRUE, the output goes high.
calculated speed and actual speed in Otherwise, it is low.
parameter 4-35 Tracking Error is larger
[64] Comparator 4 See parameter group 13-1*
than selected the digital output/relay
is active.
TRUE, the output goes high.
[40] Out of ref range Active when the actual speed is Otherwise, it is low.
outside settings in
[65] Comparator 5 See parameter group 13-1* Smart
parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low to
Logic Control. If Comparator 5 in SLC
parameter 4-55 Warning Reference
is TRUE, the output goes high.
High.
Otherwise, it is low.
[41] Below reference, Active when actual speed is below
[70] Logic rule 0 See parameter group 13-4* Smart
low speed reference setting.
Logic Control. If Logic Rule 0 in SLC is
[42] Above ref, high Active when actual speed is above TRUE, the output goes high.
speed reference setting. Otherwise, it is low.
[43] Extended PID Limit [71] Logic rule 1 See parameter group 13-4* Smart
[45] Bus ctrl. Controls digital output/relay via bus. Logic Control. If Logic Rule 1 in SLC is
The state of the output is set in TRUE, the output goes high.
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Otherwise, it is low.
Control. The output state is retained in
the event of bus time-out.
[46] Bus ctrl, 1 if Controls output via bus. The state of TRUE, the output goes high.
timeout the output is set in Otherwise, it is low.
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. In the event of bus time-out,
the output state is set high (On).
[47] Bus ctrl, 0 if Controls output via bus. The state of Otherwise, it is low.
timeout the output is set in
parameter 5-90 Digital & Relay Bus
Control. In the event of bus time-out,
the output state is set low (Off).
[51] MCO controlled Active when an MCO 302 or MCO 305
is connected. The output is controlled
from option.
[60] Comparator 0 See parameter group 13-1* Otherwise, it is low.
[80] SL digital output A See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Action. Output A is low on Smart
92 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Array [9] Array [9]
Option: Function:
Logic Action [32]. Output A is high on
Option: Function:
Reference site Local Remote
3 3
Smart Logic Action [38]. set in referen reference
3-13 Reference ce active
[81] SL digital output B See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Site active [121]
Action. Output B is low on Smart
[120]
Logic Action [33]. Output B is high on
Smart Logic Action [39]. Reference site: 1 0
Local
[82] SL digital output C See parameter 13-52 SL Controller 3-13 Reference
Action. Output C is low on Smart Site [2]
Logic Action [34]. Output C is high on
Reference site: 0 1
Smart Logic Action [40].
Remote
[83] SL digital output D See parameter 13-52 SL Controller 3-13 Reference
Action. Output D is low on Smart Site [1]
Logic Action [35]. Output D is high on Reference site:
Smart Logic Action [41]. Linked to Hand/
Auto
[84] SL digital output E See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Action. Output E is low on Smart Logic Hand 1 0
Action [36]. Output E is high on Smart Hand off 1 0
Logic Action [42]. Auto off 0 0
Auto 0 1
[85] SL digital output F See parameter 13-52 SL Controller
Action. Output F is low on Smart Logic Table 3.20 Local Reference Active
Action [37]. Output F is high on Smart
Logic Action [43]. [121] Remote ref active Output is high when 3-13 Reference
[120] Local ref active Output is high when 3-13 Reference Site = [1] Remote or [0] Linked to hand/
Site = [2] Local or when 3-13 Reference auto while the LCP is in Auto On
Site = [0] Linked to hand auto at the mode. See above.
same time as the LCP is in Hand On [122] No alarm Output is high when no alarm is
mode. present.
[123] Start command Output is high when the Start

activ command high (i.e. via digital input,
bus connection or [Hand On] or [Auto
On] ), and a Stop has been last
command.
[124] Running reverse Output is high when the frequency

converter is running counter clockwise
(the logical product of the status bits
running AND reverse).
[125] Drive in hand Output is high when the frequency

mode converter is in [Hand on] mode (as
indicated by the LED light above
[Hand on]).
[126] Drive in auto Output is high when the frequency

mode converter is in Auto mode (as
indicated by LED on above [Auto
on] ).
[151] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 93

5-40 Function Relay 5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9] Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
(Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2] (MCB 113), Relay 4 [3] (MCB [4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
113), Relay 5 [4] (MCB 113), Relay 6 [5] (MCB 113), Relay 7 [6] Range: Function:
(MCB 105), Relay 8 [7] (MCB 105), Relay 9 [8] (MCB 105))
during the specified time. Select one of
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm
available mechanical relays and Relay
Option MCB 105 in an array function. See
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm is active, 5-40 Function Relay. Relay 3-6 are
the output is 1. included in Extended Relay Card MCB
113.
[152] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
alarm Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
130BA171.10
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm Selected
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm is active, Event
the output is 1.
Relay
[153] ATEX ETR cur. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor output
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
On Delay Off Delay
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the alarm P 5-41 P 5-42
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning is
active, the output is 1. Selected
Event
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] ATEX
Relay
ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If the output
warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the output On Delay
P 5-41
is 1.
Illustration 3.35 On Delay, Relay
[188] AHF Capacitor
Connect
[189] External Fan The internal logics for the internal fan
5-42 Off Delay, Relay
Control control is transferred to this output to
make it possible to control an external Array[2]: Relay1[0], Relay2[1]
fan (relevant for HP duct cooling). Range: Function:
[190] Safe Function 0.01 s* [0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-out time.
active Select one of available mechanical relays
and MCB 105 in an array function. See
[191] Safe Opt. Reset
5-40 Function Relay.
req.
[192] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators.
130BA172.10
[193] RS Flipflop 1 See 13-1* Comparators

Selected
[194] RS Flipflop 2 See 13-1* Comparators Event
[196] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators Relay

output
[198] RS Flipflop 6 See 13-1* Comparators On Delay Off Delay

P 5-41 P 5-42
[199] RS Flipflop 7 See 13-1* Comparators.
Illustration 3.36 Off Delay, Relay
5-41 On Delay, Relay

Array [9], (Relay 1 [0], Relay 2 [1], Relay 3 [2], Relay 4 [3], Relay 5
If the selected Event condition changes before the on- or
[4], Relay 6 [5], Relay 7 [6], Relay 8 [7], Relay 9 [8])
off delay timer expires, the relay output is unaffected.
Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 600 s] Enter the delay of the relay cut-in time.
The relay only cuts in if the condition in
5-40 Function Relay is uninterrupted
94 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.7.5 5-5* Pulse Input 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

Range: Function:
The pulse input parameters are used to define an (parameter 5-02 Terminal 29
appropriate window for the impulse reference area by Mode = [0] input (default)
configuring the scaling and filter settings for the pulse and 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital
inputs. Input terminals 29 or 33 act as frequency reference
inputs. Set terminal 29 (5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input) or
Input = applicable value).
This parameter is available
3 3
terminal 33 (5-15 Terminal 33 Digital Input) to [32] Pulse for FC 302 only.
input. If terminal 29 is used as an input, set
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode to [0] Input. 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
130BA076.10
Ref.
(RPM) Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value
High related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft speed
ref.
value ReferenceFeed- and the high feedback value, see
P 5-53/
p 5-58 backUnit] also parameter 5-58 Term. 33 High
Ref./Feedb. Value. Select terminal
29 as a digital input
(parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
= [0] input (default) and
Low
ref. 5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input =
value
P 5-52/ applicable value).
p 5-57 Low freq. High freq. Input
P 5-50/ P 5-51/ (Hz) This parameter is available for FC
P 5-55 P 5-56
302 only.
Illustration 3.37 Pulse Input
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29

Range: Function:
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency
100 [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
Range: Function: ms* ms] pulse filter dampens oscillations of the
100 [0 - Enter the low frequency limit feedback signal, which is an advantage, if
Hz* 110000 Hz] corresponding to the low motor shaft there is a lot of noise in the system. A high
speed (i.e. low reference value) in time constant value results in better
parameter 5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. dampening but also increases the time
Value. Refer to Illustration 3.37. delay through the filter.
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency
Range: Function:
Range: Function: 100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the low frequency corresponding
100 [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency limit Hz] to the low motor shaft speed (i.e. low
Hz* Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft reference value) in parameter 5-57 Term.
speed (i.e. high reference value) in 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb.
Value. 5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency
This parameter is available for FC 302
Range: Function:
only.
100 Hz* [0 - 110000 Enter the high frequency
Hz] corresponding to the high motor shaft
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
speed (i.e. high reference value) in
Range: Function: 5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
0 Reference- [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference
FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 value limit for the motor 5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
ReferenceFeed- shaft speed [RPM]. This is
Range: Function:
backUnit] also the lowest feedback
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the low reference value [RPM]
value, see also
999999.999 ] for the motor shaft speed. This is also
parameter 5-57 Term. 33 Low
the low feedback value, see also
Ref./Feedb. Value. Set
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
terminal 29 to digital input
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 95

5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value 3.7.6 5-6* Pulse Outputs

Range: Function:
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the high reference value NOTICE
related* 999999.999 [RPM] for the motor shaft These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
ReferenceFeed- speed. See also running.
3 3 backUnit] parameter 5-53 Term. 29 High
Ref./Feedb. Value. These parameters are to configure pulse outputs with their
functions and scaling. Terminal 27 and 29 are allocated to
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 pulse output via parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
Range: Function: parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode, respectively.
100 ms* [1 - 1000 Enter the pulse filter time constant. The
ms] low-pass filter reduces the influence on Output value
130BA089.11
and dampens oscillations on the feedback
signal from the control.
This is an advantage, e.g. if there is a High output
value
great amount on noise in the system. P 5-60(term27)
P 5-63(term29)
High freq. Output

P 5-62(term27) (Hz)
P 5-65(term29)
Illustration 3.38 Configuration of Pulse Outputs
Options for readout output variables:
Parameters for configuring the scaling

and output functions of pulse
outputs. The pulse outputs are
designated to terminals 27 or 29.
Select terminal 27 output in
parameter 5-01 Terminal 27 Mode and
terminal 29 output in
parameter 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
[0] No operation
[45] Bus control
[48] Bus control time-
out
[51] MCO controlled
[100] Output frequency
[101] Reference
[102] Feedback
[103] Motor current
[104] Torque relative to
limit
[105] Torque relative to
rated
[106] Power
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
[109] Max Out Freq
96 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output Variable
Option: Function: Select the variable for read-out on terminal X30/6.
[0] No operation Select the desired display output for This parameter is active when option module MCB 101 is
terminal 27. installed in the frequency converter.
Same options and functions as parameter group 5-6* Pulse
[45] Bus ctrl.
[48] Bus ctrl., timeout
Outputs.
Option: Function:
3 3
[51] MCO controlled
[100] Output frequency [0] No operation
[101] Reference [45] Bus ctrl.
[102] Feedback [48] Bus ctrl., timeout
[103] Motor Current [51] MCO controlled
[104] Torque rel to limit [100] Output frequency
[105] Torq relate to rated [101] Reference
[106] Power [102] Feedback
[107] Speed [103] Motor Current
[108] Torque [104] Torque rel to limit
[109] Max Out Freq [105] Torq relate to rated
[119] Torque % lim [106] Power

[107] Speed
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 [108] Torque
Range: Function: [109] Max Out Freq
Size [0 - 32000 Set the maximum frequency for [119] Torque % lim
related* Hz] terminal 27, corresponding to the
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6
output variable selected in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Range: Function:
Output Variable. Size [0 - 32000 Select the maximum frequency on
related* Hz] terminal X30/6 referring to the output
5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable variable in 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse
Output Variable.
Option: Function:
This parameter is active when option
[0] No operation Select the desired display output for
module MCB 101 is mounted in the
terminal 29. This parameter is
frequency converter.
available for FC 302 only.
[45] Bus ctrl.

[48] Bus ctrl., timeout 3.7.7 5-7* 24 V Encoder Input
[51] MCO controlled
[100] Output frequency Connect the 24 V encoder to terminal 12 (24 V DC supply),
[101] Reference
terminal 32 (Channel A), terminal 33 (Channel B), and
terminal 20 (GND). The digital inputs 32/33 are active for
[102] Feedback
encoder inputs when [1] 24 V encoder is selected in
[103] Motor Current
parameter 1-02 Flux Motor Feedback Source and
[104] Torque rel to limit
parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source. The encoder
[105] Torq relate to rated
used is a dual channel (A and B) 24 V type. Max input
[106] Power
frequency: 110 kHz.
[107] Speed
[108] Torque
Encoder Connection to the frequency converter
[109] Max Out Freq
24 V incremental encoder. Max. cable length 5 m.
[119] Torque % lim
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29

Range: Function:
5000 Hz* [0 - 32000 Hz] Set the maximum frequency for
terminal 29 corresponding to the
output variable set in 5-63 Terminal 29
Pulse Output Variable.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 97

5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction

+24V DC
130BA090.11
GND
Option: Function:
B
A
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37 NOTICE
3 3
Change the detected encoder rotation
direction without changing the wiring to the
encoder.
[0] * Clockwise Sets channel A 90 (electrical degrees)

behind channel B upon clockwise rotation of
the encoder shaft.
[1] Counter Sets channel A 90 (electrical degrees) ahead

clockwise of channel B upon clockwise rotation of the
encoder shaft.
3.7.8 5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay

Range: Function:
25 s* [1 - 120 Guarantees a minimum off-time for the
s] capacitors. The timer starts once the AHF
capacitor disconnects and needs to expire
before the output is allowed to be on again. It
24V or 10-30V encoder
will only turn on again if the drive power is
Illustration 3.39 Encoder Connection
between 20% and 30%.
3.7.9 5-9* Bus Controlled

130BA646.10
CW
A
This parameter group selects digital and relay outputs via
B a fieldbus setting.
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] This parameter holds the state of the
digital outputs and relays that is
controlled by bus.
A logical '1' indicates that the output is
CCW
A
high or active.
A logical '0' indicates that the output is
low or inactive.
B
Illustration 3.40 Encoder Rotation Direction
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution

Range: Function:
1024* [1 - 4096 ] Set the encoder pulses per revolution on the
motor shaft. Read the correct value from the
encoder.
98 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Bit 0 Digital Output Terminal 27 5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
Bit 1 Digital Output Terminal 29 Range: Function:
Bit 2 Digital Output Terminal X 30/6
0 %* [0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to the
Bit 3 Digital Output Terminal X 30/7 %] output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
Bit 4 Relay 1 output terminal configured as [45] Bus ctrl. in
Bit 5
Bit 6
Relay 2 output terminal
Option B Relay 1 output terminal
parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Variable.
3 3
Bit 7 Option B Relay 2 output terminal
Bit 8 Option B Relay 3 output terminal 5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset
Bit 9-15 Reserved for future terminals Range: Function:
Bit 16 Option C Relay 1 output terminal 0 %* [0 - 100 Set the output frequency transferred to the
Bit 17 Option C Relay 2 output terminal %] output terminal X30/6 when the terminal is
Bit 18 Option C Relay 3 output terminal configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
Bit 19 Option C Relay 4 output terminal parameter 5-66 Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
Bit 20 Option C Relay 5 output terminal Variable. And a time-out is detected.
Bit 21 Option C Relay 6 output terminal
Bit 24-31 Reserved for future terminals
Table 3.21 Bus-controlled Digital Outputs and Relays
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control

Range: Function:
%] output terminal 27 when the terminal is
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output
Variable.
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-60 Terminal 27 Pulse Output Variable
and a time-out is detected.
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control

Range: Function:
configured as [45] Bus Controlled in
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output
Variable.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset

Range: Function:
configured as [48] Bus Ctrl Timeout in
parameter 5-63 Terminal 29 Pulse Output Variable.
And a time-out is detected.
This parameter only applies for FC 302.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 99

3.8 Parameters: 6-** Analog In/Out 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function
Option: Function:
3.8.1 6-0* Analog I/O Mode
[21] Coast and
trip
The analog inputs can freely be allocated to be either
voltage (FC 301: 0..10 V, FC 302: 0.. 10 V) or current (FC
3 3 301/FC 302: 0/4..20 mA) input. 3.8.2 6-1* Analog Input 1
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for

NOTICE analog input 1 (terminal 53).
Thermistors may be connected to either an analog or a
digital input. Ref./Feedback
130BT103.10
[RPM]
Par 6-xx
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 'High Ref./ 1500
Feedb. Value'
Range: Function: 1200
10 s* [1 - Enter the Live Zero Time-out time period. Live
900
99 s] Zero Time-out Time is active for analog inputs,
i.e. terminal 53 or terminal 54, used as reference 600
or feedback sources. If the reference signal value Par 6-xx 300

associated with the selected current input falls 'Low Ref./ 150
Feedb. Value'
below 50% of the value set in 6-10 Terminal 53 Ex. 1V 5V 10 V
Low Voltage, 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current, Par 6-xx Par 6-xx Analog input
'Low Voltage'or 'High Voltage'or
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or 6-22 Terminal 54 'Low Current' 'High Current'
Low Current for a time period longer than the
Illustration 3.41 Analog Input 1
time set in parameter 6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time,
the function selected in 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function is activated.
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function Range: Function:
Option: Function: 0.07 V* [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This analog
par. 6-11 V] input scaling value should correspond to
Select the time-out function. The function set
the minimum reference value, set in
in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function is
parameter 6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb.
activated, if the input signal on terminal 53 or
Value. See also the section Reference
54 is below 50% of the value in
Handling.
parameter 6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage,
parameter 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current,
parameter 6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage or
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage
parameter 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current for a Range: Function:
time period defined in parameter 6-00 Live Zero 10 V* [ par. 6-10 - Enter the high voltage value. This analog
Timeout Time. If several time-outs occur 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to
simultaneously, the frequency converter the high reference/feedback value set in
prioritises the time-out functions as follows: 6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
1. Parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function 6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current
Range: Function:
2. Parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
Function 0.14 [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference
mA* par. 6-13 signal should correspond to the minimum
[0] * Off
mA] reference value, set in
[1] Freeze Frozen at the present value parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value
output must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
[2] Stop Overruled to stop Live Zero Time-out Function in
[3] Jogging Overruled to jog speed parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
[4] Max. speed Overruled to max. speed
[5] Stop and Overruled to stop with subsequent trip

trip
[20] Coast
100 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage

20 mA* [ par. 6-12 - Enter the high current value 10 V* [ par. 6-20 - Enter the high voltage value. This analog
20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/ 10 V] input scaling value should correspond to
feedback set in 6-15 Terminal 53 High the high reference/feedback value set in
Ref./Feedb. Value. 6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value.
3 3
6-14 Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current
0* [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling value 0.14 [0 - Enter the low current value. This reference
999999.999 ] that corresponds to the low mA* par. 6-23 signal should correspond to the minimum
voltage/low current set in mA] reference value, set in
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage and parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. The value
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current. must be set at >2 mA in order to activate the
Live Zero Time-out Function in
6-15 Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function.
Range: Function:
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current
Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the Range: Function:
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback 20 mA* [ par. 6-22 - Enter the high current value
backUnit] value set in 20 mA] corresponding to the high reference/
parameter 6-11 Terminal 53 High feedback value set in 6-25 Terminal 54
Voltage and High Ref./Feedb. Value.
parameter 6-13 Terminal 53 High
Current. 6-24 Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
Range: Function:
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input
Range: Function: backUnit* 999999.999 scaling value that
0.001 s* [0.001 - NOTICE ReferenceFeed- corresponds to the
10 s] backUnit] minimum reference
feedback value set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Reference.
Enter the time constant. This is a first-
order digital low pass filter time constant
6-25 Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal
Range: Function:
53. A high time constant value improves
dampening but also increases the time Size [-999999.999 - Enter the analog input scaling
delay through the filter. related* 999999.999 value that corresponds to the
ReferenceFeed- maximum reference feedback
backUnit] value set in
3.8.3 6-2* Analog Input 2 parameter 3-03 Maximum
Reference.
analog input 2 (terminal 54).
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage

Range: Function:
0.07 V* [ -10.00 - Enter the low voltage value. This analog
par. 6-21 V] input scaling value should correspond to
the minimum reference value, set in
parameter 3-02 Minimum Reference. See
also chapter 3.5 Parameters: 3-** Reference/
Ramps.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 101

6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant
0.001 s* [0.001 - NOTICE A first-order digital low pass filter time
10 s] constant for suppressing electrical noise
on terminal X30/11.
3 3
Enter the time constant. This is a first- 3.8.5 6-4* Analog Input 4 MCB 101
order digital low pass filter time constant
for suppressing electrical noise in terminal Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for
54. A high time constant value improves analog input 4 (X30/12) placed on option module MCB
dampening but also increases the time 101.
delay through the filter.
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage
Range: Function:
3.8.4 6-3* Analog Input 3 MCB 101 0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to
6-41 V] correspond to the low reference/feedback
Parameter group for configuring the scale and limits for value set in parameter 6-44 Term. X30/12
analog input 3 (X30/11) placed on option module MCB Low Ref./Feedb. Value.
101.
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage

0.07 V* [ 0 - par. Sets the analog input scaling value to 10 V* [ par. 6-40 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
6-31 V] correspond to the low reference/feedback 10 V] correspond to the high reference/feedback
value (set in parameter 6-34 Term. X30/11 value set in parameter 6-45 Term. X30/12
Low Ref./Feedb. Value). High Ref./Feedb. Value.
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 6-44 Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. Value

10 V* [ par. 6-30 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog output scaling value to
10 V] correspond to the high reference/feedback 999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value set
value (set in parameter 6-35 Term. X30/11 in parameter 6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low
High Ref./Feedb. Value). Voltage.
6-34 Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. Value 6-45 Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb. Value

0* [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 100 * [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to
999999.999 ] correspond to the low voltage value 999999.999 ] correspond to the high voltage value
(set in parameter 6-30 Terminal X30/11 set in parameter 6-41 Terminal X30/12
Low Voltage). High Voltage.
6-35 Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb. Value 6-46 Term. X30/12 Filter Time Constant

100 * [-999999.999 - Sets the analog input scaling value to 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 s] NOTICE
999999.999 ] correspond to the high voltage value This parameter cannot be adjusted
(set in parameter 6-31 Terminal X30/11 while the motor is running.
High Voltage).
A first-order digital low pass filter time

6-36 Term. X30/11 Filter Time Constant constant for suppressing electrical noise
Range: Function: on terminal X30/12.
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 s] NOTICE
102 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.8.6 6-5* Analog Output 1 6-53 Terminal 42 Output Bus Control

Range: Function:
Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for 0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output 42 if controlled by
analog output 1, i.e. Terminal 42. Analog outputs are bus.
current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Common terminal (terminal
39) is the same terminal and has the same electrical
potential for analog common and digital common
6-54 Terminal 42 Output Timeout Preset
Range: Function:
3 3
connection. Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the preset level of Output 42.
5-17 Terminal X30/3 Digital Input In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
Option: Function: function is selected in 6-50 Terminal 42
[0] * No operation This parameter is active when option module Output, the output is preset to this level.
converter. Functions are described under 6-55 Analog Output Filter
5-1* Digital Inputs Option: Function:
The following readout analog parameters from
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale
selection in 6-50 Terminal 42 Output have a filter
Range: Function: selected when parameter 6-55 Analog Output Filter is
0 %* [0 - 200 Scale for the minimum output (0 or 4 mA) of on:
%] the analog signal at terminal 42.
Set the value to be the percentage of the full Selection 0-20 mA 4-20 mA
range of the variable selected in 6-50 Terminal Motor current (0 - Imax) [103] [133]
42 Output. Torque limit (0 - Tlim) [104] [134]
Rated torque (0 - Tnom) [105] [135]
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale Power (0 - Pnom) [106] [136]
Range: Function: Speed (0 - Speedmax) [107] [137]
100 [0 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
Table 3.22 Readout Analog Parameters
%* 200 %] analog signal at terminal 42. Set the value to the
maximum value of the current signal output.
[0] * Off Filter off
Scale the output to give a current lower than 20
mA at full scale; or 20 mA at an output below [1] On Filter on
100% of the maximum signal value. If 20 mA is
the desired output current at a value between 0
- 100% of the full-scale output, programme the 3.8.7 6-6* Analog Output 2 MCB 101
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20
mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA is desired Analog outputs are current outputs: 0/4 - 20 mA. Common
at maximum output (100%), calculate the terminal (terminal X30/8) is the same terminal and
percentage value as follows: electrical potential for analog common connection.
Resolution on analog output is 12 bit.
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%
20
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 200%
10
Option: Function:
Current
130BA075.12
(mA)
Select the function of Terminal X30/8 as an
analog current output. Depending on the
20
selection the output is either a 0-20 mA or
4-20 mA output. The current value can be
read out in LCP in parameter 16-65 Analog
0/4
Output 42 [mA].
0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable
output Output for [0] No When no signal on the analog output.
Min Scale Max Scale output
par. 6-93 par. 6-94 example: operation
Speed
(RPM) [52] MCO
0-20mA
Illustration 3.42 Output Max Scale
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA.
frequency
[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max]
0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 103

6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output 6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output

Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max] In case the norm motor current is equal to
-100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100% = 20 20 mA, the output setting of
mA parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
3 3 [102] Feedback IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100

IMotor Norm
=
22
= 175%
[103] Motor Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
[134] Torq.% lim The torque setting is related to setting in
Current Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
4-20 mA parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
current) is equal to 20 mA.
[135] Torq.% nom The torque setting is related to the motor
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24
4-20mA torque setting.
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22
A Read-out 11.46 mA. [136] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power [kW]
20 mA x 22 A 4-20mA
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A [137] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
In case the norm motor current is equal to 4-20mA Reference. 20 mA = Value in
20 mA, the output setting of parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference.
parameter 6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale is:
[138] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque.
IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175% 4-20mA
IMotor Norm 22
[104] Torque rel The torque setting is related to setting in [139] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
to limit parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode. 0-20 mA data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency
[105] Torq relate The torque is related to the motor torque converter.
to rated setting.
[140] Bus ctrl. An output value set from fieldbus process
[106] Power Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power 4-20 mA data. The output works independently of
[kW]. internal functions in the frequency
[107] Speed Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum converter.
Reference. 20 mA = value in [141] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference 0-20mA t.o. defines the behaviour of the analog output
[108] Torque Torque reference related to 160% torque. in case of bus time-out.
[109] Max Out In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output [142] Bus ctrl Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
Freq Frequency. 4-20mA t.o. defines the behaviour of the analog output
in case of bus time-out.
[113] PID
Clamped [149] Torque % Torque% Lim 4-20 mA: Torque reference.
Output lim 4-20mA parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]
[119] Torque % 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
lim Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max - Max]
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA -100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
4-20mA mA
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max] [150] Max Out Fr In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
4-20mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA 4-20mA Frequency.
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20 6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale
mA
Range: Function:
[132] Feedback 0 %* [0 - Scales the minimum output of the selected
4-20mA 200 %] analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the
[133] Motor cur. Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv. minimum value as a percentage of the maximum
4-20mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160% signal value, i.e. 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25%
current) is equal to 20 mA. of the maximum output value and 25% is
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) = 24 programmed. The value can never be higher than
A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current = 22 the corresponding setting in 6-62 Terminal X30/8
A Read-out 11.46 mA. Max. Scale if value is below 100%.
This parameter is active when option module
16 mA x 22 A
= 9.17 mA
38.4 A MCB 101 is mounted in the frequency converter.
104 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output

100 [0 - Scales the maximum output of the selected [103] Motor current Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
%* 200 analog signal on terminal X30/8. Scale the value 0-20 mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
%] to the desired maximum value of the current current) is equal to 20 mA.
signal output. Scale the output to give a lower
current than 20 mA at full scale or 20 mA at an
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) =
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current
3 3
output below 100% of the maximum signal value. = 22 A Read-out 11.46 mA.
If 20 mA is the desired output current at a value 20 mA x 22 A
= 11.46 mA
38.4 A
between 0 - 100% of the ful-scale output,
In case the norm motor current is equal to
program the percentage value in the parameter,
20 mA, the output setting of
i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20
parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
mA is desired at maximum output (100%),
Scale is:
calculate the percentage value as follows: IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22
20 mA / desired maximum current x 100%
20 4 [104] Torque rel to The torque setting is related to setting in
i . e . 10 mA : x 100 = 160%
10
lim 0-20 mA parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode
[105] Torque rel to The torque is related to the motor torque
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
rated motor setting.
Range: Function:
torque 0-20
0 %* [0 - 100 %] Holds the level of Output X30/8 if controlled mA
by bus.
[106] Power 0-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power
mA [kW].
6-64 Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout Preset
[107] Speed 0-20 Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
Range: Function: mA Reference. 20 mA = value in
0 %* [0 - 100 Holds the preset level of Output X30/8. parameter 3-03 Maximum Reference
%] In case of a bus timeout and a timeout [108] Torque ref. Torque reference related to 160% torque.
function is selected in parameter 6-60 Terminal 0-20 mA
X30/8 Output, the output is preset to this level. [109] Max Out Freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
0-20 mA Frequency.
[130] Output freq. 0 Hz = 4 mA, 100 Hz = 20 mA
3.8.8 6-7* Analog Output 3 MCB 113
4-20 mA
[131] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min-Max]
4-20 mA 0% = 4 mA; 100% = 20 mA
analog output 3, Terminal X45/1 and X45/2. Analog
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max-Max]
outputs are current outputs: 0/420 mA. Resolution on
-100% = 4 mA; 0% = 12 mA; +100% = 20
analog output is 11 bit.
mA
6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output [132] Feedback 4-20
Option: Function: mA
Select the function of Terminal X45/1 as an [133] Motor cur. Value is taken from parameter 16-37 Inv.
analog current output. 4-20 mA Max. Current. Inverter max. current (160%
[0] No operation When no signal on the analog output. current) is equal to 20 mA.
Example: Inverter norm current (11 kW) =
[52] MCO 305 0-20
24 A. 160% = 38.4 A. Motor norm current
mA
= 22 A Read-out 11.46 mA.
[53] MCO 305 4-20
16 mA x 22 A
= 9.17 mA
mA 38.4 A
[100] Output 0 Hz = 0 mA; 100 Hz = 20 mA. In case the norm motor current is equal to
frequency 20 mA, the output setting of
0-20 mA parameter 6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max
[101] Reference Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [Min - Max] Scale is:
0-20 mA 0% = 0 mA; 100% = 20 mA IVLT Max x 100 38.4 x 100
= = 175%
IMotor Norm 22
Parameter 3-00 Reference Range [-Max -
[134] Torque% lim. The torque setting is related to setting in
Max] -100% = 0 mA; 0% = 10 mA; +100%
4-20 mA parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode.
= 20 mA
[135] Torque% nom The torque setting is related to the motor
[102] Feedback
4-20 mA torque setting.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 105

6-70 Terminal X45/1 Output Current
130BA877.10
[mA]
Option: Function:
[136] Power 4-20 Taken from parameter 1-20 Motor Power 20
mA [kW]
[137] Speed 4-20 Taken from parameter 3-03 Maximum
3 3 mA Reference. 20 mA = Value in
[138] Torque 4-20 Torque reference related to 160% torque.
0/4
mA
[139] Bus ctrl. 0-20 An output value set from fieldbus process 0% Analogue Analogue 100% Variable for
output Min Output Max output
mA data. The output works independently of Scale Scale example:Speed
internal functions in the frequency par. 6-71 par. 6-72 [RPM]
converter. Illustration 3.43 Output Max Scale

[140] Bus ctrl. 4-20 An output value set from fieldbus process
mA data. The output works independently of
internal functions in the frequency 6-73 Terminal X45/1 Output Bus Control
converter.
Range: Function:
[141] Bus ctrl. 0-20 Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low
0.00%* [0.00 - 100.00%] Holds the level of Analog Output 3
mA, timeout defines the behaviour of the analog output
(terminal X45/1) if controlled by bus.
[142] Bus ctrl. 4-20 Parameter 4-54 Warning Reference Low 6-74 Terminal X45/1 Output Timeout Preset
mA, timeout defines the behaviour of the analog output Range: Function:
0.00%* [0.00 - Holds the preset level of Analog Output
[150] Max Out Freq In relation to parameter 4-19 Max Output
100.00%] 3 (terminal X45/1).
4-20 mA Frequency.
In case of a bus timeout and a timeout
6-71 Terminal X45/1 Output Min Scale function is selected in 6-70 Terminal
X45/1 Output the output is preset to this
Range: Function:
level.
0.00%* [0.00 - Scale the minimum output of the selected
200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1, as a
percentage of the maximum signal value.
3.8.9 6-8* Analog Output 4 MCB 113
E.g. if 0 mA (or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of
the maximum output value, then Parameters for configuring the scaling and limits for
programme 25%. Scaling values up to analog output 4. Terminal X45/3 and X45/4. Analog
100% can never be higher than the outputs are current outputs: 0/4 to 20 mA. Resolution on
corresponding setting in 6-72 Terminal analog output is 11 bit.
X45/1 Max. Scale. 6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output
6-72 Terminal X45/1 Output Max Scale Option: Function:
Range: Function: Select the function of Terminal X45/3 as an
analog current output.
100%* [0.00 - Scale the maximum output of the selected
[0] * No operation Same selections available as for 6-70 Terminal
200.00%] analog signal at terminal X45/1. Set the value
X45/1 Output
to the maximum value of the current signal
output. Scale the output to give a current
lower than 20 mA at full scale; or 20 mA at
an output below 100% of the maximum
signal value. If 20 mA is the desired output
current at a value between 0 - 100% of the
full-scale output, programme the percentage
value in the parameter, i.e. 50% = 20 mA. If a
current between 4 and 20 mA is desired at
maximum output (100%), calculate the
percentage value as follows (example where
desired max. output is 10 mA):
IRANGE mA
x 100%
IDESIRED MAX mA
20 4 mA
= x 100% = 160%
10 mA
106 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

6-81 Terminal X45/3 Output Min Scale

Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - Scales the minimum output of the
200.00% selected analog signal on terminal X45/3.
Scale the minimum value as a percentage
of the maximum signal value, i.e. 0 mA
(or 0 Hz) is desired at 25% of the
3 3
maximum output value and 25% is
programmed. The value can never be
higher than the corresponding setting in
6-82 Terminal X45/3 Max. Scale if value is
below 100%.
This parameter is active when option
module MCB 113 is mounted in the
6-82 Terminal X45/3 Output Max Scale

Option: Function:
[0.00%] 0.00 - Scales the maximum output of the selected
* 200.00% analog signal on terminal X45/3. Scale the
value to the desired maximum value of the
current signal output. Scale the output to
give a lower current than 20 mA at full scale
or 20 mA at an output below 100% of the
maximum signal value. If 20 mA is the
desired output current at a value between 0
- 100% of the ful-scale output, program the
percentage value in the parameter, i.e. 50%
= 20 mA. If a current between 4 and 20 mA
is desired at maximum output (100%),
calculate the percentage value as follows
(example where desired max. output is 10
mA):
IRANGE mA
x 100%
IDESIRED MAX mA
20 4 mA
= x 100% = 160%
10 mA
6-83 Terminal X45/3 Output Bus Control

Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - 100.00% Holds the level of output 4 (X45/3) if
controlled by bus.
6-84 Terminal X45/3 Output Timeout Preset

Option: Function:
[0.00%] * 0.00 - Holds the present level of output 4
100.00% (X45/3). In case of a bus timeout and a
timeout function is selected in
6-80 Terminal X45/3 Output the output
is preset to this level.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 107

3.9 Parameters: 7-** Controllers 7-03 Speed PID Integral Time

Range: Function:
3.9.1 7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
Size [1.0 - Enter the speed controller integral time,
related* 20000 which determines the time the internal PID
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source ms] control takes to correct errors. The greater
NOTICE
the error, the more quickly the gain
increases. The integral time causes a delay
of the signal and therefore a dampening
This parameter cannot be
effect, and can be used to eliminate steady
state speed error. Obtain quick control
running.
through a short integral time, though if the
integral time is too short, the process
Select the encoder for closed loop becomes unstable. An excessively long
feedback. integral time disables the integral action,
The feedback may come from a leading to major deviations from the
different encoder (typically mounted required reference, since the process
on the application itself) than the regulator takes too long to regulate errors.
motor mounted encoder feedback This parameter is used with [0] Speed open
selected in parameter 1-02 Flux Motor loop and [1] Speed closed loop control, set in
Feedback Source. parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
[0] Motor feedb. P1-02
[1] 24V encoder 7-04 Speed PID Differentiation Time
[2] MCB 102 Range: Function:
[3] MCB 103 Size [0 - Enter the speed controller differentiation
[4] MCO Encoder 1 X56 related* 200 time. The differentiator does not react to
[5] MCO Encoder 2 X55 ms] constant error. It provides gain proportional
[6] Analog Input 53 to the rate of change of the speed
[7] Analog Input 54 feedback. The quicker the error changes,
[8] Frequency input 29 the stronger the gain from the differen-
[9] Frequency input 33 tiator. The gain is proportional with the
speed at which errors change. Setting this
[11] MCB 15X
parameter to zero disables the differen-
NOTICE tiator. This parameter is used with
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [1] Speed
If separate encoders are used (FC 302 only) the ramp
closed loop control.
settings parameters in the following parameter groups:
3-4*, 3-5*, 3-6*, 3-7* and 3-8* must be adjusted
according to the gear ratio between the 2 encoders. 7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit
Range: Function:
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain 5* [1 - Set a limit for the gain provided by the differen-
20 ] tiator. Since the differential gain increases at higher
Range: Function:
frequencies, limiting the gain may be useful. For
Size [0 - Enter the speed controller proportional gain.
example, set up a pure D-link at low frequencies
related* 1] The proportional gain amplifies the error (i.e.
and a constant D-link at higher frequencies. This
the deviation between the feedback signal and
parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration
the set-point). This parameter is used with
Mode [1] Speed closed loop control.
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode [0] Speed
open loop and [1] Speed closed loop control.
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
Range: Function:
However if the amplification is too great, the
process may become unstable. Size [0.1 Set a time constant for the speed control low-
Use this parameter for values with 3 decimals. related* - 100 pass filter. The low-pass filter improves steady-
For a selection with 4 decimals, use ms] state performance and dampens oscillations
parameter 3-83 Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at on the feedback signal. This is an advantage if
Decel. Start. there is a great amount on noise in the
system, see Illustration 3.44. For example, if a
time constant () of 100 ms is programmed,
the cut-off frequency for the low-pass filter is
108 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time Feedback
175ZA293.11
Range: Function:
1/0.1= 10 RAD/s., corresponding to (10/2 x ) Disturbed feedback signal
= 1.6 Hz. The PID regulator only regulates a

feedback signal that varies by a frequency of
less than 1.6 Hz. If the feedback signal varies
by a higher frequency than 1.6 Hz, the PID
3 3
regulator does not react.
Practical settings of parameter 7-06 Speed PID
Lowpass Filter Time taken from the number of
pulses per revolutions from encoder:
Encoder PPR Parameter 7-06 Speed PID

Lowpass Filter Time
512 10 ms
1024 5 ms
2048 2 ms 0.6 t (Sec.)
4096 1 ms
Lowpass filter
NOTICE
fg = 10 Hz
Severe filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
This parameter is used with parameter 1-00 Configuration Feedback
Mode [1] Speed closed loop and [2] Torque control.
Adjust the filter time in Flux Sensorless to
Filtered feedback signal
3-5 ms.
0.6 t (Sec.)
Illustration 3.44 Feedback Signal
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 109

7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 3.9.2 7-1* Torque PI Control
Range: Function:
1* [ 0.0001 - 32.0000 ] The frequency converter multiplies the
Parameters for configuring the torque PI control in torque
speed feedback by this ratio. open loop (parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode).
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain

3 3
130BA871.10
Range: Function:
100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
torque controller. Selection of a high value
n1 n2 makes the controller react faster. Too high
a setting leads to controller instability.
Motor
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time
Range: Function:
Par 7-07=1.00 Par 7-07=n1/n2 0.020 s* [0.002 - 2 s] Enter the integration time for the torque
controller. Selection of a low value makes
Illustration 3.45 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio the controller react faster. Too low a
setting leads to control instability.
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time

7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
Size related* [15 - 100 %] Enter the value for the rise time of
0 %* [0 - 500 %] The reference signal bypasses the speed
the current controller as a
controller by the amount specified. This
percentage of the control period.
feature increases the dynamic performance
of the speed control loop.
3.9.3 7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb.
7-09 Speed PID Error Correction w/ Ramp
Range: Function: Select the feedback sources for the Process PID Control,
300 RPM* [10 - 100000 The speed error between ramp and and how this feedback should be handled.
RPM] actual speed is held up against the
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource
setting in this parameter. If the speed
Option: Function:
error exceeds this parameter entry, the
speed error is corrected via ramping The effective feedback signal is made
in a controlled way. up of the sum of up to 2 different
input signals.
Motor Select which frequency converter input
130BC026.10
Speed
should be treated as the source of the
first of these signals. The second input
signal is defined in
7-09 parameter 7-22 Process CL Feedback 2
Resource.
Torque Time [0] * No function
Limit
Motor [1] Analog Input 53
Speed
[2] Analog Input 54
[3] Frequency input
29
7-09
[4] Frequency input
33
Torque
Limit Time [7] Analog Input
Ramp Motor Speed X30/11
Illustration 3.46 Speed Error between Ramp and Actual Speed [8] Analog Input
X30/12
[15] Analog Input
X48/2
110 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource 7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain

The effective feedback signal is made 0.01* [0 - 10 ] Enter the PID proportional gain. The propor-
up of the sum of up to 2 different tional gain multiplies the error between the set
input signals. Select which frequency point and the feedback signal.
converter input should be treated as
the source of the second of these 7-34 Process PID Integral Time
3 3
signals. The first input signal is defined Range: Function:
in parameter 7-20 Process CL Feedback 1
10000 s* [0.01 - Enter the PID integral time. The integrator
Resource.
10000 s] provides an increasing gain at a constant
[0] * No function error between the set point and the
[1] Analog Input 53 feedback signal. The integral time is the
[2] Analog Input 54 time needed by the integrator to reach
[3] Frequency input the same gain as the proportional gain.
29
[4] Frequency input 7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time
33 Range: Function:
[7] Analog Input 0 s* [0 - 10 s] Enter the PID differentiation time. The differen-
X30/11 tiator does not react to a constant error, but
[8] Analog Input provides a gain only when the error changes.
X30/12 The shorter the PID differentiation time, the
[15] Analog Input stronger the gain from the differentiator.
X48/2
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit
3.9.4 7-3* Process PID Ctrl. Range: Function:
5* [1 - 50 ] Enter a limit for the differentiator gain (DG). If
7-30 Process PID Normal/ Inverse Control there is no limit, the DG will increase when there
are fast changes. Limit the DG to obtain a pure
Option: Function:
differentiator gain at slow changes and a constant
Normal and inverse control are implemented by
differentiator gain where fast changes occur.
introducing a difference between the reference
signal and the feedback signal.
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor
[0] * Normal Sets process control to increase the output Range: Function:
frequency.
0 %* [0 - Enter the PID feed forward (FF) factor. The FF
[1] Inverse Sets process control to reduce the output 200 %] factor sends a constant fraction of the reference
frequency. signal to bypass the PID control, so the PID
control only affects the remaining fraction of the
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup control signal. Any change to this parameter will
Option: Function: thus affect the motor speed. When the FF factor
is activated it provides less overshoot, and high
[0] Off Continues regulation of an error even when the
dynamics when changing the set point.
output frequency cannot be increased or decreased.
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
[1] * On Ceases regulation of an error when the output active when parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
frequency can no longer be adjusted. is set to [3] Process.
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 7-39 On Reference Bandwidth

0 RPM* [0 - Enter the motor speed to be attained as a 5 %* [0 - 200 Enter the On Reference bandwidth. When the
6000 start signal for commencement of PID %] PID Control Error (the difference between the
RPM] control. When the power is switched on, the reference and the feedback) is less than the
frequency converter commences ramping set value of this parameter the On Reference
and then operates under speed open loop status bit is high, i.e. =1.
control. When the Process PID start speed is
reached, the frequency converter changes to
Process PID control.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 111

3.9.5 7-4* Advanced Process PID Ctrl. 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Option: Function:
This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config- [2] Analog Input 54
uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
[7] Frequency input
Extended PID Speed OL.
29
3 3 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset

Option: Function:
[8] Frequency input
33
[11] Local bus
[0] * No
reference
[1] Yes Select [1] Yes to reset the I-part of the process PID
controller. The selection automatically reverts to [0]
No. Resetting the I-part makes it possible to start from [21] Analog input
a well-defined point after changing something in the X30-11
process, e.g. changing a textile roll. [22] Analog input
X30-12
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp [29] Analog Input
X48/2
Range: Function:
[32] Bus PCD Selects a bus reference configured by
-100 %* [ -100 - par. 7-42 %] Enter a negative limit for the
parameter 8-02 Control Word Source.
process PID controller output.
Change parameter 8-42 PCD Write
Configuration for the bus used to make
7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp
the feed-forward available in
Range: Function: parameter 7-48 PCD Feed Forward. Use
100 %* [ par. 7-41 - 100 %] Enter a positive limit for the index 1 for feed-forward [748] (and
process PID controller output. index 2 for reference [1682]).
[36] MCO
7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
Range: Function: 7-46 Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the Option: Function:
100 %] process PID output when operating at the [0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to set the feed forward factor to
minimum reference. The scaling percentage is treat the FF resource as a positive value.
adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref.
[1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to treat the FF resource as a
(parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min.
negative value.
Ref.) and the scale at max. ref.
(parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max.
7-48 PCD Feed Forward
Ref.).
Range: Function:
7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. Ref. 0* [0 - 65535 ] Read-out parameter where the bus
Range: Function: parameter 7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
[32]) can be read.
100 %* [0 - Enter a scaling percentage to apply to the
100 %] process PID output when operating at the
7-49 Process PID Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
maximum reference. The scaling percentage is
adjusted linearly between the scale at min. ref. Option: Function:
(parameter 7-43 Process PID Gain Scale at Min. [0] * Normal Select [0] Normal to use the resulting output from
Ref.) and the scale at max. ref. the process PID controller as is.
(parameter 7-44 Process PID Gain Scale at Max. [1] Inverse Select [1] Inverse to invert the resulting output
Ref.). from the process PID controller. This operation is
performed after the feed forward factor is applied.
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource
Option: Function:
[0] * No function Select which frequency converter input
3.9.6 7-5* Ext. Process PID Ctrl.
should be used as the feed forward
factor. The FF factor is added directly to This parameter group is only used if parameter 1-00 Config-
the output of the PID controller. This uration Mode is set to [7] Extended PID speed CL or [8]
increases dynamic performance. Extended PID Speed OL.
[1] Analog Input 53
112 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

7-50 Process PID Extended PID

Option: Function:
[0] Disabled Disables the extended parts of the process PID
controller.
[1] * Enabled Enables the extended parts of the PID controller.
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain

3 3
Range: Function:
1* [0 - The feed forward is used to obtain the desired level,
100 ] based on a well-known signal available. The PID
controller then only takes care of the smaler part of
the control, necessary because of unknown
characters. The standard feed fwd factor in
parameter 7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor is
always related to the reference whereas
parameter 7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain has more
choices. In winder applications, the feed fwd factor is
typically the line speed of the system.
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up

Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping up.
7-53 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp down

Range: Function:
0.01 s* [0.01 - 10 s] Controls the dynamics of the feed forward
signal when ramping down.
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the reference
s] first-order low-pass filter. The low-pass
filter improves steady-state performance
and dampens oscillations on the
reference/feedback signals. However,
severe filtering can be detrimental to
dynamic performance.
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time

Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 1 Set a time constant for the feedback first-
s] order low-pass filter. The low-pass filter
improves steady-state performance and
dampens oscillations on the reference/
feedback signals. However, severe
filtering can be detrimental to dynamic
performance.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 113

3.10 Parameters: 8-** Communications and 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
Options Range: Function:
[1.0 0.1-18000.0 s Enter the maximum time expected to pass
3.10.1 8-0* General Settings s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
3 3 8-01 Control Site

Option: Function:
indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in
The setting in this parameter overrides the parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
settings in parameter 8-50 Coasting Select to Function is then carried out. A valid control
parameter 8-56 Preset Reference Select. word triggers the time-out counter.
20 s* [ 0.1 - Enter the maximum time expected to pass
[0] Digital and Control by using both digital input and
18000.0 s] between the reception of 2 consecutive
ctrl.word control word.
telegrams. If this time is exceeded, it
[1] Digital only Control by using digital inputs only. indicates that the serial communication has
stopped. The function selected in
[2] Controlword Control by using control word only.
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout
only
Functionis then carried out. A valid control
8-02 Control Word Source word triggers the time-out counter.
Option: Function: 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function
NOTICE Select the time-out function. The time-out function activates
This parameter cannot be adjusted when the control word fails to be updated within the time
while the motor is running. period specified in 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time.
Option: Function:
Select the source of the control word: one of [0] Off Resumes control via serial bus (fieldbus or
2 serial interfaces or 4 installed options. standard) using the most recent control
During initial power-up, the frequency word.
converter automatically sets this parameter to
[1] Freeze output Freezes output frequency until communi-
[3] Option A, if it detects a valid fieldbus
cation resumes.
option installed in slot A. If the option is
removed, the frequency converter detects a [2] Stop Stops with auto restart when communi-
change in the configuration, sets cation resumes.
parameter 8-02 Control Word Source back to
[3] Jogging Runs the motor at JOG frequency until
default setting RS-485, and the frequency
communication resumes.
converter trips. If an option is installed after
initial power-up, the setting of [4] Max. speed Runs the motor at maximum frequency until
parameter 8-02 Control Word Source does not communication resumes.
change, but the frequency converter trips and [5] Stop and trip Stops the motor, then resets the frequency
displays: Alarm 67 Option Changed. converter to restart: via the fieldbus, via
When retrofitting a bus option into a [Reset], or via a digital input.
frequency converter that did not have a bus
[7] Select setup 1 Changes the set-up upon reestablishment of
option installed to begin with, take an ACTIVE
communication following a control word
decision to move the control to Bus based.
time-out. If communication resumes after a
This is done for safety reasons to avoid an
time-out, parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout
accidental change.
Function defines whether to resume the set-
[0] None up used before the time-out, or to retain the
[1] FC RS485 set-up endorsed by the time-out function.
[2] FC USB
[8] Select setup 2 See [7] Select setup 1
[3] Option A
[4] Option B [9] Select setup 3 See [7] Select setup 1
[5] Option C0 [10] Select setup 4 See [7] Select setup 1

[6] Option C1
[26] Trip
[30] External Can
114 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE 8-08 Readout Filtering

To change the set-up after a time-out, the following If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
configuration is required: this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
Set parameter 0-10 Active Set-up to [9] Multi set-up and power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.
select the relevant link in parameter 0-12 This Set-up Option: Function:
Linked to. 16-14 Motor current
Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm]
3 3
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function Parameter 16-17 Speed [RPM]
Option: Function: Parameter 16-22 Torque [%]
Parameter 16-25 Torque [Nm] High
Select the action after receiving a valid control
word following a time-out. This parameter is
active only when 8-04 Control Timeout Function 3.10.2 8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
is set to [7] Set-up 1, [8] Set-up 2, [9]Set-up 3 or
[10] Set-up 4.
8-10 Control Word Profile
[0] Hold set- Retains the set-up selected in 8-04 Control Select the interpretation of the control and status words
up Timeout Function and displays a warning, until corresponding to the installed fieldbus. Only the selections valid
8-06 Reset Control Timeout toggles. Then the for the fieldbus installed in slot A are visible in the LCP display.
frequency converter resumes its original set-up. For guidelines in selection of [0] FC profile and [1] PROFIdrive
[1] Resume Resumes the set-up active before the time-out. profile, refer to the Serial communication via RS-485 Interface
set-up section in the Design Guide.
For additional guidelines in the selection of [1] PROFIdrive profile,
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout refer to the Operating Instructions for the installed fieldbus.
This parameter is active only when [0] Hold set-up has been Option: Function:
selected in parameter 8-05 End-of-Timeout Function.
[0] * FC profile
Option: Function: [1] PROFIdrive profile
[0] * Do not reset Retains the set-up specified in [5] ODVA
parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function, [7] CANopen DSP 402
following a control word time-out. [8] MCO
[1] Do reset Returns the frequency converter to the
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW
original set-up following a control word time-
out. The frequency converter performs the The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are config-
reset and then immediately reverts to the [0] urable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the
Do not reset setting following options.
Option: Function:
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] No function The input is always low.
This parameter has no function for DeviceNet. [1] Profile Default Depended on the profile
Option: Function: set in 8-10 Control Profile.
[0] * Disable [2] Alarm 68 Only The input goes high
[1] Trigger on alarms whenever Alarm 68 is
[2] Trigger alarm/warn. This parameter has no function for active and goes low
DeviceNet. whenever no alarm 68 is
actived
8-08 Readout Filtering
[3] Trip excl Alarm 68
If the speed feedback value readouts on fieldbus are fluctuating,
[10] T18 DI status
this function is used. Select filtered, if the function is required. A
[11] T19 DI status
power-cycle is required for changes to take effect.
[12] T27 DI status
Option: Function: [13] T29 DI status
[0] Motor Data Select [0] for normal bus readouts. [14] T32 DI status
Std-Filt. [15] T33 DI status
[1] Motor Data Select [1] for filtered bus readouts of [16] T37 DI status The input goes high
LP-Filter the following parameters: whenever T37 has 0 V and
16-10 Power [kW] goes low whenever T37
16-11 Power [hp] has 24 V
16-12 Motor Voltage
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 115

8-13 Configurable Status Word STW 8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
The status word has 16 bits (0-15). Bits 5 and 12-15 are config- Option: Function:
urable. Each of these bits can be configured to any of the Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration
following options. Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
Option: Function: PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
3 3 [21]
[30]
Thermal warning
Brake fault (IGBT)
[6] PID enable When enabled, enables the extended process
PID controller. Equivalent to
[40] Out of ref range parameter 7-50 Process PID Extended PID.
[41] Load throttle active Available only if parameter 1-00 Configuration
[60] Comparator 0 Mode is set to [6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended
[61] Comparator 1 PID Speed OL or [8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[62] Comparator 2
[63] Comparator 3 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
[64] Comparator 4 The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).
[65] Comparator 5 Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
[70] Logic Rule 0 options.
[71] Logic Rule 1 Option: Function:
[72] Logic Rule 2 [0] * Off
[73] Logic Rule 3 [1] 10 Volts low warning
[74] Logic Rule 4 [2] Live zero warning
[75] Logic Rule 5 [3] No motor warning
[80] SL digital out A [4] Mains phase loss warning
[81] SL digital out B [5] DC link voltage high warning
[82] SL digital out C [6] DC link voltage low warning
[83] SL digital out D [7] DC overvoltage warning
[84] SL digital out E [8] DC undervoltage warning
[85] SL digital out F [9] Inverter overloaded warning
[86] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [10] Motor ETR overtemp warning
[87] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [11] Motor thermistor overtemp warning
[88] ATEX ETR cur. warning [12] Torque limit warning
[89] ATEX ETR freq. warning [13] Over current warning
[90] Safe Function active [14] Earth fault warning
[91] Safe Opt. Reset req. [17] Controlword timeout warning
[19] Discharge temp high warning
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW
[22] Hoist mech brake warning
Option: Function: [23] Internal fans warning
Selection of control word bit 10, if it is active [24] External fans warning
low or active high. [25] Brake resistor short circuit warning
[0] None [26] Brake powerlimit warning
[1] * Profile [27] Brake chopper short circuit warning
default [28] Brake check warning
[2] CTW Valid, [29] Heatsink temperature warning
active low [30] Motor phase U warning
[3] Safe [31] Motor phase V warning
Option [32] Motor phase W warning
Reset [34] Fieldbus communication warning
[4] PID error When enabled, it inverts the resulting error [36] Mains failure warning
inverse from the process PID controller. Available only [40] T27 overload warning
if parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is set to [41] T29 overload warning
[6] Surface Winder, [7] Extended PID Speed OL or
[45] Earth fault 2 warning
[8] Extended PID Speed CL.
[47] 24V supply low warning
[5] PID reset I When enabled, resets the I-part of the Process [58] AMA internal fault warning
part PID controller. Equivalent to [59] Current limit warning
parameter 7-40 Process PID I-part Reset. [60] External interlock warning
116 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword 8-17 Configurable Alarm and Warningword
The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15). The Configurable Alarm and Warning Word has 16 bits (0-15).
Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following Each of those bits can be configured to any of the following
options. options.
[61]
[62]
Feedback error warning
Frequency max warning
[10068]
[10069]
Safe stop alarm
Powercard temp alarm
3 3
[64] Voltage limit warning [10073] Safestop auto restart alarm
[65] Controlboard overtemp warning [10074] PTC thermistor alarm
[66] Heatsink temp low warning [10075] Illegal profile alarm
[68] Safe stop warning [10078] Tracking error alarm
[73] Safe stop autorestart warning [10079] Illegal PS config alarm
[76] Power unit setup warning [10081] CSIV corrupt alarm
[77] Reduced powermode warning [10082] CSIV param error alarm
[78] Tracking error warning [10084] No safety option alarm
[89] Mech brake sliding warning [10090] Feedback monitor alarm
[163] ATEX ETR cur limit warning [10091] AI54 settings alarm
[165] ATEX ETR freq limit warning [10164] ATEX ETR current lim alarm
[10002] Live zero error alarm [10166] ATEX ETR freq limit alarm
[10004] Mains phase loss alarm
8-19 Product Code
[10007] DC overvoltage alarm
[10008] DC undervoltage alarm Range: Function:
[10009] Inverter overload alarm Size [0 - Select [0] to readout the actual
[10010] ETR overtemperature alarm related* 2147483647 ] fieldbus product code according
[10011] Thermistor overtemp alarm to the mounted fieldbus option.
Select [1] to readout the actual
[10012] Torque limit alarm
Vendor ID.
[10013] Overcurrent alarm
[10014] Earth fault alarm
[10016] Short circuit alarm 3.10.3 8-3* FC Port Settings
[10017] CTW timeout alarm
[10022] Hoist brake alarm 8-30 Protocol
[10026] Brake powerlimit alarm
Option: Function:
[10027] Brakechopper shortcircuit alarm
Select the protocol to be used. Changing
[10028] Brake check alarm
protocol is not effective until after powering
[10029] Heatsink temp alarm
off the frequency converter.
[10030] Phase U missing alarm
[0] * FC
[10031] Phase V missing alarm
[1] FC MC
[10032] Phase W missing alarm
[2] Modbus RTU
[10033] Inrush fault alarm
[10034] Fieldbus com faul alarm 8-31 Address
[10036] Mains failure alarm Range: Function:
[10037] Phase imbalance alarm Size related* [ 1 - 255 ] Enter the address for the FC (standard)
[10038] Internal fault port.
[10039] Heatsink sensor alarm Valid range: 1-126.
[10045] Earth fault 2 alarm
[10046] Powercard supply alarm 8-32 FC Port Baud Rate
[10047] 24V supply low alarm Option: Function:
[10048] 1.8V supply low alarm [0] 2400 Baud Baud rate selection for the FC (standard) port.
[10049] Speed limit alarm
[1] 4800 Baud
[10060] Ext interlock alarm
[2] 9600 Baud
[10061] Feedback error alarm
[3] 19200 Baud
[10063] Mech brake low alarm
[4] 38400 Baud
[10065] Controlboard overtemp alarm
[5] 57600 Baud
[10067] Option config changed alarm
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 117

8-32 FC Port Baud Rate 8-40 Telegram Selection

[6] 76800 Baud [100] None
[7] 115200 Baud [101] PPO 1
[102] PPO 2
3 3
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits
[103] PPO 3
Option: Function: [104] PPO 4
[0] * Even Parity, 1 Stop Bit [105] PPO 5
[1] Odd Parity, 1 Stop Bit [106] PPO 6
[2] No Parity, 1 Stop Bit [107] PPO 7
[3] No Parity, 2 Stop Bits [108] PPO 8
[200] Custom telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable
8-34 Estimated cycle time
telegrams or standard telegrams for
Range: Function: the FC port.
0 ms* [0 - In noisy environments, the interface may
[202] Custom telegram 3
1000000 ms] be blocked due to overload or bad frames.
This parameter specifies the time between 8-41 Parameters for Signals
2 consecutive frames on the network. If the
Option: Function:
interface does not detect valid frames in
[0] * None This parameter
that time, it flushes the receive buffer.
contains a list of
signals available for
8-35 Minimum Response Delay
selection in
Range: Function:
parameter 8-42 PCD
10 ms* [ 1 - 10000 Specify the minimum delay time Write Configuration
ms] between receiving a request and and
transmitting a response. This is used for parameter 8-43 PCD
overcoming modem turnaround delays. Read Configuration.
[15] Readout: actual setup

8-36 Max Response Delay
[302] Minimum Reference
Range: Function:
[303] Maximum Reference
Size [ 11 - Specify the maximum permissible
[312] Catch up/slow Down Value
related* 10001 ms] delay time between transmitting a
[341] Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time
request and receiving a response. If a
[342] Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time
response from the frequency converter
[351] Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time
is exceeding the time setting, then it is
discarded. [352] Ramp 2 Ramp Down Time
[380] Jog Ramp Time
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay [381] Quick Stop Ramp Time
[411] Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM]
Range: Function:
[412] Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Size [ 0.00 - Specify the maximum permissible time
[413] Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
related* 35.00 ms] interval between receipt of 2 bytes.
[414] Motor Speed High Limit [Hz]
This parameter activates time-out if
transmission is interrupted. [416] Torque Limit Motor Mode
This parameter is active only when [417] Torque Limit Generator Mode
8-30 Protocol is set to [1] FC MC [553] Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value
protocol. [558] Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[590] Digital & Relay Bus Control
[593] Pulse Out #27 Bus Control
3.10.4 8-4* FC MC Protocol Set [595] Pulse Out #29 Bus Control
[597] Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control
8-40 Telegram Selection [615] Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb. Value
Option: Function: [625] Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb. Value
[1] * Standard telegram 1 Enables use of freely configurable [653] Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl
telegrams or standard telegrams for [663] Terminal X30/8 Bus Control
the FC port. [673] Terminal X45/1 Bus Control
118 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-41 Parameters for Signals

[683] Terminal X45/3 Bus Control [1664] Analog Input 54
[748] PCD Feed Forward [1665] Analog Output 42 [mA]
[890] Bus Jog 1 Speed [1666] Digital Output [bin]
[891] Bus Jog 2 Speed
[1667] Freq. Input #29 [Hz]
[1668] Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
3 3
[1473] Legacy Warning Word [1669] Pulse Output #27 [Hz]
[1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word [1670] Pulse Output #29 [Hz]
[1500] Operating hours [1671] Relay Output [bin]
[1501] Running Hours [1672] Counter A
[1502] kWh Counter [1673] Counter B
[1600] Control Word [1674] Prec. Stop Counter
[1601] Reference [Unit] [1675] Analog In X30/11
[1602] Reference % [1676] Analog In X30/12
[1603] Status Word [1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA]
[1605] Main Actual Value [%] [1678] Analog Out X45/1 [mA]
[1609] Custom Readout [1679] Analog Out X45/3 [mA]
[1610] Power [kW] [1680] Fieldbus CTW 1
[1611] Power [hp] [1682] Fieldbus REF 1
[1612] Motor Voltage [1684] Comm. Option STW
[1613] Frequency [1685] FC Port CTW 1
[1614] Motor current [1686] FC Port REF 1
[1615] Frequency [%] [1687] Bus Readout Alarm/Warning
[1616] Torque [Nm] [1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word
[1617] Speed [RPM] [1690] Alarm Word
[1618] Motor Thermal [1691] Alarm Word 2
[1619] KTY sensor temperature [1692] Warning Word
[1620] Motor Angle [1693] Warning Word 2
[1621] Torque [%] High Res. [1694] Ext. Status Word
[1622] Torque [%] [1836] Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
[1623] Motor Shaft Power [kW] [1837] Temp. Input X48/4
[1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance [1838] Temp. Input X48/7
[1625] Torque [Nm] High [1839] Temp. Input X48/10
[1630] DC Link Voltage [1860] Digital Input 2
[1632] Brake Energy /s [3310] Sync Factor Master
[1633] Brake Energy /2 min [3311] Sync Factor Slave
[1634] Heatsink Temp. [3401] PCD 1 Write to MCO
[1635] Inverter Thermal [3402] PCD 2 Write to MCO
[1638] SL Controller State [3403] PCD 3 Write to MCO
[1639] Control Card Temp. [3404] PCD 4 Write to MCO
[1645] Motor Phase U Current [3405] PCD 5 Write to MCO
[1646] Motor Phase V Current [3406] PCD 6 Write to MCO
[1647] Motor Phase W Current [3407] PCD 7 Write to MCO
[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] [3408] PCD 8 Write to MCO
[1650] External Reference [3409] PCD 9 Write to MCO
[1651] Pulse Reference [3410] PCD 10 Write to MCO
[1652] Feedback[Unit] [3421] PCD 1 Read from MCO
[1653] Digi Pot Reference [3422] PCD 2 Read from MCO
[1657] Feedback [RPM] [3423] PCD 3 Read from MCO
[1660] Digital Input [3424] PCD 4 Read from MCO
[1661] Terminal 53 Switch Setting [3425] PCD 5 Read from MCO
[1662] Analog Input 53 [3426] PCD 6 Read from MCO
[1663] Terminal 54 Switch Setting [3427] PCD 7 Read from MCO
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 119

8-41 Parameters for Signals 8-45 BTM Transaction Command

[3428] PCD 8 Read from MCO [3] Clear error
[3429] PCD 9 Read from MCO
8-46 BTM Transaction Status
[3430] PCD 10 Read from MCO
3 3 [3440] Digital Inputs

[3441] Digital Outputs
Option:
[0] * Off
Function:
[3450] Actual Position [1] Transaction Started

[3451] Commanded Position [2] Transaction Comitting
[3452] Actual Master Position [3] Transaction Timeout
[3453] Slave Index Position [4] Err. Non-existing Par.
[3454] Master Index Position [5] Err. Par. Out of Range
[3455] Curve Position [6] Transaction Failed
[3456] Track Error
8-47 BTM Timeout
[3457] Synchronizing Error
Range: Function:
[3458] Actual Velocity
60 s* [1 - 360 s] Select the BTM Timeout after a BTM
[3459] Actual Master Velocity
transaction has been started.
[3460] Synchronizing Status
[3461] Axis Status
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors
[3462] Program Status
Range: Function:
[3464] MCO 302 Status
[3465] MCO 302 Control 21* [0 - 21 ] Selects the maximum allowed number of Bulk
Transfer Mode errors before aborting. If it is set
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1
to maximum, there is no abort.
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2
[4280] Safe Option Status
8-49 BTM Error Log
[4285] Active Safe Func.
Range: Function:
8-42 PCD Write Configuration 0.255* [0.000 - List of parameters that failed during
Range: Function: 9999.255 ] Bulk Transfer Mode. The value after the
Size [0 - Select the parameters to be assigned to decimal break is the error code (255
related* 9999 ] PCD's telegrams. The number of means no error).
available PCDs depends on the
telegram type. The values in PCD's is
3.10.5 8-5* Digital/Bus
then written to the selected parameters
as data values.
Parameters for configuring the control word Digital/Bus
merging.
8-43 PCD Read Configuration
Range: Function:
Size [0 - Select the parameters to be assigned to
NOTICE
related* 9999 ] PCD's of the telegrams. The number of These parameters are active only when
available PCDs depends on the parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital and control
telegram type. PCDs contain the actual word.
data values of the selected parameters.
8-50 Coasting Select
8-45 BTM Transaction Command
Option: Function:
Option: Function: Select control of the coasting function via the
NOTICE terminals (digital input) and/or via the bus.
This parameter cannot be [0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input.
adjusted while the motor is input
running. [1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial communi-
cation port or fieldbus option.
[0] * Off [2] Logic Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
[1] Start Transaction AND communication port, AND additionally via one of
[2] Commit transaction the digital inputs.
120 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

8-50 Coasting Select 8-54 Reversing Select

[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial [0] Digital Select control of the frequency converter
communication port OR via one of the digital input reverse function via the terminals (digital input)
inputs. and/or via the fieldbus.
8-51 Quick Stop Select

[1] Bus Activates the Reverse command via the serial
communication port or fieldbus option.
3 3
Select control of the Quick Stop function via the terminals
[2] Logic Activates the Reverse command via the
(digital input) and/or via the bus.
AND fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
Option: Function: additionally via one of the digital inputs.
[0] Digital input
[3] * Logic OR Activates the Reverse command via the
[1] Bus
fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one
[2] Logic AND
of the digital inputs.
[3] * Logic OR
8-52 DC Brake Select 8-55 Set-up Select

Select control of the DC brake via the terminals Select control of the frequency converter set-up
(digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. selection via the terminals (digital input) and/or
via the fieldbus.
NOTICE
[0] Digital Activates the set-up selection via a digital input.
Only selection [0] Digital input is available input
when 1-10 Motor Construction is set to [1] [1] Bus Activates the set-up selection via the serial
PM non-salient SPM. communication port or fieldbus option.
[2] Logic Activates the set-up selection via the fieldbus/

[0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input.
AND serial communication port, AND additionally via
input
one of the digital inputs.
[1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial communi-
cation port or fieldbus option. [3] Logic OR Activate the set-up selection via the fieldbus/
serial communication port OR via one of the
[2] Logic Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial
digital inputs.
AND communication port, AND additionally via one of
the digital inputs.
8-56 Preset Reference Select
[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial Option: Function:
communication port OR via one of the digital
Select control of the frequency converter Preset
inputs.
Reference selection via the terminals (digital
input) and/or via the fieldbus.
8-53 Start Select
[0] Digital Activates Preset Reference selection via a digital
Option: Function:
input input.
Select control of the frequency converter start
function via the terminals (digital input) and/or [1] Bus Activates Preset Reference selection via the serial
via the fieldbus. communication port or fieldbus option.
[0] Digital Activates Start command via a digital input. [2] Logic Activates Preset Reference selection via the
input AND fieldbus/serial communication port, AND
[1] Bus Activates Start command via the serial communi- additionally via one of the digital inputs.
cation port or fieldbus option. [3] Logic OR Activates the Preset Reference selection via the
[2] Logic Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial fieldbus/serial communication port OR via one of
AND communication port, AND additionally via one of the digital inputs.
the digital inputs.
[3] Logic OR Activates Start command via the fieldbus/serial

communication port OR via one of the digital
inputs.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 121

8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select 3.10.7 8-9* Bus Jog

Select control of the frequency converter OFF2 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is 8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital Range: Function:
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
100 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
3 3 Profidrive profile.
Option: Function:
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
or fieldbus option.
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus 8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed
[2] Logic AND Range: Function:
[3] * Logic OR 200 RPM* [ 0 - par. 4-13 Enter the jog speed. Activate this
RPM] fixed jog speed via the serial port
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select
or fieldbus option.
Select control of the frequency converter OFF3 selection via the
terminals (digital input) and/or via the fieldbus. This parameter is
active only when parameter 8-01 Control Site is set to [0] Digital
and ctrl. word and parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile is set to [1]
Profidrive profile.
Option: Function:
[0] Digital input
[1] Bus
[2] Logic AND
[3] * Logic OR
3.10.6 8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
These parameters are used for monitoring the Bus

communication via the FC Port.
8-80 Bus Message Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams detected on the bus.
8-81 Bus Error Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of telegrams
with faults (e.g. CRC fault), detected on the bus.
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of valid
telegrams addressed to the slave, sent by the
8-83 Slave Error Count

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 0 ] This parameter shows the number of error
telegrams, which could not be executed by the
122 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.11 Parameters: 9-** Profibus

For Profibus parameter descriptions, see the Profibus
Operating Instructions.
3.12 Parameters: 10-** DeviceNet CAN

Fieldbus 3 3
For Devicenet parameter descriptions, see the Devicenet
3.13 Parameters: 12-** Ethernet

For Ethernet parameter descriptions, see the Ethernet
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 123

3.14 Parameters: 13-** Smart Logic Control Start
130BA062.14
event P13-01
3.14.1 Prog. Features State 1

13-51.0
13-52.0 State 2
Stop 13-51.1
13-52.1
Smart Logic Control (SLC) is essentially a sequence of user- event P13-02
defined actions (see parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action
3 3
Stop
event P13-02
[x]) executed by the SLC when the associated user-defined State 4
13-51.3
event (see parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event [x]) is 13-52.3
State 3
evaluated as TRUE by the SLC. 13-51.2
13-52.2
The condition for an event can be a particular status or
that the output from a Logic Rule or a Comparator Stop
Operand becomes TRUE. That leads to an associated action event P13-02
as illustrated: Illustration 3.48 Events and Actions
Par. 13-51 Par. 13-52

SL Controller Event SL Controller Action 130BB671.13 Starting and stopping the SLC:
Starting and stopping the SLC can be done by selecting [1]
Running Coast On or [0] Off in parameter 13-00 SL Controller Mode. The
Warning Start timer SLC always starts in state 0 (where it evaluates event [0]).
Torque limit Set Do X low
Digital input X 30/2 Select set-up 2 The SLC starts when the Start Event (defined in
... ... parameter 13-01 Start Event) is evaluated as TRUE (provided
that [1] On is selected in parameter 13-00 SL Controller
Par. 13-43
Logic Rule Operator 2 Mode). The SLC stops when the Stop Event
(parameter 13-02 Stop Event) is TRUE. parameter 13-03 Reset
SLC resets all SLC parameters and start programming from
scratch.
...
...
NOTICE
Par. 13-11
Comparator Operator SLC is only active in AUTO mode, not Hand On mode
=
TRUE longer than..
3.14.2 13-0* SLC Settings
...
... Use the SLC settings to activate, deactivate and reset the
Smart Logic Control sequence. The logic functions and
comparators are always running in the background, which
Illustration 3.47 Smart Logic Control (SLC)
opens for separate control of digital inputs and outputs.
13-00 SL Controller Mode

Events and actions are each numbered and linked in pairs Option: Function:
(states). This means that when event [0] is fulfilled (attains [0] Off Disables the Smart Logic Controller.
the value TRUE), action [0] is executed. After this, the
[1] On Enables the Smart Logic Controller.
conditions of event [1] are evaluated and if evaluated
TRUE, action [1] is executed and so on. Only one event is
13-01 Start Event
evaluated at any time. If an event is evaluated as FALSE,
nothing happens (in the SLC) during the current scan Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
interval and no other events are evaluated. This means that Control.
when the SLC starts, it evaluates event [0] (and only event Option: Function:
[0]) each scan interval. Only when event [0] is evaluated [0] False Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input
TRUE, the SLC executes action [0] and starts evaluating to activate Smart Logic Control.
event [1]. It is possible to programme from 1 to 20 events Enters the fixed value - FALSE
and actions.
[1] True Enters the fixed value - TRUE.
When the last event/action has been executed, the
sequence starts over again from event [0]/action [0]. [2] Running The motor is running.
Illustration 3.48 shows an example with 3 event/actions: [3] In range The motor is running within the
programmed current and speed ranges
124 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-01 Start Event 13-01 Start Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic
Control. Control.
set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current [21] Alarm (trip lock) A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
High.
[22] Comparator 0 Use the result of comparator 0. 3 3
[23] Comparator 1 Use the result of comparator 1.
[4] On reference The motor is running on reference.
[5] Torque limit The torque limit, set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode [25] Comparator 3 Use the result of comparator 3.
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator [26] Logic rule 0 Use the result of logic rule 0.
Mode, has been exceeded.
[27] Logic rule 1 Use the result of logic rule 1.
[6] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in
[28] Logic rule 2 Use the result of logic rule 2.
parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been
exceeded. [29] Logic rule 3 Use the result of logic rule 3.
[7] Out of current The motor current is outside the range [33] Digital input Use the result of digital input 18.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. DI18
[34] Digital input Use the result of digital input 19.
[8] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in
DI19
[9] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in DI27
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[10] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in DI29
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and [37] Digital input Use the result of digital input 32.
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High. DI32
[11] Below speed The output speed is lower than the [38] Digital input Use the result of digital input 33.
low setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed DI33
Low. [39] Start command A start command is issued.
[12] Above speed The output speed is higher than the [40] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed Coast) is issued and not from the SLC
High. itself.
[13] Out of feedb. The feedback is outside the range set in [41] Reset Trip A reset is issued
range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low [42] Auto-reset Trip An Auto reset is performed.
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on the
High.
graphical LCP.
[14] Below feedb. The feedback is below the limit set in
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available on the
graphical LCP.
[15] Above feedb. The feedback is above the limit set in
[45] Left key [] is pressed. Only available on the
high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High.
graphical LCP.
[16] Thermal The thermal warning turns on when the
[46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on the
warning temperature exceeds the limit in the
graphical LCP.
motor, the frequency converter, the
brake resistor or the thermistor. [47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on the
[17] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the graphical LCP.
range specified voltage range. [48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on the
[18] Reversing The output is high when the frequency graphical LCP.
converter is running counter clockwise
running AND reverse). [51] Comparator 5 Use the result of comparator 5.
[19] Warning A warning is active. [60] Logic rule 4 Use the result of logic rule 4.
[20] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active. [61] Logic rule 5 Use the result of logic rule 5.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 125

13-01 Start Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to activate Smart Logic Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Control. Logic Control.
[76] Digital input Use the value of x30/2 (MCB 101 GPIO) [11] Below speed low
3 3 [77]
x30/2
Digital input Use the value of x30/3 (MCB 101 GPIO)
[12]
[13]
Above speed high
Out of feedb. range
x30/3 [14] Below feedb. low
[78] Digital input Use the value of x30/4 (MCB 101 GPIO) [15] Above feedb. high
x30/4 [16] Thermal warning
[79] Digital input Use the value of x46/1 (MCB 113 Ext. [17] Mains out of range
x46/1 Relay Card) [18] Reversing
[80] Digital input Use the value of x46/3 (MCB 113 Ext. [19] Warning
x46/3 Relay Card) [20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
[81] Digital input Use the value of x46/5 (MCB 113 Ext.
x46/5 Relay Card) [22] Comparator 0
[23] Comparator 1
[24] Comparator 2
x46/7 Relay Card)
[25] Comparator 3
[83] Digital input Use the value of x46/9 (MCB 113 Ext. [26] Logic rule 0
x46/9 Relay Card) [27] Logic rule 1
[84] Digital input Use the value of x46/11 (MCB 113 Ext. [28] Logic rule 2
x46/11 Relay Card) [29] Logic rule 3
[30] SL Time-out 0
[31] SL Time-out 1
x46/13 Relay Card)
[32] SL Time-out 2
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators
[33] Digital input DI18
[95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [34] Digital input DI19
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [39] Start command
[40] Drive stopped
[41] Reset Trip
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Comparators [42] Auto-reset Trip
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
13-02 Stop Event the graphical LCP.
Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
Logic Control.
on the graphical LCP.
Option: Function:
[45] Left key [] is pressed. Only available on
[0] False For descriptions [0]-[61], see
the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-01 Start Event Start
Event [46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
[1] True
[2] Running [47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on
[3] In range the graphical LCP.
[4] On reference [48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on
[5] Torque limit the graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit
[50] Comparator 4
[7] Out of current range
[51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low
[60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high
[61] Logic rule 5
[10] Out of speed range
126 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-02 Stop Event 13-02 Stop Event

Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart Select the boolean (TRUE or FALSE) input to deactivate Smart
Logic Control. Logic Control.
[70] SL Time-out 3 Smart Logic Controller timer 3 is [95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1*
timed out. Comparators
3 3
[75] Start command given [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
[76] Digital input x30/2 Comparators
[77] Digital input x30/3 [101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1*
[79] Digital input x46/1
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[83] Digital input x46/9 [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If [109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
is 1.
13-03 Reset SLC
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Option: Function:
Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[0] Do not reset Retains programmed settings in all parameter
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
SLC group 13-** Smart Logic Control.
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output [1] Reset SLC Resets all parameters in parameter group 13-
is 1. ** Smart Logic Control to default settings.

warning Thermal Protection is set to [20]
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor

the warning 165 ATEX ETR
freq.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1.
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1*

Comparators
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 127

3.14.3 13-1* Comparators 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6]
Comparators are used for comparing continuous variables
Option: Function:
(i.e. output frequency, output current, analog input etc.) to
[11] Heat sink temp. Expressed as a percentage.
fixed preset values.
3 3
[12] Analog input Expressed as a percentage.
Par. 13-11 AI53
130BB672.10
Comparator Operator [13] Analog input Expressed as a percentage.
Par. 13-10
Comparator Operand AI54
= [14] Analog input [V]. AIFB10 is internal 10 V supply.
Par. 13-12 TRUE longer than. AIFB10
Comparator Value ... [15] Analog input [V] Analog input AICCT [17] []. AIS24V is
...
AIS24V switch mode power supply: SMPS 24V.
Illustration 3.49 Comparators [17] Analog input []. AICCT is control card temperature.
AICCT
[18] Pulse input Expressed as a percentage.
In addition, there are digital values that are compared to FI29
fixed time values. See explanation in [19] Pulse input Expressed as a percentage.
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand. Comparators are FI33
evaluated once in each scan interval. Use the result (TRUE [20] Alarm number The error number.
or FALSE) directly. All parameters in this parameter group
[21] Warning
are array parameters with index 0 to 5. Select index 0 to
number
programme Comparator 0, select index 1 to programme
[22] Analog input
Comparator 1, and so on.
x30 11
13-10 Comparator Operand [23] Analog input
Array [6] x30 12
[30] Counter A Number of counts.
Option: Function:
Options [1] to [31] are variables which [31] Counter B Number of counts.
are compared based on their values. [32] Process PID Value of the PID Error
Options [50] to [186] are digital values Error (parameter 18-90 Process PID Error)
(TRUE/FALSE) where the comparison is
[33] Process PID Value of the PID Output
based on the amount of time during
Output (parameter 18-91 Process PID Output)
which they are set to TRUE or FALSE,
respectively. See [50] FALSE Enters the fixed value of false in the
parameter 13-11 Comparator Operator. comparator.
Select the variable to be monitored by
[51] TRUE Enters the fixed value of true in the
the comparator.
comparator.
[0] DISABLED The comparator is disabled.
[52] Control ready The control board receives supply
[1] Reference % The resulting remote reference (not local) voltage.
as a percentage.
[53] Drive ready The frequency converter is ready for
[2] Feedback % [RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter operation and applies a supply signal on
0-02 Motor Speed Unit. the control board.
[3] Motor speed [RPM] or [Hz], as set in parameter [54] Running The motor is running.
0-02 Motor Speed Unit.
[55] Reversing The output is high when the frequency
[4] Motor Current [A] converter is running counter clockwise
[5] Motor torque [Nm]
running AND reverse).
[6] Motor power [kW] or [hp]
[56] In range The motor is running within the
[7] Motor voltage [V] programmed current and speed ranges
[8] DC-link voltage [V] set in parameter 4-50 Warning Current
Low to parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
[9] Motor Thermal Expressed as a percentage.
High.
[10] Drive thermal Expressed as a percentage.
128 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[60] On reference The motor is running on reference. [86] Alarm (trip) A (trip) alarm is active.
3 3
[61] Below The motor is running below the value [87] Alarm (trip A (Trip lock) alarm is active.
reference, low given in parameter 4-54 Warning lock)
Reference Low. [90] Bus OK Active communication (no time-out) via
the serial communication port.
[62] Above ref, high The motor is running above the value
given in parameter 4-55 Warning [91] Torque limit & If the frequency converter has received a
Reference High stop stop signal and is at the torque limit, the
signal is logic 0.
[65] Torque limit The torque limit, set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode [92] Brake fault The brake IGBT is short circuited.
or parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator (IGBT)
Mode, has been exceeded. [93] Mech. brake The mechanical brake is active.
[66] Current Limit The motor current limit, set in control
parameter 4-18 Current Limit, has been [94] Safe stop active
exceeded. [100] Comparator 0 The result of comparator 0.
[67] Out of current The motor current is outside the range [101] Comparator 1 The result of comparator 1.
range set in parameter 4-18 Current Limit. [102] Comparator 2 The result of comparator 2.
[68] Below I low The motor current is lower than set in [103] Comparator 3 The result of comparator 3.
[104] Comparator 4 The result of comparator 4.
[69] Above I high The motor current is higher than set in
[105] Comparator 5 The result of comparator 5.
parameter 4-51 Warning Current High.
[110] Logic rule 0 The result of Logic rule 0.
[70] Out of speed The speed is outside the range set in
range parameter 4-52 Warning Speed Low and [111] Logic rule 1 The result of Logic rule 1.
parameter 4-53 Warning Speed High.
[71] Below speed The output speed is lower than the
low setting in parameter 4-52 Warning Speed
Low. [114] Logic rule 4 The result of Logic rule 4.
[72] Above speed The output speed is higher than the [115] Logic rule 5 The result of Logic rule 5.
high setting in parameter 4-53 Warning Speed [120] SL Time-out 0 The result of SLC timer 0.
High.
[121] SL Time-out 1 The result of SLC timer 1.
[75] Out of The feedback is outside the range set in
feedback range parameter 4-56 Warning Feedback Low
and parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback [123] SL Time-out 3 The result of SLC timer 3.
High.
[76] Below feedback The feedback is below the limit set in
[77] Above The feedback is above the limit set in
feedback high parameter 4-57 Warning Feedback High. [127] SL Time-out 7 The result of SLC timer 7.
[80] Thermal This operand becomes true when the [130] Digital input Digital input 18. High = True.
warning frequency converter detects any thermal DI18
warning, for instance, when the [131] Digital input Digital input 19. High = True.
temperature exceeds the limit in the DI19
motor, the frequency converter, the brake [132] Digital input Digital input 27. High = True.
resistor or thermistor. DI27
[133] Digital input Digital input 29. High = True.
[82] Mains out of The mains voltage is outside the
DI29
range specified voltage range.
[134] Digital input Digital input 32. High = True.
[85] Warning If a warning is triggered, this operand DI32
gets the warning number.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 129

13-10 Comparator Operand 13-10 Comparator Operand

Array [6] Array [6]
[135] Digital input Digital input 33. High = True. [194] Digital input
DI33 x46/2
3 3 [150] SL digital
output A
Use the result of the SLC output A. [195] Digital input
x46/3
[151] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output B. [196] Digital input
output B x46/4
[152] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output C. [197] Digital input
output C x46/5
[153] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output D. [198] Digital input
output D x46/6
[154] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output E. [199] Digital input
output E x46/7
[155] SL digital Use the result of the SLC output F.
13-11 Comparator Operator
output F
[160] Relay 1 Relay 1 is active Array [6]
[161] Relay 2 Relay 2 is active

Option: Function:
Select the operator to be used in the
[162] Relay 3
comparison. This is an array parameter
[163] Relay 4 containing comparator operators 0 to 5.
[164] Relay 5
[0] < The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the
[165] Relay 6
variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
[166] Relay 7
Operand is smaller than the fixed value in
[167] Relay 8
13-12 Comparator Value. The result is FALSE, if
[168] Relay 9
the variable selected in
[180] Local High when 3-13 Reference Site = [2] Local
parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand is greater
referecnce or when 3-13 Reference Site is [0] Linked
than the fixed value in 13-12 Comparator Value.
active to hand Auto, at the same time as the
LCP is in Hand On mode. [1] (equal) The result of the evaluation is TRUE, when the
variable selected in parameter 13-10 Comparator
[181] Remote High when 3-13 Reference Site= [1]
Operand is approximately equal to the fixed
reference active Remote or [0] Linked to hand/auto, while
value in 13-12 Comparator Value.
the LCP is in Auto On mode.
[2] > Inverse logic of option < [0].
[182] Start command High when there is an active start
command, and no stop command. [5] TRUE
longer
[183] Drive stopped A stop command (Jog, Stop, Qstop,
than..
Coast) is issued and not from the SLC
[6] FALSE
itself.
longer
[185] Drive in hand High when the frequency converter is in than..
mode Hand mode. [7] TRUE
[186] Drive in auto High when the frequency converter is in shorter
mode Auto mode. than..
[8] FALSE
[187] Start command
shorter
given
than..
[190] Digital input
x30/2 13-12 Comparator Value
[191] Digital input Array [6]
x30/3
Range: Function:
[192] Digital input
Size [-100000 - Enter the trigger level for the
x30/4
related* 100000 ] variable that is monitored by this
[193] Digital input
comtor. This is an array parameter
x46/1
containing comtor values 0 to 5.
130 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.14.4 13-1* RS Flip Flops Parameter Setting Notes

Output from
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [94] RS
The Reset/Set Flip Flops hold the signal until set/reset. evaluating 13-15
Event [0] Flipflop 0
and 13-16
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
130BB959.10
[22] Run
Action [0]
Par. 13-15
RS-FF Operand S
Parameter 13-51 SL Controller [27]
3 3
Par. 13-16
RS-FF Operand R Event [1] Logicrule 1
Parameter 13-52 SL Controller
[24] Stop
Illustration 3.50 Reset/Set Flip Flops Action [1]
Table 3.23 Operators
2 parameters are used and the output can be used in the

13-15 RS-FF Operand S
logic rules and as events.
Option: Function:
[0] False
130BB960.10
S [1] True
[2] Running
R
[3] In range
Flip Flop Output [4] On reference
Illustration 3.51 Flip Flop Outputs [5] Torque limit
[6] Current Limit
The 2 operators can be selected from a long list. As a [8] Below I low
special case, the same digital input can be used as both [9] Above I high
Set and Reset, making it possible to use the same digital [10] Out of speed range
input as start/stop. The following settings can be used to [11] Below speed low
set up the same digital input as start/stop (example given [12] Above speed high
with DI32 but is not a requirement). [13] Out of feedb. range
[14] Below feedb. low
Parameter Setting Notes [15] Above feedb. high
Parameter 13-00 SL Controller [16] Thermal warning
On
Mode [17] Mains out of range
Parameter 13-01 Start Event TRUE [18] Reversing
Parameter 13-02 Stop Event FALSE [19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital
Boolean 1 [0] Input DI32 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule [22] Comparator 0

[2] Running [23] Comparator 1
Boolean 2 [0]
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule [3] AND [24] Comparator 2
Operator 1 [0] NOT [25] Comparator 3
[26] Logic rule 0
Parameter 13-40 Logic Rule [37] Digital [27] Logic rule 1
Boolean 1 [1] Input DI32 [28] Logic rule 2
Parameter 13-42 Logic Rule [29] Logic rule 3
[2] Running
Boolean 2 [1]
[30] SL Time-out 0
Parameter 13-41 Logic Rule
[1] AND [31] SL Time-out 1
Operator 1 [1]
[32] SL Time-out 2
Parameter 13-15 RS-FF [26] Output from 13-41 [33] Digital input DI18
Operand S [0] Logicrule 0 [0] [34] Digital input DI19
Parameter 13-16 RS-FF [27] Output from 13-41 [35] Digital input DI27
Operand R [0] Logicrule 1 [1] [36] Digital input DI29
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 131

13-15 RS-FF Operand S 13-15 RS-FF Operand S

[39] Start command [104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[40] Drive stopped
[105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[41] Reset Trip
3 3 [42]
[43]
Auto-reset Trip
Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
[106] Relay 5
[107] Relay 6
X47/MCB 113
X47/MCB 113
the graphical LCP.
[108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
the graphical LCP. 13-16 RS-FF Operand R
[46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on Option: Function:
the graphical LCP. [0] False
[47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on [1] True
the graphical LCP. [2] Running
[3] In range
[48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on
[4] On reference
the graphical LCP.
[5] Torque limit
[50] Comparator 4 [6] Current Limit
[51] Comparator 5 [7] Out of current range
[60] Logic rule 4 [8] Below I low
[61] Logic rule 5 [9] Above I high
[70] SL Time-out 3 [10] Out of speed range
[71] SL Time-out 4 [11] Below speed low
[72] SL Time-out 5 [12] Above speed high
[73] SL Time-out 6 [13] Out of feedb. range
[74] SL Time-out 7 [14] Below feedb. low
[75] Start command given [15] Above feedb. high
[76] Digital input x30/2 [16] Thermal warning
[77] Digital input x30/3 [17] Mains out of range
[78] Digital input x30/4 [18] Reversing
[79] Digital input x46/1 [19] Warning
[80] Digital input x46/3 [20] Alarm (trip)
[81] Digital input x46/5 [21] Alarm (trip lock)
[82] Digital input x46/7 [22] Comparator 0
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning [26] Logic rule 0
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm [27] Logic rule 1
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning [28] Logic rule 2
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm [29] Logic rule 3
[94] RS Flipflop 0 [30] SL Time-out 0
[97] RS Flipflop 3 [33] Digital input DI18
[102] Relay 1 [38] Digital input DI33
[103] Relay 2 [39] Start command
132 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-16 RS-FF Operand R 13-16 RS-FF Operand R

[40] Drive stopped [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[41] Reset Trip
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[42] Auto-reset Trip
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
[107] Relay 6
[108] Relay 7
X47/MCB 113
X34/MCB 105
3 3
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available [109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
the graphical LCP.
3.14.5 13-2* Timers
[46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP. Use the result (TRUE or FALSE) from timers directly to
[47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on define an event (see 13-51 SL Controller Event), or as
the graphical LCP. boolean input in a logic rule (see 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean
1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 or 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3).
[48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on A timer is only FALSE when started by an action (i.e. [29]
the graphical LCP. Start timer 1) until the timer value entered in this
[50] Comparator 4 parameter is elapsed. Then it becomes TRUE again.
[51] Comparator 5 All parameters in this parameter group are array
[60] Logic rule 4 parameters with index 0 to 2. Select index 0 to program
Timer 0, select index 1 to program Timer 1, and so on.
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3 13-20 SL Controller Timer
[71] SL Time-out 4 Range: Function:
[72] SL Time-out 5 Size [0 - Enter the value to define the duration of
[73] SL Time-out 6 related* 0] the FALSE output from the programmed
[74] SL Time-out 7 timer. A timer is only FALSE if it is started
[75] Start command given by an action (i.e. [29] Start timer 1) and
[76] Digital input x30/2 until the given timer value has elapsed.
3.14.6 13-4* Logic Rules
Combine up to 3 boolean inputs (TRUE/FALSE inputs) from
timers, comparators, digital inputs, status bits and events
using the logical operators AND, OR, and NOT. Select
boolean inputs for the calculation in 13-40 Logic Rule
Boolean 1, 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule
[85] Digital input x46/13 Boolean 3. Define the operators used to logically combine
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning the selected inputs in parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm 1 and parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2.
[92] ATEX ETR freq. warning
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Par. 13-41 Par. 13-43
130BB673.10
[94] RS Flipflop 0 Logic Rule Operator 1 Logic Rule Operator 2

Par. 13-40
[95] RS Flipflop 1 Logic Rule Boolean 1
[96] RS Flipflop 2 Par. 13-42

Logic Rule Boolean 2 ...
[97] RS Flipflop 3 ... ...
...
[98] RS Flipflop 4
[99] RS Flipflop 5 Par. 13-44
Logic Rule Boolean 3
[100] RS Flipflop 6
[101] RS Flipflop 7 Illustration 3.52 Logic Rules
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
Priority of calculation
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 133

The results of 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1, 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Array [6]
Boolean 2 are calculated first. The outcome (TRUE/FALSE)
Option: Function:
of this calculation is combined with the settings of
parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 and 13-44 Logic Rule [38] Digital input DI33
Boolean 3, yielding the final result (TRUE/FALSE) of the [39] Start command
3 3 logic rule. [40]
[41]
Drive stopped
Reset Trip
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1
[42] Auto-reset Trip
Array [6] [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
Option: Function: the graphical LCP.
[0] False Select the first boolean (TRUE or [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
FALSE) input for the selected logic on the graphical LCP.
rule.
See parameter 13-01 Start Event [45] Left key [] is pressed. Only available on
([0] - [61]) and the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] - [46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on
[75]) for further description. the graphical LCP.
[1] True [47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on
[2] Running the graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference
the graphical LCP.
[5] Torque limit
[6] Current Limit [50] Comparator 4
[7] Out of current range [51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low [60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high [61] Logic rule 5
[10] Out of speed range [70] SL Time-out 3
[11] Below speed low [71] SL Time-out 4
[12] Above speed high [72] SL Time-out 5
[13] Out of feedb. range [73] SL Time-out 6
[14] Below feedb. low [74] SL Time-out 7
[15] Above feedb. high [75] Start command given
[16] Thermal warning [76] Digital input x30/2
[17] Mains out of range [77] Digital input x30/3
[18] Reversing [78] Digital input x30/4
[19] Warning [79] Digital input x46/1
[20] Alarm (trip) [80] Digital input x46/3
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [81] Digital input x46/5
[22] Comparator 0 [82] Digital input x46/7
[26] Logic rule 0 [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[27] Logic rule 1 Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[28] Logic rule 2 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[29] Logic rule 3 the alarm 164 ATEX ETR
[30] SL Time-out 0 cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
[31] SL Time-out 1 is 1.
[32] SL Time-out 2 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, ifparameter 1-90 Motor
[33] Digital input DI18 Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[35] Digital input DI27 the alarm 166 ATEX ETR
[36] Digital input DI29 freq.lim.alarm is active, the output
[37] Digital input DI32 is 1.
134 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1

Array [6] Array [6]
[92] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [0] DISABLED Ignores 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2,
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20] parameter 13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2, and
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
3 3
[1] AND Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND [13-42].
cur.lim.warning is active, the
output is 1. [2] OR Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR [13-42].
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [3] AND NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] AND NOT
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [13-42].
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If [4] OR NOT Evaluates the expression [13-40] OR NOT
the warning 165 ATEX ETR [13-42].
[5] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
output is 1.
[13-42].
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group13-1*
[6] NOT OR Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR
Comparators
[13-42].
[7] NOT AND Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] AND
Comparators
NOT NOT [13-42].
[8] NOT OR NOT Evaluates the expression NOT [13-40] OR NOT
Comparators
[13-42].
Comparators 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* Array [6]
Comparators Option: Function:
[99] RS Flipflop 5 See parameter group 13-1* [0] False Select the second boolean (TRUE
Comparators or FALSE) input for the selected
logic rule. See
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -
Comparators
[61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* Event ([70] - [75]) for further
Comparators description.
[102] Relay 1 [1] True
[103] Relay 2 [2] Running
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113 [3] In range
[105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113 [4] On reference
[5] Torque limit
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[6] Current Limit
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113 [7] Out of current range
[108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105 [8] Below I low
[9] Above I high
[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
[11] Below speed low
[12] Above speed high
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1
Array [6] [14] Below feedb. low
Option: Function: [15] Above feedb. high
Select the first logical operator to use on the [16] Thermal warning
Boolean inputs from 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean [17] Mains out of range
1 and 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [18] Reversing
[13-**] signifies the boolean input of [19] Warning
parameter group 13-** Smart Logic Control. [20] Alarm (trip)
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 135

13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2

Array [6] Array [6]
[21] Alarm (trip lock) [81] Digital input x46/5
3 3 [23]
[24]
Comparator 1
Comparator 2
[83]
[84]
Digital input x46/9
Digital input x46/11
[26] Logic rule 0 [90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[27] Logic rule 1 Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[30] SL Time-out 0 cur.lim.alarm is active, the output
[31] SL Time-out 1 is 1.
[32] SL Time-out 2 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[38] Digital input DI33 [92] ATEX ETR freq. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[39] Start command Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[40] Drive stopped ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[41] Reset Trip the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
[42] Auto-reset Trip cur.lim.warning is active, the
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on output is 1.
the graphical LCP. [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available Thermal Protection is set to [20]
on the graphical LCP. ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the graphical LCP.
output is 1.
[46] Right key [] is pressed. Only available on [94] RS Flipflop 0 See 13-1* Comparators
the graphical LCP.
[47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
the graphical LCP. [98] RS Flipflop 4 See 13-1* Comparators
[50] Comparator 4 [99] RS Flipflop 5 See 13-1* Comparators

[51] Comparator 5 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See 13-1* Comparators
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3 [102] Relay 1
[71] SL Time-out 4 [103] Relay 2
[72] SL Time-out 5 [104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113
[73] SL Time-out 6 [105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113

[74] SL Time-out 7
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113
[75] Start command given
[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
136 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
Select the second logical operator to be used [18] Reversing
on the boolean input calculated in [19] Warning
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
[20]
[21]
Alarm (trip)
Alarm (trip lock)
3 3
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2, and the boolean [22] Comparator 0
input coming from 13-42 Logic Rule Boolean [23] Comparator 1
2.
[24] Comparator 2
[13-44] signifies the boolean input of
[25] Comparator 3
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3.
[26] Logic rule 0
[13-40/13-42] signifies the boolean input
[27] Logic rule 1
calculated in 13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1,
[28] Logic rule 2
parameter 13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1, and
[29] Logic rule 3
13-42 Logic Rule Boolean 2. [0] Disabled
(factory setting). select this option to ignore [30] SL Time-out 0
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3. [31] SL Time-out 1
[32] SL Time-out 2
[0] DISABLED
[1] AND
[2] OR
[3] AND NOT
[4] OR NOT
[5] NOT AND
[6] NOT OR
[39] Start command
[7] NOT AND NOT
[40] Drive stopped
[8] NOT OR NOT
[41] Reset Trip
13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 [42] Auto-reset Trip
Array [6] [43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on
the graphical LCP.
Option: Function:
[0] False Select the third boolean (TRUE or [44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available
FALSE) input for the selected logic on the graphical LCP.
rule. See parameter 13-01 Start [45] Left key [] is pressed. Only available on
Event ([0] - [61]) and the graphical LCP.
parameter 13-02 Stop Event ([70] -
[75]) for further description.
the graphical LCP.
[1] True
[47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on
[2] Running
the graphical LCP.
[3] In range
[4] On reference [48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on
[5] Torque limit the graphical LCP.
[6] Current Limit
[50] Comparator 4
[51] Comparator 5
[8] Below I low
[60] Logic rule 4
[9] Above I high
[61] Logic rule 5
[70] SL Time-out 3
[71] SL Time-out 4
[72] SL Time-out 5
[73] SL Time-out 6
[74] SL Time-out 7
[15] Above feedb. high
[75] Start command given
[17] Mains out of range
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 137

13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3 13-44 Logic Rule Boolean 3

Array [6] Array [6]
[78] Digital input x30/4 [103] Relay 2
3 3 [80]
[81]
Digital input x46/3
Digital input x46/5
[105] Relay 4 X47/MCB 113
[106] Relay 5 X47/MCB 113

[109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105
3.14.7 13-5* States
is 1.
13-51 SL Controller Event
[91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
Array [20]
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If Option: Function:
the alarm 166 ATEX ETR [0] False Select the boolean input (TRUE or
freq.lim.alarm is active, the output FALSE) to define the Smart Logic
is 1. Controller event. See
parameter 13-01 Start Event ([0] -
[61]) and parameter 13-02 Stop
warning Thermal Protection is set to [20]
Event ([70] - [74]) for further
description.
cur.lim.warning is active, the [1] True
output is 1. [2] Running
[93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [3] In range
Thermal Protection is set to [20] [4] On reference
ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If [5] Torque limit
the warning 165 ATEX ETR [6] Current Limit
freq.lim.warning is active, the [7] Out of current range
output is 1. [8] Below I low
[94] RS Flipflop 0 See parameter group 13-1* [9] Above I high
Comparators [10] Out of speed range
Comparators
[96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1* [14] Below feedb. low
Comparators [15] Above feedb. high
[97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1* [16] Thermal warning
Comparators [17] Mains out of range
[98] RS Flipflop 4 See parameter group 13-1* [18] Reversing

Comparators [19] Warning
[20] Alarm (trip)
[21] Alarm (trip lock)
Comparators
[22] Comparator 0
[100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1* [23] Comparator 1
Comparators [24] Comparator 2
[101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1* [25] Comparator 3
Comparators [26] Logic rule 0
[27] Logic rule 1
[102] Relay 1
138 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-51 SL Controller Event

Array [20] Array [20]
[30]
[31]
SL Time-out 0
SL Time-out 1
is 1.
3 3
[32] SL Time-out 2 [91] ATEX ETR cur. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[34] Digital input DI19 ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR]. If
[38] Digital input DI33 [92] ATEX ETR freq. Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[39] Start command warning Thermal Protection is set to [20]
[40] Drive stopped ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
[41] Reset Trip the alarm 163 ATEX ETR
[42] Auto-reset Trip cur.lim.warning is active, the
[43] Ok key [OK] is pressed. Only available on output is 1.
the graphical LCP. [93] ATEX ETR freq. alarm Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor
[44] Reset key [Reset] is pressed. Only available Thermal Protection is set to [20]
on the graphical LCP. ATEX ETR or [21] Advanced ETR. If
the graphical LCP.
output is 1.
the graphical LCP.
Comparators
[47] Up key [] is pressed. Only available on [95] RS Flipflop 1 See parameter group 13-1*
the graphical LCP. Comparators
[48] Down key [] is pressed. Only available on [96] RS Flipflop 2 See parameter group 13-1*
the graphical LCP. Comparators
[50] Comparator 4 [97] RS Flipflop 3 See parameter group 13-1*
[51] Comparator 5 Comparators
[60] Logic rule 4
[61] Logic rule 5 Comparators
[70] SL Time-out 3
[71] SL Time-out 4
Comparators
[72] SL Time-out 5
[73] SL Time-out 6 [100] RS Flipflop 6 See parameter group 13-1*
[74] SL Time-out 7 Comparators
[75] Start command given [101] RS Flipflop 7 See parameter group 13-1*
[102] Relay 1
[103] Relay 2
[104] Relay 3 X47/MCB 113

[107] Relay 6 X47/MCB 113
[108] Relay 7 X34/MCB 105
[90] ATEX ETR cur. warning Selectable, if parameter 1-90 Motor [109] Relay 8 X34/MCB 105
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 139

13-51 SL Controller Event 13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20] Array [20]
[110] Relay 9 X34/MCB 105 If the active preset reference is changed, it
merges with other preset reference
3 3 13-52 SL Controller Action commands coming from either the digital

inputs or via a fieldbus.
Array [20]
Option: Function: [14] Select preset Selects preset reference 4.
[0] DISABLED Select the action corresponding to the SLC ref 4 If the active preset reference is changed, it
event. Actions are executed when the merges with other preset reference
corresponding event (defined in commands coming from either the digital
parameter 13-51 SL Controller Event) is inputs or via a fieldbus.
evaluated as true. The following actions are [15] Select preset Selects preset reference 5.
available for selection: ref 5 If the active preset reference is changed, it
[0] *DISABLED merges with other preset reference
commands coming from either the digital
[1] No action
[2] Select set-up 1 Changes the active set-up
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 1. [16] Select preset Selects preset reference 6.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with ref 6 If the active preset reference is changed, it
other set-up commands coming from either merges with other preset reference
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus. commands coming from either the digital
parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 2. [17] Select preset Selects preset reference 7.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with ref 7 If the active preset reference is changed, it
other set-up commands coming from either merges with other preset reference
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus. commands coming from either the digital
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 3. [18] Select ramp 1 Selects ramp 1.
If the set-up is changed, it merges with [19] Select ramp 2 Selects ramp 2.
other set-up commands coming from either
[20] Select ramp 3 Selects ramp 3.
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus.
[21] Select ramp 4 Selects ramp 4.
(parameter 0-10 Active Set-up) to 4. [22] Run Issues a start command to the frequency
If the set-up is changed, it merges with converter.
other set-up commands coming from either [23] Run reverse Issues a start reverse command to the
the digital inputs or via a fieldbus. frequency converter.
[10] Select preset Selects preset reference 0. [24] Stop Issues a stop command to the frequency
ref 0 If the active preset reference is changed, it converter.
commands coming from either the digital [25] Qstop Issues a quick stop command to the
inputs or via a fieldbus. frequency converter.
[11] Select preset Selects preset reference 1. [26] Dcstop Issues a DC stop command to the
ref 1 If the active preset reference is changed, it frequency converter.
merges with other preset reference [27] Coast The frequency converter coasts
commands coming from either the digital immediately. All stop commands including
inputs or via a fieldbus. the coast command stop the SLC.
[12] Select preset Selects preset reference 2. [28] Freeze output Freezes the output frequency of the
ref 2 If the active preset reference is changed, it frequency converter.
[29] Start timer 0 Starts timer 0, see parameter 13-20 SL
commands coming from either the digital
Controller Timer for further description.
[13] Select preset Selects preset reference 3.
ref 3
140 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

13-52 SL Controller Action

Array [20]
Option: Function:
[32] Set digital out Any output with SL output A is low. 3 3

A low
[33] Set digital out Any output with SL output B is low.
B low
[34] Set digital out Any output with SL output C is low.
C low
[35] Set digital out Any output with SL output D is low.
D low
[36] Set digital out Any output with SL output E is low.
E low
[37] Set digital out Any output with SL output F is low.
F low
[38] Set digital out Any output with SL output A is high.
A high
[39] Set digital out Any output with SL output B is high.
B high
[40] Set digital out Any output with SL output C is high.
C high
[41] Set digital out Any output with SL output D is high.
D high
[42] Set digital out Any output with SL output E is high.
E high
[43] Set digital out Any output with SL output F is high.
F high
[60] Reset Counter Resets Counter A to zero.
A
[61] Reset Counter Resets Counter B to zero.
B
[70] Start timer 3 Start Timer 3, see parameter 13-20 SL




MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 141

3.15 Parameters: 14-** Special Functions NOTICE

The output frequency value of the frequency converter
3.15.1 14-0* Inverter Switching must never exceed 1/10 of the switching frequency.
When the motor is running, adjust the switching
14-00 Switching Pattern frequency in parameter 14-01 Switching Frequency to
Select the switching pattern: 60 AVM or SFAVM.
minimise motor noise.
[0] 60 AVM NOTICE

[1] * SFAVM To avoid a trip, the frequency converter can adapt the
switching frequency automatically.
NOTICE
The switching pattern may be automatically adapted by
14-03 Overmodulation
the frequency converter in order to avoid a trip. See
Option: Function:
application note on derating for more details.
[0] Off Select [0] Off for no overmodulation of the output
voltage, to avoid torque ripple on the motor shaft.
14-01 Switching Frequency
This feature may be useful for applications such as
Select the converter switching frequency. Changing the switching grinding machines.
frequency can reduce acoustic noise from the motor. Default
[1] * On Select [1] On to enable the overmodulation function
values depend on power size.
for the output voltage. This is the right choice when it
Option: Function: is required that the output voltage is higher than 95%
[0] 1.0 kHz of the input voltage (typical when running over-
[1] 1.5 kHz Default switching frequency for synchronously). The output voltage is increased
355-1200 kW [500-1600 hp], 690 according to the degree of overmodulation.
V
NOTICE
[2] 2.0 kHz Default switching frequency for
Overmodulation leads to increased torque
250-800 kW [350-1075 hp], 400 V
ripple as harmonics are increased.
and 37-315 kW [50-450 hp], 690
V
Control in FLUX mode provides an output current of
[3] 2.5 kHz
up to 98% of the input current, regardless of
[4] 3.0 kHz Default switching frequency for parameter 14-03 Overmodulation.
18.5-37 kW [25-50 hp], 200 V and
37-200 kW [50-300 hp], 400 V 14-04 PWM Random
[5] 3.5 kHz Option: Function:
[6] 4.0 kHz Default switching frequency for [0] Off No change of the acoustic motor switching noise.
5.515 kW [7.5-20 hp], 200 V and
[1] On Transforms the acoustic motor switching noise from a
11-30 kW [15-40], 400 V
clear ringing tone to a less noticeable white noise. This
[7] 5.0 kHz Default switching frequency for is achieved by slightly and randomly altering the
0.253,7 kW [0.34-5 hp], 200 V synchronism of the pulse width modulated output
and 0.37-7.5 kW [0.5-10 hp], 400 phases.
V
[8] 6.0 kHz 14-06 Dead Time Compensation

[9] 7.0 kHz Option: Function:
[10] 8.0 kHz [0] Off No compensation.
[11] 10.0 kHz
[1] * On Activates dead time compensation.
[12] 12.0kHz
[13] 14.0 kHz
[14] 16.0kHz
142 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.15.2 14-1* Mains On/Off 14-10 Mains Failure

Note:
Parameters for configuring mains failure monitoring and Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
handling. If a mains failure appears, the frequency is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
converter tries to continue in a controlled way until the
Option: Function:
power in the DC link has been exhausted.
14-10 Mains Failure

the output frequency all the way down to 0 RPM,
and when the mains is restored, the application
3 3
Note: is ramped up from 0 RPM to the previous
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque reference speed via the normal ramp up). If the
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. energy in the DC-link disappears before the
motor is ramped to zero, the motor is coasted.
Option: Function:
Limitation:
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure is typically used
See the introduction text in
where very short mains interruptions (voltage
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
dips) are present. At 100% load and a short
voltage interruption, the DC voltage on the main [2] Ctrl. This selection is similar to selection [1] except
capacitors drops quickly. For larger frequency ramp- that in [2] a reset is necessary for starting up
converters it only takes a few milliseconds before down, after power-up.
the DC level is down to about 373 V DC and the trip Limitation:
IGBTs cut off and looses the control over the See the introduction text in
motor. When mains is restored, and the IGBTs parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
start again, the output frequency and voltage [3] Coasting Centrifuges can run for an hour without power
vector does not correspond to the speed/ supply. In those situations, it is possible to select
frequency of the motor, and the result is a coast function at mains interruption, together
normally an overvoltage or overcurrent, mostly with a flying start which occurs when the mains
resulting in a trip lock. Parameter 14-10 Mains is restored.
Failure can be programmed to avoid this
[4] Kinetic Kinetic back-up ensures that the frequency
situation.
back-up converter keeps running as long as there is
Select the function to which the frequency energy in the system due to the inertia from
converter must act when the threshold in motor and load. This is done by converting the
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault has mechanical energy to the DC-link and thereby
been reached. maintaining control of the frequency converter
NOTICE and motor. This can extend the controlled
operation, depending on the inertia in the
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure cannot be
system. For fans it is typically several seconds, for
changed while motor is running.
pumps up to 2 seconds and for compressors only
for a fraction of a second. Many industry
[0] No The frequency converter does not compensate applications can extend controlled operation for
* function for a mains interruption. The voltage on the DC many seconds, which is often enough time for
link drops quickly and motor control is lost the mains to return.
within milliseconds to seconds. Trip lock is the
130BC918.10
result. UDC [V]

A B C DE A
UDC
[1] Ctrl. The frequency converter remains control of the
14-11*1.35
ramp- motor and does a controlled ramp down from
n [RPM] t [S]
down parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault Ref
level. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [0] Off or
[2] AC brake, the ramp follows the Overvoltage t [S]
Ramping. If parameter 2-10 Brake Function is [1]

Resistor Brake the ramp follows the setting in A Normal operation
parameter 3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time. This B Mains failure
selection is particularly useful in pump C Kinetic back-up
applications, where the inertia is low and the D Mains return
friction is high. When mains is restored, the E Normal Operation: ramping
output frequency ramps the motor up to the
reference speed (if the mains interruption is Illustration 3.53 Kinetick Back-up
prolonged, the controlled ramp down might take
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 143

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Note: Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
3 3 The DC-level during [4] Kinetic back-up is
130BC920.10
A B C D
UDC [V]
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault * 790 V
1.35. UDC
If the mains do not return UDC is maintained as 14-11*1.35

t [S]
n [RPM]
long as possible by ramping the speed down

Ref
towards 0 RPM. Finally the frequency converter
coasts. 0
t [S]
If the mains return while in kinetic, back-up UDC

increases above parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at A Normal Operation
Mains Fault*1.35. This is detected in one of the B Mains failure
following ways. C Kinetic back-up
1. If UDC > parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage D Trip

at Mains Fault*1.35*1.05
Illustration 3.54 Kinetic Back-up Trip
2. If the speed is above the reference. This
is relevant if the mains come back at a
lower level than before, e.g.
Limitation:
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains
See the introduction text in
Fault*1.35*1.02. This does not fulfil the
parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
criterion in point one and the frequency
converter tries to reduce UDC to [6] Alarm
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains [7] Kin. Kinetic back-up with recovery combines the
Fault*1.35 by increasing the speed. This back-up, features of kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
will not succeed as the mains cannot be trip w with trip. This feature makes it possible to select
lowered. recovery between kinetic back-up and kinetic back-up
3. If running motoric. The same with trip, based on a recovery speed, config-
mechanism as in point 2, but where the urable in parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
inertia prevents that the speed goes Recovery Level to enable detection of mains
above the reference speed. This leads to returning. If mains do not return, the frequency
the motor running motoric until the converter ramps down to 0 RPM and trips. If
speed is above the reference speed and mains return while in kinetic back-up at a speed
the situation in point 2 occurs. Instead above the value in parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup
of waiting for that criterion 3 is Trip Recovery Level, normal operation is resumed.
introduced. This is equal to [4] Kinetic Back-up. The DC-level
during [7] Kinetic back-up is
[5] Kinetic The difference between kinetic back-up with and parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault*
back-up, without trip is that the latter always ramps down 1,35.
trip to 0 RPM and trip, regardless of whether mains
return or not.
The function does not detect if mains return. This
is the reason for the relatively high level on the
DC-link during ramp down.
144 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

14-10 Mains Failure 14-10 Mains Failure

Note: Note:
Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque Options [1], [2], [5], [7] are not active when the option [2] Torque
is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode. is selected in parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode.
A B C DA E
3 3
130BC922.10
A B C D E F
130BC924.10
UDC [V]
UDC[V]
UDC
UDC
14-11*1.35 UDC
t [S] 14-11*1.35
n [RPM] t [s]
n [RPM]
Ref
Ref
14-15
t [S]
0
t [s]
A Normal Operation
B Mains failure A Normal Operation
C Kinetic back-up B Mains failure
D Mains return C Kinetic back-up
E Normal operation: ramping D Mains return
E Kinetic back-up ramping to trip
Illustration 3.55 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with F Trip
recovery where mains return above
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Illustration 3.57 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with
Level. recovery where mains return below
parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery
Level. In this illustration a quick ramp is used.
If mains return while in kinetic back-up at a
speed below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level the frequency converter ramps Limitation:
down to 0 RPM using the ramp and then trips. If See the introduction text in
the ramp is slower than the system ramps down parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
on its own, the ramping is done motoric and UDC
is at the normal level (UDC, m*1.35).
A B C D E F
130BC923.10
UDC[V]
UDC
14-11*1.35 t [S]
n [RPM]
Ref
0
t [S]
A Normal Operation
B Mains failure
C Kinetic back-up
D Mains return
E Kinetic back-up, ramping to trip
F Trip
Illustration 3.56 [7] Kinetic Back-Up, trip with

recovery, trip slow ramp where mains return
below parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip
Recovery Level. In this illustration a slow ramp
is used.
If the ramp is quicker than the systems ramp

down on, the ramping is done generatoric. This
results in a higher UDC which is limited using the
brake chopper/resistor brake.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 145

14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault 14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level
Size [180 - This parameter defines the threshold voltage parameter 0-02 Motor Speed
related* 600 V] at which the selected function in 14-10 Mains Unit.
Failure should be activated. It may be
3 3 considered to select 90% of the nominal

mains as the detection level, depending on
3.15.3 14-16 Kin. Backup Gain
the supply quality. For a supply of 380 V
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault 14-16 Kin. Backup Gain
should thus be set to 342 V. This results in a Range: Function:
DC detection level of 462 V 100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the Kinetic Backup Gain value in
(parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault percent.
* 1.35)
NOTICE 3.15.4 14-2* Trip Reset

Note for converting between VLT 5000
and FC 300: Parameters for configuring auto reset handling, special trip
Even though the setting of the Mains handling and control card self test or initialisation.
Voltage at Mains Fault is the same for
VLT 5000 and FC 300, the detection 14-20 Reset Mode
level is different. Use the following Option: Function:
formula to obtain the same detection Select the reset function after
level as in VLT 5000: tripping. Once reset, the frequency
parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage at converter can be restarted.
Mains Fault (VLT 5000 level) = Value
[0] * Manual reset Select [0] Manual reset, to perform a
used in VLT 5000 * 1,35/sqrt(2).
reset via [Reset] or via the digital
inputs.
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [1] Automatic reset x 1 Select [1]-[12] Automatic reset x 1
Operation under severe main imbalance conditions reduces the x20 to perform between one and 20
lifetime of the motor. Conditions are considered severe if the automatic resets after tripping.
motor is operated continuously near nominal load (e.g. a pump [2] Automatic reset x 2
or fan running near full speed). [3] Automatic reset x 3
Option: Function: [4] Automatic reset x 4
[0] * Trip Trips the frequency [5] Automatic reset x 5
converter [6] Automatic reset x 6
[1] Warning Issues a warning [7] Automatic reset x 7

[8] Automatic reset x 8
[2] Disabled No action
14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out
Range: Function: [12] Automatic reset x 20
60 s* [0 - 60 This parameter defines the Kinetic Backup Time [13] Infinite auto reset Select [13] Infinite Automatic Reset for
s] Out in flux mode when running on low voltage continuous resetting after tripping.
grids. If the supply voltage does not increase
above the value defined in 14-11 Mains Voltage [14] Reset at power-up
at Mains Fault +5% within the specified time, the
NOTICE
drive will then automatically run a controlled
ramp-down profile before stopping. The motor may start without warning. If the specified
number of AUTOMATIC RESETs is reached within 10
14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level minutes, the frequency converter enters [0] Manual reset
mode. After the Manual reset is performed, the setting
Range: Function:
of 14-20 Reset Mode reverts to the original selection. If
Size [ 0 - 60000.000 This parameter specifies the the number of automatic resets is not reached within 10
related* ReferenceFeed- Kinetic Backup Trip Recovery minutes, or when a Manual reset is performed, the
backUnit] Level. The unit is defined in internal AUTOMATIC RESET counter returns to zero.
146 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

NOTICE 14-22 Operation Mode

Automatic reset is also active for resetting Safe Torque Option: Function:
Off function in firmware version < 4.3x. If the test is OK
LCP read-out: Control Card OK.
14-21 Automatic Restart Time Disconnect the mains supply and remove the
Range: Function:
test plug. The green LED on the Control Card
lights up.
3 3
10 s* [0 - 600 s] Enter the time interval from trip to start of
If the test fails
the automatic reset function. This parameter
LCP read-out: Control Card I/O failure.
is active when 14-20 Reset Mode is set to [1] -
Replace the frequency converter or Control
[13] Automatic reset.
card. The red LED on the Control Card is
NOTICE turned on. Test plugs (connect the following

terminals to each other): 18 - 27 - 32; 19 - 29 -
Remember to set switches S201 (A53) and S202 (A54) as 33; 42 - 53 - 54
specified below when performing a control card test in
130BA097.12
parameter 14-22 Operation Mode [1]. Otherwise, the test
12 13 18 19 27 29 32 33 20 37
fails. FC 302
14-22 Operation Mode

Option: Function:
12 13 18 19 27 32 33 20
Use this parameter to specify normal FC 301
operation; to perform tests; or to initialise all
parameters except parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
parameter 15-04 Over Temp's and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. This function is
39 42 50 53 54 55
active only when the power is cycled to the FC 301 &
FC 302
Select [0] Normal operation for normal
operation of the frequency converter with the Illustration 3.58 Test Plugs
motor in the selected application.
Select [1] Control card test to test the analog
and digital inputs and outputs and the +10 V Select [2] Initialisation to reset all parameter
control voltage. The test requires a test values to default settings, except for
connector with internal connections. Use the parameter 15-03 Power Up's,
following procedure for the control card test: parameter 15-04 Over Temp's, and
parameter 15-05 Over Volt's. The frequency
1. Select [1] Control card test.
converter resets during the next power-up.
2. Disconnect the mains supply and Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode also reverts to
wait for the light in the display to go the default setting [0] Normal operation.
out.
[0] Normal
3. Set switches S201 (A53) and S202 * operation
(A54) = ON/I. [1] Control
4. Insert the test plug (see card test
Illustration 3.58). [2] Initiali-
sation
5. Connect to mains supply.
[3] Boot mode
6. Carry out various tests.
7. The results are displayed on the LCP 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit
and the frequency converter moves Range: Function:
into an infinite loop. 60 s* [0 - Enter the current limit trip delay in seconds. When
8. Parameter 14-22 Operation Mode is 60 s] the output current reaches the current limit
automatically set to Normal (parameter 4-18 Current Limit), a warning is
operation. Carry out a power cycle to triggered. When the current limit warning has
start up in Normal operation after a been continuously present for the period specified
control card test. in this parameter, the frequency converter trips. To
run continuously in current limit without tripping,
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 147

14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit 3.15.5 14-3* Current Limit Control
Range: Function:
set the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal The frequency converter features an integral Current Limit
monitoring of the frequency converter still remains Controller, which is activated when the motor current, and
active. thus the torque, is higher than the torque limits set in
parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and
3 3 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode.
When the current limit is reached during motor operation
Range: Function:
or regenerative operation, the frequency converter tries to
60 s* [0 - Enter the torque limit trip delay in seconds. When reduce torque below the preset torque limits as quickly as
60 s] the output torque reaches the torque limits possible without losing control of the motor.
(parameter 4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode and While the current control is active, the frequency converter
parameter 4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode), a can only be stopped by setting a digital input to [2] Coast
warning is triggered. When the torque limit inverse or [3] Coast and reset inv. Any signals on terminals
warning has been continuously present for the 18 to 33 are not active until thefrequency converter is no
period specified in this parameter, the frequency longer near the current limit.
converter trips. Disable the trip delay by setting By using a digital input set to [2] Coast inverse or [3] Coast
the parameter to 60 s = Off. Thermal monitoring and reset inv., the motor does not use the ramp-down
of the frequency converter still remains active. time, since the frequency converter is coasted. If a quick
stop is necessary, use the mechanical brake control
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault function along with an external electro-mechanical brake
Range: Function: attached to the application.
Size [ 0 - 35 When the frequency converter detects
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain
related* s] an overvoltage in the set time, trip is
effected after the set time. Range: Function:
If value = 0, protection mode is disabled 100 %* [0 - 500 %] Enter the proportional gain value for the
current limit controller. Selection of a high
NOTICE value makes the controller react faster. Too
It is recommended to disable high a setting leads to controller
protection mode in hoisting instability.
applications.
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time
Range: Function:
14-28 Production Settings
Size related* [0.002 - 2 s] Controls the current limit control
Range: Function: integration time. Setting it to a
0* [No action] lower value makes it react faster. A
1 [Service reset] setting too low leads to control
[2] Set Production Mode instability.
14-29 Service Code

14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [-2147483647 - 2147483647 ] For internal service only.
Size [1 - Controls the current limit control low-pass
related* 100 ms] filter.
This makes it possible to react to peak
values or to average values. When
selecting average values it is sometimes
possible to run with higher output current
and in stead trip on the hardware limit for
current. However, the control reacts slower
as it does not react on immediate values.
14-35 Stall Protection

Option: Function:
Parameter 14-35 Stall Protection is active in Flux
mode only.
148 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

14-35 Stall Protection NOTICE

Option: Function: This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
[0] Disabled Disables stall protection in field-weakening flux Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
mode and might cause the motor to be lost.
[1] * Enabled Enables stall protection in field-weakening flux 14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency
mode. Range: Function: 3 3
10 Hz* [5 - 40 Hz] Enter the minimum frequency at which the
14-36 Fieldweakening Function Automatic Energy Optimisation (AEO) is to
Select the field weakening function mode in Flux mode. be active.
Range: Function:
0* [Auto] In this mode, the frequency converter calculates the NOTICE
optimal torque output. This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor
Measured DC-link voltage determines the phase-to- Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
phase motor voltage. Magnetising reference is
based on the actual voltage and utilises the 14-43 Motor Cosphi
information about the model of the motor.
Range: Function:
1 [1/x] The frequency converter reduces torque output. Size [0.40 - The Cos(phi) setpoint is automatically set
The frequency converter sets the magnetising related* 0.95 ] for optimum AEO performance. This
reference inversely proportional to the speed using parameter should normally not be
a static curve that represents the relationship altered. However in some situations it
between DC-link voltage and the speed. may be necessary to enter a new value
to fine-tune.
3.15.6 14-4* Energy Optimising

3.15.7 14-5* Environment
Parameters for adjusting the energy optimisation level in
both Variable Torque (VT) and Automatic Energy Optimi- These parameters help the frequency converter to operate
sation (AEO) mode in parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics. under special environmental conditions.
14-40 VT Level 14-50 RFI Filter
Range: Function: This parameter is available for FC 302 only. It is not relevant to
66 %* [40 - 90 NOTICE FC 301 due to different design and shorter motor cables.
%]
This parameter cannot be adjusted Option: Function:
while the motor is running. [0] Off Select [0] Off if the frequency converter is fed by an
isolated mains source (IT mains).
Enter the level of motor magnetisation at low If a filter is used, select [0] Off during charging to
speed. Selection of a low value reduces prevent a high leakage current making the RCD switch.
energy loss in the motor, but also reduces In this mode, the internal RFI filter capacitors between
load capability. chassis and the mains RFI filter circuit are cut-out to
reduce the ground capacity currents.
NOTICE [1] On Select [1] On to ensure that the frequency converter
This parameter is not active when 1-10 Motor complies with EMC standards.
Construction is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation

Range: Function:
Size [40 - 75 Enter the minimum allowable magneti-
related* %] sation for AEO. Selection of a low value
reduces energy loss in the motor, but
can also reduce resistance to sudden
load changes.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 149

14-52 Fan Control
130BB908.10
Select minimum speed of the main fan.
Option: Function:
environments and prevent the negative effects of
this further cooling and avoid warning 66.
3 3 14-53 Fan Monitor

Option: Function:
Select which reaction the frequency converter
Illustration 3.59 RFI Filter should take in case a fan fault is detected.
[0] Disabled
[1] Warning
14-51 DC Link Compensation [2] Trip
Option: Function:
14-55 Output Filter
The rectified AC-DC voltage at the frequency
Option: Function:
converter's DC link is associated with voltage ripples.
These ripples can increase in magnitude with increased NOTICE
load. These ripples are undesirable because they can This parameter cannot be adjusted while
generate current and torque ripples. A compensation motor is running.
method is used to reduce these voltage ripples at DC
link. In general, DC link compensation is recommended
Select the type of output filter connected.
for most applications, but care must be taken when
operating in field weakening as it can generate speed [0] No This is the default setting and should be used with
oscillations at the motor shaft. In field weakening, it is * Filter dU/dt filters or high-frequency common-mode (HF-
recommended to turn DC link compensation off. CM) filters.
[0] Off Disables DC Link Compensation. [1] Sine- This setting is only for backwards compatibility. It
Wave enables operation with FLUX control principle when
[1] On Enables DC Link Compensation.
Filter the parameters parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output
Filter and parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter
14-52 Fan Control are programmed with the output filter capacitance
Select minimum speed of the main fan. and inductance. It DOES NOT limit the range of the
Option: Function: switching frequency.
[0] * Auto Select [0] Auto to run fan only when internal [2] Sine- This parameter sets a minimum allowed limit to the
temperature in frequency converter is in range Wave switching frequency and ensures that the filter is
35 C to approx. 55 C. Filter operated within the safe range of switching
Fan runs at low speed below 35 C, and at full Fixed frequencies. Operation is possible with all control
speed at approx. 55 C. principles. For FLUX control principle the parameters
parameter 14-56 Capacitance Output Filter and
[1] On 50% The fan always runs at 50% speed or above. The
parameter 14-57 Inductance Output Filter have to be
fan runs at 50% speed at 35 C, and at full speed
programmed (these parameters have no effect in
at approx. 55 C.
VVCplus and U/f). The modulation pattern is set to
[2] On 75% The fan always runs at 75% speed or above. The SFAVM which gives the lowest acoustic noise in the
fan runs at 75% speed at 35 C, and at full speed filter.
at approx. 55 C. Note:
[3] On The fan runs at 100% speed always. Reset the frequency converter after selecting [2]
100% Sine-Wafe Filter Fixed.
[4] Auto
(Low
This selection is the same as [0] Auto but with
special considerations around and below 0C. In
CAUTION
temp selection [0] Auto there is a risk that the fan Always set parameter 14-55 Output Filter to
env.) starts running around 0 C as the frequency [2] Sine-wave fixed when using a sine-wave
converter detects a sensor fault and thus protect filter. Failure to do so can result in
the frequency converter while reporting warning overheating of the frequency converter,
66 "Heatsink Temperature Low". Selection [4] which can result in personal injury and
Auto (Low temp env.) can be used in very cold equipment damage.
150 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

14-56 Capacitance Output Filter 3.15.9 14-8* Options

Compensation function of the LC-filter requires the per phase
equivalent star-connected capacitance of the filter (3 times the 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC
capacity between 2 phases when capacitance is Delta Option: Function:
connection).
[0] No Select [0] No to use the frequency converter's 24 V DC
Range:
Size related* [0.1 - 6500
Function:
Set the capacitance of the output
supply.
3 3
[1] * Yes Select [1] Yes if an external 24 V DC supply is used to
uF] filter. The value can be found on the
power the option. Inputs/Outputs are galvanically
filter label.
isolated from the frequency converter when operated
NOTICE from an external supply.
This is required for correct

compensation in Flux mode
NOTICE
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control This parameter is only changing function by performing
Principle) a power cycle.
14-88 Option Data Storage

14-57 Inductance Output Filter
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] This parameter stores options data over a
Size [0.001 - Set the inductance of the output filter.
power cycle.
related* 65 mH] The value can be found on the filter
label.
14-89 Option Detection
NOTICE Selects the behaviour of the frequency converter when a change
This is required for correct in the option configuration is detected.
compensation in Flux mode Option: Function:
(parameter 1-01 Motor Control [0] * Protect Option Freezes the current settings and
Principle) Config. prevents unwanted changes when
missing or defective options are
detected.
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units
[1] Enable Option Changes frequency converter settings
Range: Function:
Change and is used when modifying the
Size related* [1 - 1 ] Set the actual number of power units. system configuration. This parameter
setting returns to [0] Protect Option
Config. after an Option Change.
3.15.8 14-7* Compatibility
14-90 Fault Level
The parameters in this group are for setting of compati-
bility for VLT 3000, VLT 5000 to FC 300. Use this parameter to customise fault levels.
Option: Function:
14-72 VLT Alarm Word
[0] Off Use [0] Off with caution as it ignores all
Option: Function:
Warnings & Alarms for the selected source.
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the alarm word corresponding to
VLT 5000. [1] Warning
[2] Trip Changing a fault level from default option
14-73 VLT Warning Word [3] Trip Lock to [2] Trip leads to the
Option: Function: automatic reset of the alarm. For alarms
[0] 0 - 4294967295 Read out the warning word corresponding involving over-current, the frequency
to VLT 5000. converter has a hardware protection that
issues a 3 minute recovery after 2
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word consecutive over-current incidents, this
Range: Function: hardware protection cannot be overruled.
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Read out the ext. status word [3] Trip Lock
corresponding to VLT 5000 [4] Trip w.
delayed reset
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 151

Failure Alarm Off Warning Trip Trip Lock

10 V low 1 X D
24 V low 47 X D
1.8 V supply low 48 X D
Voltage limit 64 X D
3 3 Earth fault during ramping

Earth fault 2 during cont. operation
14
45
D
D
X
X
Torque Limit 12 X D
Over Current 13 X D
Short Circuit 16 X D
Heatsink temperature 29 X D
Heatsink sensor 39 X D
Control card temperature 65 X D
Power card temperature 69 2) X D
Heatsink temperature1) 244 X D
Heatsink sensor 1) 245 X D
Power card temperature 1) 247
Motor phase missing 30-32 X D
Locked rotor 99 X D
Table 3.24 Selection of Choice of Action when Selected Alarm Appears

D = Default setting
x = possible selection
1) Only high power drives
2) In small and medium power frequency converters A69 is only a warning
152 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.16 Parameters: 15-** Drive Information 15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
Option: Function:
3.16.1 15-0* Operating Data
[1] Reset Select [1] Reset and press [OK] to reset the
counter Running Hours counter to zero (see
15-00 Operating hours parameter 15-01 Running Hours). This
Range:
0 h*
Function:
[0 - 2147483647 h] View how many hours the frequency
parameter cannot be selected via the serial
port, RS-485.
3 3
converter has run. The value is saved Select [0] Do not reset if no reset of the
when the frequency converter is Running Hours counter is desired.
turned off.
15-01 Running Hours

3.16.2 15-1* Data Log Settings
Range: Function:
The Data Log enables continuous logging of up to 4 data
0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the motor has sources (15-10 Logging Source) at individual rates
h] run. Reset the counter in 15-07 Reset (parameter 15-11 Logging Interval). A trigger event
Running Hours Counter. The value is (15-12 Trigger Event) and window (15-14 Samples Before
saved when the frequency converter is Trigger) are used to start and stop the logging
turned off. conditionally.
15-02 kWh Counter 15-10 Logging Source

Range: Function: Array [4]
0 kWh* [0 - Registering the power consumption of Option: Function:

2147483647 the motor as a mean value over one Select which variables
kWh] hour. Reset the counter in are to be logged.
parameter 15-06 Reset kWh Counter.
[0] * None
[15] Readout: actual setup
15-03 Power Up's
Range: Function: [1473] Legacy Warning Word
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] View the number of times the frequency [1474] Leg. Ext. Status Word
converter has been powered up.
[1600] Control Word
[1601] Reference [Unit]
15-04 Over Temp's
[1602] Reference %
Range: Function: [1603] Status Word
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1610] Power [kW]
temperature faults which have occurred. [1611] Power [hp]
[1612] Motor Voltage
15-05 Over Volt's [1613] Frequency
Range: Function: [1614] Motor current
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the number of frequency converter [1616] Torque [Nm]
overvoltages which have occurred. [1617] Speed [RPM]
[1618] Motor Thermal
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [1621] Torque [%] High Res.
Option: Function: [1622] Torque [%]
[0] Do not reset No reset of the kWh counter is desired. [1624] Calibrated Stator Resistance
[1] Reset counter Press [OK] to reset the kWh counter to zero [1625] Torque [Nm] High
(see parameter 15-02 kWh Counter). [1630] DC Link Voltage
[1632] Brake Energy /s
NOTICE [1633] Brake Energy /2 min
[1634] Heatsink Temp.
The reset is carried out by pressing [OK].
[1635] Inverter Thermal
[1648] Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter
[1650] External Reference
Option: Function: [1651] Pulse Reference
[0] * Do not [1652] Feedback[Unit]
reset
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 153

15-10 Logging Source 15-12 Trigger Event

Array [4] Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a
Option: Function: window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the
[1657] Feedback [RPM]
trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger).
[1660] Digital Input
3 3 [1662] Analog Input 53
[1664] Analog Input 54
Option:
[20] Alarm (trip)
Function:
[1665] Analog Output 42 [mA] [21] Alarm (trip lock)

[1666] Digital Output [bin] [22] Comparator 0
[1675] Analog In X30/11 [23] Comparator 1
[1676] Analog In X30/12 [24] Comparator 2
[1677] Analog Out X30/8 [mA] [25] Comparator 3
[1689] Configurable Alarm/Warning Word [26] Logic rule 0
[1690] Alarm Word [27] Logic rule 1
[1692] Warning Word [28] Logic rule 2
[1694] Ext. Status Word [29] Logic rule 3
[1860] Digital Input 2 [33] Digital input DI18
[3110] Bypass Status Word [34] Digital input DI19
[3470] MCO Alarm Word 1 [35] Digital input DI27
[3471] MCO Alarm Word 2 [36] Digital input DI29
15-11 Logging Interval [38] Digital input DI33
Array [4] [50] Comparator 4
Range: Function: [51] Comparator 5
Size related* [ 0.000 - Enter the interval in milliseconds [60] Logic rule 4
0.000 ] between each sampling of the [61] Logic rule 5
variables to be logged.
15-13 Logging Mode
15-12 Trigger Event Option: Function:
Select the trigger event. When the trigger event occurs, a [0] Log always Select [0] Log always for continuous logging.
window is applied to freeze the log. The log then retains a [1] Log once on Select [1] Log once on trigger to conditionally
specified percentage of samples before the occurrence of the trigger start and stop logging using 15-12 Trigger
trigger event (parameter 15-14 Samples Before Trigger). Event and 15-14 Samples Before Trigger.
Option: Function:
[0] * False 15-14 Samples Before Trigger
[1] True Range: Function:
[2] Running 50* [0 - Enter the percentage of all samples before a
[3] In range 100 ] trigger event which are to be retained in the
[4] On reference log. See also parameter 15-12 Trigger Event and
[5] Torque limit parameter 15-13 Logging Mode.
[6] Current Limit
[8] Below I low
[9] Above I high
[15] Above feedb. high
[17] Mains out of range
[18] Reversing
[19] Warning
154 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.16.3 15-2* Historic Log 15-21 Historic Log: Value

Array [50]
View up to 50 logged data items via the array parameters
Range: Function:
in this parameter group. For all parameters in the group,
Alarm word Decimal value. See
[0] is the most recent data and [49] the oldest data. Data is
16-90 Alarm Word for
logged every time an event occurs (not to be confused
with SLC events). Events in this context are defined as a
Status word
description.
Decimal value. See
3 3
change in one of the following areas
parameter 16-03 Status
Word for description after
1. Digital input
converting to binary
2. Digital outputs (not monitored in this SW release) value.
3. Warning word Control word Decimal value. See
parameter 16-00 Control
4. Alarm word Word for description.
5. Status word Extended Decimal value. See
6. Control word status word parameter 16-94 Ext.
Status Word for
7. Extended status word description.
Events are logged with value, and time stamp in ms. The
time interval between 2 events depends on how often
events occur (maximum once every scan time). Data 15-22 Historic Log: Time
logging is continuous, but if an alarm occurs, the log is Array [50]
saved and the values can be viewed on the display. This Range: Function:
feature is useful, for example when carrying out service
0 ms* [0 - 2147483647 View the time at which the logged
following a trip. View the historic log contained in this
ms] event occurred. Time is measured in
parameter via the serial communication port or via the
ms since frequency converter start. The
display.
max. value corresponds to approx. 24
15-20 Historic Log: Event days which means that the count
Array [50] restarts at zero after this time period.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 255 ] View the event type of the logged events. 3.16.4 15-3* Alarm Log
15-21 Historic Log: Value Parameters in this group are array parameters, where up to
Array [50] 10 fault logs can be viewed. [0] is the most recent logged
Range: Function: data, and [9] the oldest. Error codes, values, and time
stamp can be viewed for all logged data.
0* [0 - View the value of the logged event.
2147483647 ] Interpret the event values according to this 15-30 Fault Log: Error Code
table: Array [10]
Digtal input Decimal value. See Range: Function:

parameter 16-60 Digital 0* [0 - 255 ] View the error code and look up its meaning in
Input for description after chapter 5 Troubleshooting.
converting to binary
value. 15-31 Alarm Log: Value
Digital output Decimal value. See Array [10]
(not parameter 16-66 Digital
Range: Function:
monitored in Output [bin] for
0* [-32767 - 32767 ] View an extra description of the error.
this SW description after
This parameter is mostly used in
release) converting to binary
combination with alarm 38 internal
value.
fault.
Warning word Decimal value. See
16-92 Warning Word for
description.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 155

15-32 Alarm Log: Time 15-47 Power Card Ordering No

Range: Function: 0* [0 - 8 ] View the power card ordering number.
0 s* [0 - 2147483647 s] View the time when the logged event
occurred. Time is measured in seconds 15-48 LCP Id No
3 3 from frequency converter start-up. Range:

0* [0 - 20 ]
Function:
View the LCP ID number.
3.16.5 15-4* Drive Identification 15-49 SW ID Control Card
Parameters containing read only information about the Range: Function:

hardware and software configuration of the frequency 0* [0 - 20 ] View the control card software version number.
converter.
15-50 SW ID Power Card
15-40 FC Type
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the power card software version number.
0* [0 - 6 ] View the frequency converter type. The read-out is
identical to the FC 300 Series power field of the 15-51 Frequency Converter Serial Number
type code definition, characters 1-6.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 10 ] View the frequency converter serial number.
15-41 Power Section
Range: Function:
15-53 Power Card Serial Number
0* [0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the
Range: Function:
FC 300 Series power field of the type code
0* [0 - 19 ] View the power card serial number.
definition, characters 7-10.
15-42 Voltage 15-58 Smart Setup Filename

Size related* [0 - 20 ] Shows the currently used smart
0* [0 - 20 ] View the FC type. The read-out is identical to the
application setup filename.
FC 300 Series power field of the type code
definition, characters 11-12.
15-59 CSIV Filename
15-43 Software Version Range: Function:
Range: Function: Size related* [0 - 16 ] Shows the currently used CSIV
(Costumer Specific Initial Values)
0* [0 - 5 ] View the combined SW version (or package
filename.
version) consisting of power SW and control SW.
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 3.16.6 15-6* Option Ident.

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40 ] View the type code string used for re-ordering the This read-only parameter group contains information about
frequency converter in its original configuration. the hardware and software configuration of the options
installed in slots A, B, C0 and C1.
15-45 Actual Typecode String
15-60 Option Mounted
Range: Function:
Array [8]
0* [0 - 40 ] View the actual type code string.
Range: Function:
15-46 Frequency Converter Ordering No 0* [0 - 30 ] View the installed option type.
Range: Function:
15-61 Option SW Version
0* [0 - 8 ] View the 8-digit ordering number used for re-
Array [8]
ordering the frequency converter in its original
configuration. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 20 ] View the installed option software version.
156 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

15-62 Option Ordering No 15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version

Range: Function: 0* [0 - 20 ] Displays the software version for the installed
0* [0 - 8 ] Shows the ordering number for the installed option in option slot C.
options.
15-63 Option Serial No

15-80 Fan Running Hours
Range: Function:
3 3
Array [8] 0 h* [0 - 2147483647 View how many hours the heatsink
Range: Function: h] fan has run (increments for each
hour). The value is saved when the
0* [0 - 18 ] View the installed option serial number.
frequency converter is turned off.
15-70 Option in Slot A

15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] View the type code string for the option installed
0 h* [0 - 99999 Enter value to preset the Fan Running
in slot A, and a translation of the type code
h] Hours counter, see parameter 15-80 Fan
string. E.g. for type code string AX the translation
Running Hours.
is No option.
This parameter cannot be selected via the
serial port, RS-485.
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version
Range: Function: 15-89 Configuration Change Counter
0* [0 - 20 ] View the software version for the option installed
Range: Function:
in slot A.
0* [0 - 65535 ] NOTICE
15-72 Option in Slot B This parameter cannot be adjusted while
Range: Function: the motor is running.
in slot B, and a translation of the type code string.
E.g. for type code string BX the translation is No 3.16.7 15-9* Parameter Info
option.
15-92 Defined Parameters

15-73 Slot B Option SW Version
Array [1000]
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of all defined parameters in the
in slot B.
frequency converter. The list ends with 0.
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0

15-93 Modified Parameters
Range: Function:
Array [1000]
in slot C, and a translation of the type code string. Range: Function:
E.g. for type code string CXXXX the translation is 0* [0 - 9999 ] View a list of the parameters that have been
No option. changed from their default setting. The list
ends with 0. Changes may not be visible until
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version up to 30 s after implementation.
Range: Function:
15-98 Drive Identification
in slot C. Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40 ] This parameter contains data that is used by the
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 MCT 10 Set-up Software.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] Displays the type code string for the option in
slot C1. (CXXXX if no option) and the translation
i.e. >No option<.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 157

15-99 Parameter Metadata

Array [30]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 9999 ] This parameter contains data used by the MCT
10 Set-up Software.
3 3
158 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.17 Parameters: 16-** Data Read-outs 3.17.1 16-1* Motor Status

16-00 Control Word 16-10 Power [kW]
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the Control word sent from the 0 kW* [0 - Displays motor power in kW. The value shown
frequency converter via the serial communi-
cation port in hex code.
10000
kW]
is calculated based on the actual motor
voltage and motor current. The value is
3 3
filtered, and therefore approx. 30 ms may pass
16-01 Reference [Unit] from when an input value changes to when
Range: Function: the data readout values change. The
0 ReferenceFeed- [-999999 - 999999 View the present resolution of readout value on fieldbus is in
backUnit* ReferenceFeed- reference value applied 10 W steps.
backUnit] on impulse or analog
basis in the unit 16-11 Power [hp]
resulting from the Range: Function:
configuration selected in 0 hp* [0 - View the motor power in hp. The value
1-00 Configuration Mode 10000 hp] shown is calculated based on the actual
(Hz, Nm, or RPM). motor voltage and motor current. The value
is filtered, and therefore approximately 30 ms
16-02 Reference [%] may pass from when an input value changes
Range: Function: to when the data readout values change.
0 %* [-200 - 200 View the total reference. The total reference
%] is the sum of digital, analog, preset, bus, 16-12 Motor Voltage
and freeze references, plus catch-up and Range: Function:
slow-down. 0 V* [0 - 6000 V] View the motor voltage, a calculated value
used for controlling the motor.
16-03 Status Word
Range: Function: 16-13 Frequency
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the status word sent from the frequency Range: Function:
converter via the serial communication port in 0 Hz* [0 - 6500 Hz] View the motor frequency, without
hex code. resonance dampening.
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 16-14 Motor current

0 %* [-100 - 100 %] View the 2-byte word sent with the status 0 A* [0 - 10000 View the motor current measured as a mean
word to the Bus Master reporting the A] value, IRMS. The value is filtered, and thus
Main Actual Value. approximately 30 ms may pass from when an
input value changes to when the data
16-09 Custom Readout readout values change.
Range: Function:
0 CustomRea- [0 - 0 Custom- View the value of custom 16-15 Frequency [%]
doutUnit* ReadoutUnit] readout from Range: Function:
parameter 0-30 Unit for User- 0 %* [-100 - View a 2-byte word reporting the actual motor
defined Readout to 100 %] frequency (without resonance dampening) as a
parameter 0-32 Custom Readout percentage (scale 0000-4000 Hex) of
Max Value parameter 4-19 Max Output Frequency. Set
9-16 PCD Read Configuration index 1 to send it
with the status word instead of the MAV.
16-16 Torque [Nm]

Range: Function:
0 [-3000 View the torque value with sign, applied to the
Nm* - 3000 motor shaft. Linearity is not exact between
Nm] 160% motor current and torque in relation to
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 159

16-16 Torque [Nm] 16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance

the rated torque. Some motors supply more 0.0000 Ohm* [0.0000 - 100.0000 Displays the Calibrated
than 160% torque. Consequently, the min. Ohm] Stator Resistance.
value and the max. value depend on the max.
3 3 motor current as well as the motor used. The

value is filtered, and thus approx. 30 ms may
16-25 Torque [Nm] High
Range: Function:
pass from when an input changes value to
0 [-200000000 View the torque value with sign, applied
when the data readout values change.
Nm* - 200000000 to the motor shaft. Some motors supply
Nm] more than 160% torque. Consequently,
16-17 Speed [RPM]
the min. value and the max. value
Range: Function: depend on the max. motor current as
0 RPM* [-30000 - View the actual motor RPM. In open loop well as the motor used. This specific
30000 RPM] or closed loop process control, the readout has been adapted to be able to
motor RPM is estimated. In speed closed show higher values than the standard
loop modes the motor RPM is measured. readout in parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm].
16-18 Motor Thermal

3.17.2 16-3* Drive Status
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 View the calculated thermal load on the
16-30 DC Link Voltage
%] motor. The cut-out limit is 100%. The basis for
calculation is the ETR function selected in Range: Function:
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. 0 V* [0 - 10000 V] View a measured value. The value is filtered
with a 30 ms time constant.
16-19 KTY sensor temperature
Range: Function: 16-32 Brake Energy /s
0 C* [0 - 0 C] Returning the actual temperature on KTY Range: Function:
sensor built into the motor. 0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] View the brake power transmitted to an
See parameter group 1-9* Motor Temperature. external brake resistor, stated as an
instantaneous value.
16-20 Motor Angle
Range: Function: 16-33 Brake Energy /2 min
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the current encoder/resolver angle offset Range: Function:
relative to the index position. The value range 0 kW* [0 - 10000 View the brake power transmitted to an
of 0-65535 corresponds to 0-2*pi (radians). kW] external brake resistor. The mean power
is calculated on an average basis for the
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. most recent 120 s.
Range: Function:
16-34 Heatsink Temp.
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] The value shown is the torque in percent
of nominal torque, with sign and 0.1% Range: Function:
resolution, applied to the motor shaft. 0 C* [0 - 255 View the frequency converter heatsink
C] temperature. The cut-out limit is 90 5 C,
16-22 Torque [%] and the motor cuts back in at 60 5 C.
Range: Function:
16-35 Inverter Thermal
0 %* [-200 - 200 %] Value shown is the torque in percent of
nominal torque, with sign, applied to the Range: Function:
motor shaft. 0 %* [0 - 100 %] View the percentage load on the inverter.
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 16-36 Inv. Nom. Current

0 kW* [0 - 10000 kW] Read-out of the mechanical power Size [0.01 - View the inverter nominal current,
applied to the motor shaft. related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate
data on the connected motor. The
160 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

16-36 Inv. Nom. Current 16-47 Motor Phase W Current

data are used for calculation of motor currents , detection of weak motor
torque, motor protection, etc. cables or imbalance in motor windings.
16-37 Inv. Max. Current

Range: Function:
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM]
Range: Function:
3 3
Size [0.01 - View the inverter maximum current, 0 RPM* [-30000 - 30000 This parameter specifies the
related* 10000 A] which must match the nameplate RPM] reference given to the frequency
data on the connected motor. The converter after the speed ramp.
data are used for calculation of
torque, motor protection, etc. 16-49 Current Fault Source
Range: Function:
16-38 SL Controller State
0* [0 - 8 ] Value indicates source of current faults including
Range: Function: short circuit, over current, and phase imbalance
0* [0 - 100 ] View the state of the event under execution by (from left):
the SL controller. 1-4 Inverter
5-8 Rectifier
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 No fault recorded
Range: Function:
0 C* [0 - 100 C] View the temperature on the control card, 3.17.3 16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
stated in C
16-50 External Reference

16-40 Logging Buffer Full
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the total reference, the sum of digital,
View whether the logging buffer is full (see parameter
analog, preset, bus and freeze references, plus
group 15-1* Data Log Settings). The logging buffer is
catch-up and slow-down.
never full when setting parameter 15-13 Logging Mode
to [0] Log always.
16-51 Pulse Reference
[0] No Range: Function:
[1] Yes
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the reference value from programmed
16-41 Logging Buffer Full digital input(s). The readout can also reflect
the impulses from an incremental encoder.
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 50 ]
16-52 Feedback[Unit]
16-45 Motor Phase U Current Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0 Reference- [-999999.999 - View the feedback unit
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase URMS current. FeedbackUnit* 999999.999 resulting from the selection
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the ReferenceFeed- of unit and scaling in
motor currents, detection of weak motor backUnit] parameter 3-00 Reference
cables or imbalance in motor windings. Range,
parameter 3-01 Reference/
16-46 Motor Phase V Current Feedback Unit,
parameter 3-02 Minimum
Range: Function:
Reference and
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase VRMS current. parameter 3-03 Maximum
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the Reference.
motor currents, detection of weak motor
cables or imbalance in motor windings. 16-53 Digi Pot Reference
Range: Function:
16-47 Motor Phase W Current
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the contribution of the Digital Potenti-
Range: Function:
ometer to the actual reference.
0 A* [0 - 10000 A] Displays the Motor Phase WRMS current.
Facilitates monitoring of imbalance in the
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 161

16-57 Feedback [RPM] 16-62 Analog Input 53

0 RPM* [-30000 - Read-out parameter where the actual 0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 53.
30000 motor RPM from the feed-back source can
RPM] be read in both closed loop and open 16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting
3 3 loop. The feed-back source is selected by

parameter 7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source.
Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 54.
[0] Current
3.17.4 16-6* Inputs and Outputs [1] Voltage
16-64 Analog Input 54

16-60 Digital Input
Range: Function:
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input 54.
0 [0 - View the signal states from the active digital inputs.
* 1023 ] Example: Input 18 corresponds to bit no. 5, 0 = no
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA]
signal, 1 = connected signal. Bit 6 works in the
opposite way, on = '0', off = '1' (safe stop input). Range: Function:
0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output 42 in mA. The
Bit 0 Digital input term. 33 value shown reflects the selection in 6-50 Terminal
Bit 1 Digital input term. 32 42 Output.
Bit 2 Digital input term. 29
Bit 3 Digital input term. 27 16-66 Digital Output [bin]
Bit 4 Digital input term. 19 Range: Function:
0* [0 - 15 ] View the binary value of all digital outputs.
Bit 7 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/4 16-67 Pulse Input #29 [Hz]
Bit 8 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/3
Range: Function:
Bit 9 Digital input GP I/O term. X30/2
0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual frequency rate on terminal
Bit 10-63 Reserved for future terminals
29.
Table 3.25 Active Digital Inputs
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz]
Range: Function:
0* [0 - 130000 ] View the actual value of the frequency
applied at terminal 33 as an impulse input.
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz]

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses applied to
terminal 27 in digital output mode.
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz]

Range: Function:
Illustration 3.60 Relay Settings 0* [0 - 40000 ] View the actual value of pulses at terminal 29
in digital output mode.
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting

Option: Function:
View the setting of input terminal 53.
[0] Current
[1] Voltage
162 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

16-71 Relay Output [bin] 16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA]

0* [0 - 511 ] View the settings of all relays. 0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at input X30/8 in mA.
16-78 Analog Out X45/1 [mA]

Range:
0*
Function:
[0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output X45/1. The value
3 3
shown reflects the selection in 6-70 Terminal X45/1
Output.
16-79 Analog Out X45/3 [mA]

Range: Function:
Illustration 3.62 Relay Settings 0* [0 - 30 ] View the actual value at output X45/3. The value
shown reflects the selection in 6-80 Terminal X45/3
Output.
16-72 Counter A
Range: Function:
3.17.5 16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of Counter A.
Parameters for reporting the BUS references and control
- 2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator operands,
words.
see parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand.
The value can be reset or changed either via 16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Range: Function:
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
0* [0 - View the 2-byte control word (CTW) received
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
65535 ] from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the
control word depends on the fieldbus option
16-73 Counter B installed and the control word profile selected
Range: Function: in 8-10 Control Profile.
0* [-2147483648 View the present value of Counter B. For more information, refer to the relevant
- 2147483647 ] Counters are useful as comparator operands fieldbus manual.
(parameter 13-10 Comparator Operand).
The value can be reset or changed either via 16-82 Fieldbus REF 1
digital inputs (parameter group 5-1* Digital Range: Function:
Inputs) or by using an SLC action
0* [-200 - 200 ] View the 2-byte word sent with the control
(parameter 13-52 SL Controller Action).
word from the Bus-Master to set the
reference value.
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter For more information, refer to the relevant
Range: Function: fieldbus manual.
0* [0 - 2147483647 ] Returns the actual counter value of
precise counter (parameter 1-84 Precise 16-84 Comm. Option STW
Stop Counter Value). Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the extended fieldbus comm. option
16-75 Analog In X30/11 status word.
Range: Function: For more information, refer to the relevant
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/11 of MCB fieldbus manual.
101.
16-85 FC Port CTW 1
16-76 Analog In X30/12 Range: Function:
Range: Function: 0* [0 - 65535 ] View the two-byte control word (CTW)
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual value at input X30/12 of MCB received from the Bus-Master. Interpretation of
101. the control word depends on the fieldbus
option installed and the control word profile
selected in 8-10 Control Profile.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 163

16-86 FC Port REF 1 16-94 Ext. Status Word

0* [-200 - View the two-byte status word (STW) sent to 0* [0 - 4294967295 ] Returns the extended warning word sent
200 ] the Bus-Master. Interpretation of the status via the serial communication port in hex
word depends on the fieldbus option installed code.
3 3 and the control word profile selected in

8-10 Control Profile.
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] Alarm and Warning numbers in hex as
displayed in the Alarm log. The High byte
contains the Alarm, the Low byte the Warning.
The Alarm number is the first one that
occurred after the last reset.
16-89 Configurable Alarm/Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] This Alarm/Warning word is configured in
parameter parameter 8-17 Configurable
Alarm and Warningword to match the
actual requirements.
3.17.6 16-9* Diagnosis Read-Outs
NOTICE
When using MCT 10 Set-up Software, the readout
parameters can only be read online, i.e. as the actual
status. This means that the status is not stored in the
MCT 10 Set-up Software file.
16-90 Alarm Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
communication port in hex code.
16-91 Alarm Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the alarm word sent via the serial
16-92 Warning Word

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the
serial communication port in hex code.
16-93 Warning Word 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 4294967295 ] View the warning word sent via the serial
164 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.18 Parameters: 17-** Motor Feedb. 17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev)

Option Range: Function:
Size [4 - Select the resolution of the absolute
Additional parameters to configure the Encoder (MCB 102)
related* 131072 ] encoder, i.e. the number of counts per
or the Resolver (MCB 103) Feedback Option.
revolution.
3.18.1 17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface

The value depends on setting in
parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection.
3 3
Parameters in this group configure the incremental 17-24 SSI Data Length
interface of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the Range: Function:
incremental and absolute interfaces are active at the same
13* [13 - 25 ] Set the number of bits for the SSI telegram.
time.
Choose 13 bits for single-turn encoders and 25
bits for multi-turn encoder.
NOTICE
These parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is 17-25 Clock Rate
running. Range: Function:
Size related* [ 100 - 260 Set the SSI clock rate. With long
17-10 Signal Type kHz] encoder cables the clock rate must
be reduced.
Select the incremental type (A/B channel) of the encoder in use.
Find the information on the encoder data sheet.
Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an absolute encoder
17-26 SSI Data Format
only. Option: Function:
Option: Function: [0] * Gray code
[1] Binary code Set the data format of the SSI data. Choose
[0] None
between Gray or Binary format.
[1] * RS422 (5V TTL)
[2] Sinusoidal 1Vpp
17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate
17-11 Resolution (PPR) Option: Function:
Range: Function: NOTICE
1024* [10 - 10000 ] Enter the resolution of the incremental
This parameter cannot be adjusted while the
track, i.e. the number of pulses or periods
motor is running.
per revolution.
Select the baud rate of the attached encoder.

3.18.2 17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface The parameter is only accessible when
parameter 17-20 Protocol Selection is set to [1]
Parameters in this group configure the absolute interface HIPERFACE.
of the MCB 102 option. Note that both the incremental [0] 600
and absolute interfaces are active at the same time. [1] 1200
17-20 Protocol Selection [2] 2400
[3] 4800
Option: Function:
[4] * 9600
NOTICE [5] 19200
This parameter cannot be adjusted while [6] 38400
[0] * None Select [0] None if the feedback sensor is an

incremental encoder only.
[1] HIPERFACE Select [1] HIPERFACE if the encoder is absolute

only.
[2] EnDat
[4] SSI
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 165

3.18.3 17-5* Resolver Interface 17-59 Resolver Interface

Activate the MCB 103 resolver option when the resolver
This parameter group is used for setting parameters for parameters are selected.
the Resolver Option MCB 103. To avoid damage to resolvers parameter 17-50 Poles
Usually the resolver feedback is used as motor feedback parameter 17-53 Transformation Ratio must be adjusted before
from Permanent Magnet motors with parameter 1-01 Motor
3 3 Control Principle set to Flux with motor feedback.
activating this parameter.
Option: Function:
Resolver parameters cannot be adjusted while the motor is
[0] * Disabled
running.
[1] Enabled
17-50 Poles
Range: Function: 3.18.4 17-6* Monitoring and Application
2* [2 - 8 ] Set the number of poles on the resolver.
The value is stated in the data sheet for resolvers. This parameter group is for selecting additional functions
when Encoder option MCB 102 or Resolver Option MCB
17-51 Input Voltage 103 is fitted into option slot B as speed feedback.
Range: Function: Monitoring and Application parameters cannot be adjusted
7 V* [2 - 8 V] Set the input voltage to the resolver. The while the motor is running.
voltage is stated as RMS value. 17-60 Feedback Direction
The value is stated in the data sheet for
Option: Function:
resolvers
NOTICE
17-52 Input Frequency This parameter cannot be adjusted
Range: Function: while the motor is running.
10 kHz* [2 - 15 kHz] Set the input frequency to the resolver.
The value is stated in the data sheet for Change the detected encoder rotation
resolvers. direction without changing the wiring to
the encoder.
17-53 Transformation Ratio [0] * Clockwise
Range: Function: [1] Counter
0.5* [0.1 - 1.1 ] Set the transformation ratio for the resolver. clockwise
The transformation ration is:
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring
VOut
Tratio =
VIn Select which reaction the frequency converter should take in
The value is stated in the data sheet for case a faulty encoder signal is detected.
resolvers. The encoder function in parameter 17-61 Feedback Signal
Monitoring is an electrical check of the hardware circuit in the
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution encoder system.
Set the resolution and activate the encoder emulation function Option: Function:
(generation of encoder signals from the measured position from [0] Disabled
a resolver). Needed when necessary to transfer the speed or [1] * Warning
position information from one frequency converter to another.
[2] Trip
To disable the function, select [0] Disabled.
[3] Jog
Option: Function: [4] Freeze Output
[0] * Disabled [5] Max Speed
[1] 512 [6] Switch to Open Loop
[2] 1024 [7] Select Setup 1
[10] Select Setup 4
[11] stop & trip
166 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.19 Parameters: 18-** Data Readouts 2

18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA]
Range: Function:
0* [-20 - 20 ] View the actual current measured at input X48/2.
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 3 3

Range: Function:
0* [-500 - View the actual temperature measured at input
500 ] X48/4. The temperature unit is based on the
selection in parameter 35-00 Term. X48/4
Temperature Unit.
18-38 Temp. Input X48/7

Range: Function:
Temperature Unit.
18-39 Temp. Input X48/10

Range: Function:
Temperature Unit.
18-60 Digital Input 2

Range: Function:
0* [0 - 65535 ] View the signal states from the active digital
inputs. '0' = no signal, '1' = connected signal.
18-90 Process PID Error

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
18-91 Process PID Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
18-93 Process PID Gain Scaled Output

Range: Function:
0 %* [-200 - 200 %]
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 167

3.20 Parameters: 30-** Special Features 30-00 Wobble Mode

Option: Function:
3.20.1 30-0* Wobble Function
[3] Rel. Freq.,
Up/ Down
The wobble function is primarily used for synthetic yarn
Time
winding applications. The wobble option is to be installed
3 3 in the frequency converter controlling the traverse drive.
3.20.2 Center Frequency
The yarn moves back and forth in a diamond pattern
across the surface of the yarn package. To prevent a build-
up of yarn at the same points at the surface, this pattern NOTICE
must be altered. The wobble option can accomplish this The setting of Center Frequency takes place via the
by continuously varying the traverse velocity in a normal reference handling parameter group, 3-1*
programmable cycle. The wobble function is created by References.
superimposing a delta frequency around a center
frequency. To compensate for the inertia in the system a
quick frequency jump can be included. Especially suitable 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz]
for elastic yarn applications the option features a Range: Function:
randomized wobble ratio. 5 Hz* [0 - The delta frequency is determining the magnitude
25 of the wobble frequency. The delta frequency is
Frequency Hz] superimposed on the center frequency.
175ZB001.10
Par. 30-07: WOBB TIME

[Hz]
Par. 30-06: JUMP TIME parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] is
Par. 30-04 [Hz]: JUMP FREQ
Par. 30-01 [Hz]: DELTA FREQ.
Par. 30-09 [%] : JUMP FREQ selecting both the positive and negative delta
Par. 30-02 [%]: DELTA FREQ.
(Par. 30-03) frequency. The setting of parameter 30-01 Wobble
Par. 30-01 [Hz]
Par. 30-02 [%] Delta Frequency [Hz] must thus not be higher than
(Par. 30-03:)
CENTER FREQ
Par. 30-*1: RAMP UP Par. 30-09: RANDOM FUNC
Par 30-11: RANDOM MAX
the setting of the center frequency. The initial
Par 30-12: RANDOM MIN
TDOWN TUP ramp up time from standstill until the wobble
Par. 30-10: [RATIO TUP/ TDOWN ]
Par. 30-08: [INDEPENDENT UP and DOWN]
sequence is running is determined by parameter
Time [s] group 3-1* References.
Illustration 3.63 Wobble Function
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%]
Range: Function:
30-00 Wobble Mode 25 %* [0 - 100 The delta frequency can also be expressed as
Option: Function: %] percentage of the center frequency and can
thus be maximum 100%. The function is the
NOTICE same as for parameter 30-01 Wobble Delta
This parameter cannot be adjusted while Frequency [Hz].
running.
30-03 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling Resource
The standard speed open loop mode in Option: Function:
parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode is extended Select which frequency converter
with a wobble function. In this parameter it is input should be used to scale the
possible to select which method to be used for delta frequency setting.
the wobbler. The parameters can be set as
[0] * No function
absolute values (direct frequencies) or as
relative values (percentage of other parameter). [1] Analog Input 53
The wobble cycle time can be set as an [2] Analog Input 54
absolute alue or as independent up- and down [3] Frequency input 29 FC 302 only
times. When using an absolute cycle time, the [4] Frequency input 33
up- and down times are configured through [7] Analog Input X30/11
the wobble ratio.
[0] Abs. Freq., [15] Analog Input X48/2
* Abs. Time
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]
[1] Abs. Freq.,
Up/ Down Range: Function:
Time 0 Hz* [0 - The jump frequency is used to compensate for
[2] Rel. Freq., 20.0 the inertia in the traverse system. If a jump in
Abs. Time Hz]
168 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz] 30-12 Wobble Random Ratio Min.
the output frequency is required in the top and 0.1* [ 0.1 - par. 30-11 ] Enter the minimum allowed wobble
in the bottom of the wobble sequence, the ratio.
frequency jump is set in this parameter. If the
traverse system has a very high inertia a high
jump frequency may create a torque limit
30-19 Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
Range: Function:
3 3
warning or trip (warning/alarm 12) or an
0 Hz* [0 - 1000 Hz] Readout parameter. View the actual
overvoltage warning or trip (warning/alarm 7).
wobble delta frequency after scaling has
This parameter can only be changed in stop-
been applied.
mode
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 3.20.3 30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
Range: Function:
0 %* [0 - 100 The jump frequency can also be expressed as 30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s]
%] percentage of the center frequency. The Range: Function:
function is the same as for Size related* [0 - 60 s] High starting torque time for PM-Motor
parameter 30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz]. in Flux mode without feedback. This
parameter is available for FC 302 only.
30-06 Wobble Jump Time
Range: Function: 30-21 High Starting Torque Current [%]
Size related* [ 0.005 - 5.000 s] Range: Function:
Size related* [ 0 - 200.0 %] High starting torque current for
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time
PM-Motor in and Flux mode
Range: Function:
without feedback. This parameter is
10 s* [1 - 1000 s] This parameter determines the wobble available for FC 302 only.
sequence period. This parameter can only be
changed in stop-mode. 30-22 Locked Rotor Protection
Wobble time = tup + tdown
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM
motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVC Plus open loop
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time
mode.
Range: Function:
Option: Function:
5 s* [0.1 - 1000 s] Defines the individual up- and down times
[0] * Off
for each wobble cycle.
[1] On Protects the motor from the Locked Rotor condition.
The control algorithm detects a possible locked rotor
30-09 Wobble Random Function
condition in motor and trips the frequency converter
Option: Function: to protect the motor.
[0] * Off
[1] On 30-23 Locked Rotor Detection Time [s]
This parameter is available for FC 302 only. Available for PM
30-10 Wobble Ratio
motors only, in Flux Sensorless mode and VVC Plus open loop
Range: Function:
mode.
1* [0.1 - 10 ] If the ratio 0.1 is selected: tdown is 10 times
Range: Function:
greater than tup.
Size related* [0.05 - 1 s] Time period for detecting the locked
If the ratio 10 is selected: tup is 10 times greater
rotor condition. A low parameter
than tdown.
value leads to faster detection.
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max.

30-24 Locked Rotor Detection Speed Error [%]
Range: Function:
10* [ par. 17-53 - 10 ] Enter the maximum allowed wobble
ratio. Range: Function:
25 %* [0 - 100 %]
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 169

3.20.4 30-8* Compatibility
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld)

Range: Function:
Size [0.000 - Enter the value of the d-axis
3 3 related* 1000.000 mH] inductance. Obtain the value from

the permanent magnet motor data
sheet. The d-axis inductance cannot
be found by performing an AMA.
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm)

Range: Function:
Size [ 0.01 - Set the brake resistor value in . This
related* 65535.00 value is used for monitoring the power
Ohm] to the brake resistor in
parameter 2-13 Brake Power Monitoring.
This parameter is only active in
frequency converters with an integral
dynamic brake.
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
Size related* [0 - 1 ] Enter the speed controller proportional
gain. Quick control is obtained at high
amplification. However if amplification is
too great, the process may become
unstable.
30-84 Process PID Proportional Gain

Range: Function:
0.100* [0 - 10 ] Enter the process controller proportional gain.
Quick control is obtained at high amplification.
However if amplification is too great, the
process may become unstable.
170 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

3.21 Parameters: 35-** Sensor Input Option 35-06 Temperature Sensor Alarm Function
Select the alarm function:
3.21.1 35-0* Temp. Input Mode (MCB 114)
Option: Function:
[0] Off
35-00 Term. X48/4 Temperature Unit
[2] Stop
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/4 settings
and readouts:
[5] * Stop and trip 3 3
Option: Function:
3.21.2 35-1* Temp. Input X48/4 (MCB 114)
[60] * C
[160] F
35-14 Term. X48/4 Filter Time Constant
35-01 Term. X48/4 Input Type Range: Function:
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/4: 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
Option: Function: s] first-order digital low pass filter time
constant for suppressing electrical noise
[0] * Not Connected
in terminal X48/4. A high time constant
[1] PT100 2-wire
value improves dampening but also
[3] PT1000 2-wire
increases the time delay through the
[5] PT100 3-wire
filter.
[7] PT1000 3-wire
35-02 Term. X48/7 Temperature Unit 35-15 Term. X48/4 Temp. Monitor
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/7 settings This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
and readouts: temperature monitor for terminal X48/4. The temperature limits
can be set in parameter 35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit and
Option: Function:
parameter 35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit.
[60] * C
Option: Function:
[160] F
[0] * Disabled
35-03 Term. X48/7 Input Type [1] Enabled
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/7:
35-16 Term. X48/4 Low Temp. Limit
Option: Function:
Range: Function:
[0] * Not Connected
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
[1] PT100 2-wire
35-17 ] reading that is expected for
[3] PT1000 2-wire
normal operation of the
[5] PT100 3-wire temperature sensor at terminal
[7] PT1000 3-wire X48/4.
35-04 Term. X48/10 Temperature Unit

35-17 Term. X48/4 High Temp. Limit
Select the unit to be used with temperature input X48/10
Range: Function:
settings and readouts:
Size related* [ par. 35-16 - Enter the maximum temperature
Option: Function:
204 ] reading that is expected for
[60] * C
[160] F temperature sensor at terminal
X48/4.
35-05 Term. X48/10 Input Type
View the temperature sensor type detected at input X48/10:
Option: Function: 3.21.3 35-2* Temp. Input X48/7 (MCB 114)
[0] * Not Connected
[1] PT100 2-wire 35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant
[3] PT1000 2-wire Range: Function:
[5] PT100 3-wire 0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
[7] PT1000 3-wire s] first-order digital lowpass filter time
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 171

35-24 Term. X48/7 Filter Time Constant 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit
increases the time delay through the Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
filter. 35-37 ] reading that is expected for
3 3 35-25 Term. X48/7 Temp. Monitor

This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the
temperature sensor at terminal
X48/10.
temperature monitor for terminal X48/7. The temperature limits
can be set in parameter 35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit and 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit
parameter 35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit. Range: Function:
Option: Function: Size related* [ par. 35-36 - Enter the maximum temperature
[0] * Disabled 204 ] reading that is expected for
[1] Enabled normal operation of the
35-26 Term. X48/7 Low Temp. Limit X48/10.
Range: Function:
Size related* [ -50 - par. Enter the minimum temperature
3.21.5 35-4* Analog Input X48/2 (MCB 114)
35-27 ] reading that is expected for
35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current
X48/7. Range: Function:
4 mA* [ 0 - par. Enter the current (mA) that corresponds to
35-27 Term. X48/7 High Temp. Limit 35-43 mA] the low reference value, set in
Range: Function: parameter 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb.
Value. The value must be set at >2 mA in
Size related* [ par. 35-26 - Enter the maximum temperature
order to activate the Live Zero Time-out
204 ] reading that is expected for
Function in parameter 6-01 Live Zero Timeout
Function.
X48/7.
35-43 Term. X48/2 High Current
Range: Function:
3.21.4 35-3* Temp. Input X48/10 (MCB 114) 20 mA* [ par. 35-42 Enter the current (mA) that corresponds
- 20 mA] to the high reference value (set in
35-34 Term. X48/10 Filter Time Constant parameter 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./
Range: Function: Feedb. Value).
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
s] first-order digital low pass filter time 35-44 Term. X48/2 Low Ref./Feedb. Value
constant for suppressing electrical noise Range: Function:
in terminal X48/10. A high time constant 0* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value (in
value improves dampening but also 999999.999 ] RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds to
increases the time delay through the the voltage or current set in
filter. parameter 35-42 Term. X48/2 Low Current.
35-35 Term. X48/10 Temp. Monitor 35-45 Term. X48/2 High Ref./Feedb. Value
This parameter gives the possibility of enabling or disabling the Range: Function:
temperature monitor for terminal X48/10. The temperature limits 100* [-999999.999 - Enter the reference or feedback value
can be set in parameter 35-36 Term. X48/10 Low Temp. Limit/ 999999.999 ] (in RPM, Hz, bar, etc.) that corresponds
parameter 35-37 Term. X48/10 High Temp. Limit. to the voltage or current set in
Option: Function: parameter 35-43 Term. X48/2 High
[0] * Disabled Current.
[1] Enabled
Range: Function:
0.001 s* [0.001 - 10 Enter the filter time constant. This is a
s] first-order digital low pass filter time
172 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Range: Function:
increases the time delay through the
filter.
3 3
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 173

Parameter Lists VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
4 Parameter Lists
4.1 Parameter Lists and Options

4.1.1 Introduction
Frequency converter series

4 4 All = valid for FC 301 and FC 302 series
01 = valid for FC 301 only
02 = valid for FC 302 only
Changes during operation
TRUE means that the parameter can be changed while
the frequency converter is in operation and FALSE means
that the frequency converter must be stopped before a
change can be made.
4-Set-up
'All set-ups': the parameter can be set individually in each
of the four set-ups, i. e. one single parameter can have
four different data values.
1 set-up: data value is the same in all set-ups.
Data Description Type

type
2 Integer 8 Int8
3 Integer 16 Int16
4 Integer 32 Int32
5 Unsigned 8 Uint8
6 Unsigned 16 Uint16
7 Unsigned 32 Uint32
9 Visible String VisStr
33 Normalized value 2 bytes N2
35 Bit sequence of 16 boolean variables V2
54 Time difference w/o date TimD
Table 4.1 Data Type
174 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4.1.2 Conversion Conversion index Conversion factor

100
The various attributes of each parameter are displayed in 75
factory setting. Parameter values are transferred as whole 74
numbers only. Conversion factors are therefore used to 67
transfer decimals. 6 1000000
5 100000
4-12 Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz] has a conversion factor of 4 10000
0.1. To preset the minimum frequency to 10 Hz, transfer
the value 100. A conversion factor of 0.1 means that the
3
2
1000
100
4 4
value transferred is multiplied by 0.1. The value 100 is 1 10
therefore read as 10.0. 0 1
-1 0.1
Examples: -2 0.01
0 s conversion index 0 -3 0.001
0.00 s conversion index -2 -4 0.0001
0 ms conversion index -3 -5 0.00001
0.00 ms conversion index -5 -6 0.000001
-7 0.0000001
Table 4.2 Conversion Table
4.1.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes
+ = active
- = not active
Parameter 1-10 Motor

AC motor PM non-salient motor
Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
Parameter 1-01 Motor U/f Flux U/f Flux
VVCplus motor VVCplus motor
Control Principle mode sensorless mode sensorless
feedback feedback
0-** Operation and Display (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 1-00 Configuration Mode
[0] Speed Open Loop + + + -
[1] Speed Closed Loop - + - +
[2] Torque - - - +
[3] Process + + + -
[4] Torque Open Loop - + - -
[5] Wobble + + + +
[6] Surface Winder + + + -
[7] Ext. PID Open Loop + + + -
[8] Ext. PID Closed Loop - + - +
Parameter 1-02 Flux Motor

- - - +
Feedback Source
Parameter 1-03 Torque Charac- + + +
-
teristics see 1, 2, 3) see 1, 3, 4) see 1, 3, 4)
Parameter 1-04 Overload

+ + + + + + +
Mode
Parameter 1-05 Local Mode
+ + + + + + +
Configuration
Parameter 1-06 Clockwise
+ + + + + + +
Direction
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 175


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-20 Motor Power
[kW] + + + +
(Par. 023 = International)
Parameter 1-21 Motor Power
4 4 [HP] + + + +
(Par. 023 = US)
Parameter 1-22 Motor Voltage + + + +
+ + + +
Frequency
Parameter 1-24 Motor Current + + + +
Parameter 1-25 Motor Nominal
+ + + +
Speed
Parameter 1-26 Motor Cont.
- - - - + + +
Rated Torque
Parameter 1-29 Automatic
+ + + +
Motor Adaptation (AMA)
Parameter 1-30 Stator
+ + + + +
Resistance (Rs)
Parameter 1-31 Rotor +
- + +
Resistance (Rr) see 5)
Parameter 1-33 Stator Leakage

+ + + + +
Reactance (X1)
Parameter 1-34 Rotor Leakage +
- + +
Reactance (X2) see 5)
Parameter 1-35 Main

+ + + + +
Reactance (Xh)
Parameter 1-36 Iron Loss
- - + + - - -
Resistance (Rfe)
Parameter 1-37 d-axis
- - - - + +
Inductance (Ld)
Parameter 1-39 Motor Poles + + + +
Parameter 1-40 Back EMF at
- - - - + + +
1000 RPM
Parameter 1-41 Motor Angle
- - - - +
Offset
1-50 Motor Magnetisation at
- + - - - - -
Zero Speed
1-51 Min Speed Normal
Magnetising [RPM](Par. 002 = - + - - - - -
rmp)
Parameter 1-52 Min Speed
Normal Magnetising [Hz](Par. - + - - - - -
002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-53 Model Shift
- - + + - + +
Frequency
Parameter 1-54 Voltage +
- - + - - -
reduction in fieldweakening see 6)
Parameter 1-55 U/f Charac-

+ - - - + - -
teristic - U
176 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-56 U/f Charac-
+ - - - + - -
teristic - F
Parameter 1-58 Flystart Test
- + - - - - -
Pulses Current
Parameter 1-59 Flystart Test
- + - - - - -
4 4
Pulses Frequency
Parameter 1-60 Low Speed
- + - - - - -
Load Compensation
Parameter 1-61 High Speed
- + - - - - -
Load Compensation
Parameter 1-62 Slip Compen- +
- + - - - -
sation see 7)
1-63 Slip Compensation Time + + + +

+ - -
Constant see 8) see 8) see 8) see 8)
1-64 Resonance Damping + + + - + + -

1-65 Resonance Damping Time
+ + + - + + -
Constant
Parameter 1-66 Min. Current at
- - + + - + +
Low Speed
Parameter 1-67 Load Type - - + - - - -
Parameter 1-68 Minimum
- - + - - - -
Inertia
Parameter 1-69 Maximum
- - + - - - -
Inertia
Parameter 1-71 Start Delay + + + + + + +
Parameter 1-72 Start Function + + + + + + +
Parameter 1-73 Flying Start - + + + - - -
Parameter 1-74 Start Speed
- + - - - - -
[RPM](Par. 002 = rmp)
Parameter 1-75 Start Speed
- + - - - - -
[Hz](Par. 002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-76 Start Current - + - - - - -
Parameter 1-80 Function at
+ + + + + + +
Stop
1-81 Min Speed for Function
at Stop [RPM] + + + + + + +
(Par. 002 = rpm)
1-82 Min Speed for Function
at Stop [Hz] + + + + + + +
(Par. 002 = Hz)
Parameter 1-83 Precise Stop
+ + + + + + +
Function
+ + + + + + +
Counter Value
+ + + + + + +
Speed Compensation Delay
Parameter 1-90 Motor Thermal
+ + + +
Protection
1-91 Motor External Fan + + + +
1-93 Thermistor Resource + + + +
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 177


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 1-95 KTY Sensor
+ + + +
Type
Parameter 1-96 KTY Thermistor
+ + + +
Resource
4 4 Parameter 1-97 KTY Threshold
+ + + +
level
Parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR
+ + + +
interpol. points freq.
Parameter 1-99 ATEX ETR
+ + + +
interpol points current
Parameter 2-00 DC Hold
+ + + +
Current
Parameter 2-01 DC Brake
+ + + +
Current
2-02 DC Braking Time + + + +
Parameter 2-03 DC Brake Cut
+ + + +
In Speed [RPM]
Parameter 2-04 DC Brake Cut
+ + + +
In Speed [Hz]
Parameter 2-05 Maximum
+ + + +
Reference
Parameter 2-10 Brake Function +
9)
+ + +
see
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) + + + +
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) + + + +
Parameter 2-13 Brake Power
+ + + +
Monitoring
Parameter 2-15 Brake Check +
9)
+ + +
see
Parameter 2-16 AC brake Max.
- + + +
Current
Parameter 2-17 Over-voltage
+ + + +
Control
Parameter 2-18 Brake Check
+ + + +
Condition
Parameter 2-19 Over-voltage
+ + + -
Gain
Parameter 2-20 Release Brake
+ + + +
Current
Parameter 2-21 Activate Brake
+ + + +
Speed [RPM]
+ + + +
Speed [Hz]
+ + + +
Delay
Parameter 2-24 Stop Delay - - - +
Parameter 2-25 Brake Release
- - - +
Time
Parameter 2-26 Torque Ref - - - + +
178 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
Parameter 2-27 Torque Ramp
- - - +
Up Time
Parameter 2-28 Gain Boost
- - - + +
Factor
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time + + 4 4
2-30 Position P Start Propor-
+ +
tional Gain
2-31 Speed PID Start Propor-
+ +
tional Gain
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral
+ +
Time
2-33 Speed PID Start Lowpass
+ +
Filter Time
3-** Reference/Ramps (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 4-10 Motor Speed
+ + + +
Direction
+ + + +
Low Limit [RPM]
+ + + +
Low Limit [Hz]
+ + + +
High Limit [RPM]
+ + + +
High Limit [Hz]
Parameter 4-16 Torque Limit
+ + + +
Motor Mode
+ + + +
Generator Mode
Parameter 4-18 Current Limit + + + +
Parameter 4-19 Max Output
+ + + +
Frequency
+ + + +
Factor Source
4-21 Speed Limit Factor 10) 11)
- + see - + see
Source
Parameter 4-30 Motor 12) 12)
- + see - + see
Feedback Loss Function
- + see - + see
Feedback Speed Error
- + see - + see
Feedback Loss Timeout
Parameter 4-34 Tracking Error
+ + + +
Function
Parameter 4-35 Tracking Error + + + +
+ + + +
Timeout
+ + + +
Ramping
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 179


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
+ + + +
Ramping Timeout
+ + + +
After Ramping Timeout
4 4 Parameter 4-50 Warning
+ + + +
Current Low
Parameter 4-51 Warning
+ + + +
Current High
Parameter 4-52 Warning Speed
+ + + +
Low
Parameter 4-53 Warning Speed
+ + + +
High
+ + + +
Reference Low
+ + + +
Reference High
+ + + +
Feedback Low
+ + + +
Feedback High
Parameter 4-58 Missing Motor
+ + + +
Phase Function
Parameter 4-60 Bypass Speed
+ + + +
From [RPM]
+ + + +
From [Hz]
+ + + +
To [RPM]
+ + + +
To [Hz]
5-** Digital In/Out (all
parameters except 5-70 and + + + +
71)
Parameter 5-70 Term 32/33 12)
- + see - +
Pulses Per Revolution
Parameter 5-71 Term 32/33 12)
- + see - +
Encoder Direction
6-** Analog In/Out (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 7-00 Speed PID 12)
- + see - +
Feedback Source
- + see + +
Proportional Gain
- + see + +
Integral Time
- + see + +
Differentiation Time
Parameter 7-05 Speed PID Diff. 12)
- + see + +
Gain Limit
180 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
- + see + +
Lowpass Filter Time
- + see - +
Feedback Gear Ratio
Parameter 7-08 Speed PID
- + see 12) - -
4 4
Feed Forward Factor
Parameter 7-12 Torque PI 10)
- + see - -
Proportional Gain
Parameter 7-13 Torque PI 10)
- + see - -
Integration Time
Parameter 7-20 Process CL
+ + + +
Feedback 1 Resource
Parameter 7-22 Process CL
+ + + +
Feedback 2 Resource
Parameter 7-30 Process PID
+ + + +
Normal/ Inverse Control
+ + + +
Anti Windup
+ + + +
Start Speed
+ + + +
Proportional Gain
+ + + +
Integral Time
+ + + +
Differentiation Time
+ + + +
Diff. Gain Limit
+ + + +
Feed Forward Factor
Parameter 7-39 On Reference
+ + + +
Bandwidth
Parameter 7-40 Process PID I-
+ + + +
part Reset
+ + + +
Output Neg. Clamp
+ + + +
Output Pos. Clamp
+ + + +
Gain Scale at Min. Ref.
+ + + +
Gain Scale at Max. Ref.
+ + + +
Feed Fwd Resource
+ + + +
Feed Fwd Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
Parameter 7-48 PCD Feed
+ + + +
Forward
+ + + +
Output Normal/ Inv. Ctrl.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 181


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
+ + + +
Extended PID
+ + + +
Feed Fwd Gain
4 4 Parameter 7-52 Process PID
+ + + +
Feed Fwd Ramp up
+ + + +
Feed Fwd Ramp down
+ + + +
Ref. Filter Time
Parameter 7-57 Process PID Fb.
+ + + +
Filter Time
8-** Communications and
+ + + +
Options (all parameters)
13-** Smart Logic Control (all
+ + + +
parameters)
Parameter 14-00 Switching
+ + + +
Pattern
Parameter 14-01 Switching
+ + + +
Frequency
Parameter 14-03 Overmodu-
+ + + +
lation
Parameter 14-04 PWM Random + + + +
Parameter 14-06 Dead Time
+ + + +
Compensation
Parameter 14-10 Mains Failure
[0] No function + + + +
[1] Ctrl. rampdown - + + +
[2] Ctrl. rampdown, trip - + + +
[3] Coasting + + + +
[4] Kinetic back-up - + + +
[5] Kinetic back-up, trip - + + +
[6] Alarm + + + +
Parameter 14-11 Mains Voltage
+ + + +
at Mains Fault
Parameter 14-12 Function at
+ + + +
Mains Imbalance
Parameter 14-14 Kin. Backup
- - + +
Time Out
Parameter 14-15 Kin. Backup
+ + + +
Trip Recovery Level
Parameter 14-20 Reset Mode + + + +
Parameter 14-21 Automatic
+ + + +
Restart Time
Parameter 14-22 Operation
+ + + +
Mode
Parameter 14-24 Trip Delay at
+ + + +
Current Limit
+ + + +
Torque Limit
182 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Construction
Flux w/ Flux w/
feedback feedback
+ + + +
Inverter Fault
Parameter 14-29 Service Code + + + +
4 4
Parameter 14-30 Current Lim
+ + + +
Ctrl, Proportional Gain
+ + + +
Ctrl, Integration Time
+ + + +
Ctrl, Filter Time
Parameter 14-35 Stall
- - + +
Protection
Parameter 14-36 Fieldweakenin
+ + + +
g Function
Parameter 14-40 VT Level - + + +
Parameter 14-41 AEO
- + + +
Minimum Magnetisation
Parameter 14-42 Minimum
- + + +
AEO Frequency
Parameter 14-43 Motor Cosphi - + + +
Parameter 14-50 RFI Filter + + + +
Parameter 14-51 DC Link
+ + + +
Compensation
Parameter 14-52 Fan Control + + + +
Parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor + + + +
Parameter 14-55 Output Filter + + + +
Parameter 14-56 Capacitance
- - + +
Output Filter
Parameter 14-57 Inductance
- - + +
Output Filter
Parameter 14-74 Leg. Ext.
+ + + +
Status Word
Parameter 14-80 Option
+ + + +
Supplied by External 24VDC
Parameter 14-89 Option
+ + + +
Detection
Parameter 14-90 Fault Level + + + +
Table 4.3 Active/Inactive Parameters in Different Drive Control Modes

1) Constant torque
2) Variable torque
3) AEO
4) Constant power
5) Used in flystart
6) Used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics is constant power
7) Not used when parameter 1-03 Torque Characteristics = VT
8) Part of resonance damping
9) Not AC brake
10) Torque open loop
11) Torque
12) Speed closed loop
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 183

4.1.4 0-** Operation/Display
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
No. # only during sion
operation index
0-0* Basic Settings
0-01 Language [0] English 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-02 Motor Speed Unit [0] RPM 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4 0-03
0-04
Regional Settings
Operating State at Power-up (Hand)
[0] International
[1] Forced stop, ref=old
2 set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
0-09 Performance Monitor 0% All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
0-1* Set-up Operations
0-10 Active Set-up [1] Set-up 1 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-11 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-12 This Set-up Linked to [0] Not linked All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-13 Readout: Linked Set-ups 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
0-14 Readout: Edit Set-ups / Channel 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
0-15 Readout: actual setup 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
0-2* LCP Display
0-20 Display Line 1.1 Small 1617 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-23 Display Line 2 Large 1613 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-24 Display Line 3 Large 1602 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
0-25 My Personal Menu ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-3* LCP Custom Readout
0-30 Unit for User-defined Readout [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-31 Min Value of User-defined Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
0-32 Max Value of User-defined Readout 100 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
VisStr[
0-37 Display Text 1 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 25]
VisStr[
VisStr[
0-4* LCP Keypad
0-40 [Hand on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-41 [Off] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-42 [Auto on] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-43 [Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-44 [Off/Reset] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-45 [Drive Bypass] Key on LCP ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
0-5* Copy/Save
0-50 LCP Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-51 Set-up Copy [0] No copy All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
0-6* Password
0-60 Main Menu Password 100 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-61 Access to Main Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-65 Quick Menu Password 200 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Int16
0-66 Access to Quick Menu w/o Password [0] Full access 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
0-67 Bus Password Access 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
0-68 Safety Parameters Password 300 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
0-69 Password Protection of Safety Parameters [0] Disabled 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
184 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4.1.5 1-** Load/Motor
Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver- Type
only during sion
operation index
1-0* General Settings
1-00 Configuration Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-01 Motor Control Principle ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-02
1-03
Flux Motor Feedback Source
Torque Characteristics
[1] 24V encoder
[0] Constant torque
All set-ups
All set-ups
x FALSE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8 4 4
1-04 Overload Mode [0] High torque All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-05 Local Mode Configuration [2] As mode par 1-00 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-06 Clockwise Direction [0] Normal All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-07 Motor Angle Offset Adjust [0] Manual All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-1* Special Settings
1-10 Motor Construction [0] Asynchron All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-11 Motor Model ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE - Uint8
1-14 Damping Gain 140 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-15 Low Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-16 High Speed Filter Time Const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-17 Voltage filter time const. ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
1-18 Min. Current at No Load 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-2* Motor Data
1-20 Motor Power [kW] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 1 Uint32
1-21 Motor Power [HP] ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-22 Motor Voltage ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-23 Motor Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-24 Motor Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
1-25 Motor Nominal Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 67 Uint16
1-26 Motor Cont. Rated Torque ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint32
Automatic Motor Adaptation
1-29 (AMA) [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-3* Adv. Motor Data
1-30 Stator Resistance (Rs) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-31 Rotor Resistance (Rr) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-33 Stator Leakage Reactance (X1) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-34 Rotor Leakage Reactance (X2) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-35 Main Reactance (Xh) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
1-36 Iron Loss Resistance (Rfe) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
1-37 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-38 q-axis Inductance (Lq) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
1-39 Motor Poles ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
1-40 Back EMF at 1000 RPM ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE 0 Uint16
1-41 Motor Angle Offset 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
1-44 d-axis Inductance Sat. (LdSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-45 q-axis Inductance Sat. (LqSat) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Int32
1-46 Position Detection Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
1-47 Low Speed Torque Calibration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-48 Inductance Sat. Point 35 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Int16
1-5* Load Indep. Setting
Motor Magnetisation at Zero
1-50 Speed 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Min Speed Normal Magnetising
1-51 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 185

only during sion
operation index
Min Speed Normal Magnetising
1-52 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-53 Model Shift Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -1 Uint16
Voltage reduction in
1-54 fieldweakening 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
4 4
1-55 U/f Characteristic - U ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-56 U/f Characteristic - F ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-58 Flystart Test Pulses Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-59 Flystart Test Pulses Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
1-6* Load Depen. Setting
1-60 Low Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-61 High Speed Load Compensation 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-62 Slip Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
1-63 Slip Compensation Time Constant ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
1-64 Resonance Damping 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
Resonance Damping Time
1-65 Constant 5 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-66 Min. Current at Low Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
1-67 Load Type [0] Passive load All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-68 Minimum Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-69 Maximum Inertia ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -4 Uint32
1-7* Start Adjustments
1-70 PM Start Mode [0] Rotor Detection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-71 Start Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
1-72 Start Function [2] Coast/delay time All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-73 Flying Start ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-74 Start Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
1-75 Start Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-76 Start Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
1-8* Stop Adjustments
1-80 Function at Stop [0] Coast All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-81 [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
Min Speed for Function at Stop
1-82 [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
1-83 Precise Stop Function [0] Precise ramp stop All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
1-84 Precise Stop Counter Value 100000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Precise Stop Speed Compensation
1-85 Delay 10 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
1-9* Motor Temperature
1-90 Motor Thermal Protection [0] No protection All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-91 Motor External Fan ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
1-93 Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
1-94 ATEX ETR cur.lim. speed reduction 0% 2 set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-95 KTY Sensor Type [0] KTY Sensor 1 All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-96 KTY Thermistor Resource [0] None All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
1-97 KTY Threshold level 80 C 1 set-up x TRUE 100 Int16
1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x TRUE -1 Uint16
1-99 ATEX ETR interpol points current ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
186 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4.1.6 2-** Brakes
only during sion
operation index
2-0* DC-Brake
2-00 DC Hold Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
2-01 DC Brake Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-02
2-03
DC Braking Time
DC Brake Cut In Speed [RPM]
10 s
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
67
Uint16
Uint16 4 4
2-04 DC Brake Cut In Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-05 Maximum Reference MaxReference (P303) All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
2-06 Parking Current 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-07 Parking Time 3s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-1* Brake Energy Funct.
2-10 Brake Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-11 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-12 Brake Power Limit (kW) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
2-13 Brake Power Monitoring [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-15 Brake Check [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-16 AC brake Max. Current 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
2-17 Over-voltage Control [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-18 Brake Check Condition [0] At Power Up All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
2-19 Over-voltage Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
2-2* Mechanical Brake
2-20 Release Brake Current ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
2-21 Activate Brake Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
2-22 Activate Brake Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
2-23 Activate Brake Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-24 Stop Delay 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-25 Brake Release Time 0.20 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-26 Torque Ref 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
2-27 Torque Ramp Up Time 0.2 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-28 Gain Boost Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
2-29 Torque Ramp Down Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
2-3* Adv. Mech Brake
2-30 Position P Start Proportional Gain 0.0000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-31 Speed PID Start Proportional Gain 0.0150 N/A All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
2-32 Speed PID Start Integral Time 200.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Speed PID Start Lowpass Filter
2-33 Time 10.0 ms All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 187

4.1.7 3-** Reference/Ramps
only during sion
operation index
3-0* Reference Limits
3-00 Reference Range ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-01 Reference/Feedback Unit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 3-02
3-03
Minimum Reference
Maximum Reference
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-3
-3
Int32
Int32
3-04 Reference Function [0] Sum All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-1* References
3-10 Preset Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
3-11 Jog Speed [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
3-12 Catch up/slow Down Value 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
[0] Linked to Hand /
3-13 Reference Site Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-14 Preset Relative Reference 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
3-15 Reference Resource 1 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Relative Scaling Reference
3-18 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-19 Jog Speed [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
3-4* Ramp 1
3-40 Ramp 1 Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-41 Ramp 1 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-42 Ramp 1 Ramp Down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel.
3-45 Start 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-46 Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Accel. End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Ramp 1 S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-48 End 50 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
3-5* Ramp 2
3-51 Ramp 2 Ramp Up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-6* Ramp 3
3-61 Ramp 3 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-62 Ramp 3 Ramp down Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
188 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

only during sion
operation index
3-7* Ramp 4
4 4
3-71 Ramp 4 Ramp up Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-8* Other Ramps
3-80 Jog Ramp Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-81 Quick Stop Ramp Time ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-82 Quick Stop Ramp Type [0] Linear All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
Quick Stop S-ramp Ratio at Decel.
3-9* Digital Pot.Meter
3-90 Step Size 0.10 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
3-91 Ramp Time 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
3-92 Power Restore [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
3-93 Maximum Limit 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-94 Minimum Limit -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
3-95 Ramp Delay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 TimD
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 189

4.1.8 4-** Limits/Warnings
only during sion
operation index
4-1* Motor Limits
4-10 Motor Speed Direction ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4 4 4-12
4-13
Motor Speed Low Limit [Hz]
Motor Speed High Limit [RPM]
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-1
67
Uint16
Uint16
4-14 Motor Speed High Limit [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-16 Torque Limit Motor Mode ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-17 Torque Limit Generator Mode 100 % All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-18 Current Limit ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint32
4-19 Max Output Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
4-2* Limit Factors
4-20 Torque Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-21 Speed Limit Factor Source [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-3* Motor Speed Mon.
4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function [2] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-32 Motor Feedback Loss Timeout 0.05 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-34 Tracking Error Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-35 Tracking Error 10 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-36 Tracking Error Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-37 Tracking Error Ramping 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-38 Tracking Error Ramping Timeout 1s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
Tracking Error After Ramping
4-39 Timeout 5s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
4-5* Adj. Warnings
4-50 Warning Current Low 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-51 Warning Current High ImaxVLT (P1637) All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
4-52 Warning Speed Low 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-53 Warning Speed High ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-54 Warning Reference Low -999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-55 Warning Reference High 999999.999 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
-999999.999 Reference-
4-56 Warning Feedback Low FeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
999999.999 Reference-
4-57 Warning Feedback High FeedbackUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
4-58 Missing Motor Phase Function ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4-6* Speed Bypass
4-60 Bypass Speed From [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-61 Bypass Speed From [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
4-62 Bypass Speed To [RPM] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4-63 Bypass Speed To [Hz] ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
190 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4.1.9 5-** Digital In/Out
only during sion index
operation
5-0* Digital I/O mode
5-00 Digital I/O Mode [0] PNP All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode [0] Input All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-02 Terminal 29 Mode
5-1* Digital Inputs
[0] Input All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
4 4
5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-13 Terminal 29 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-16 Terminal X30/2 Digital Input ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
5-20 Terminal X46/1 Digital Input [0] No operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-3* Digital Outputs
5-30 Terminal 27 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-31 Terminal 29 Digital Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-32 Term X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-33 Term X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101) ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-4* Relays
5-40 Function Relay ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-41 On Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-42 Off Delay, Relay 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
5-5* Pulse Input
5-50 Term. 29 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
5-51 Term. 29 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-52 Term. 29 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-53 Term. 29 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -3 Int32
5-54 Pulse Filter Time Constant #29 100 ms All set-ups x FALSE -3 Uint16
5-55 Term. 33 Low Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-56 Term. 33 High Frequency 100 Hz All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
0 ReferenceFeed-
5-57 Term. 33 Low Ref./Feedb. Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-58 Term. 33 High Ref./Feedb. Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
5-59 Pulse Filter Time Constant #33 100 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
5-6* Pulse Output
Terminal 27 Pulse Output
5-60 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
5-62 Pulse Output Max Freq #27 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 191

operation
Terminal 29 Pulse Output
5-63 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
5-65 Pulse Output Max Freq #29 ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
Terminal X30/6 Pulse Output
5-66 Variable ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4
5-68 Pulse Output Max Freq #X30/6 ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-7* 24V Encoder Input
5-70 Term 32/33 Pulses Per Revolution 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
5-71 Term 32/33 Encoder Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
5-8* I/O Options
5-80 AHF Cap Reconnect Delay 25 s 2 set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
5-9* Bus Controlled
5-90 Digital & Relay Bus Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
5-93 Pulse Out #27 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-94 Pulse Out #27 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
5-95 Pulse Out #29 Bus Control 0% All set-ups x TRUE -2 N2
5-96 Pulse Out #29 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up x TRUE -2 Uint16
5-97 Pulse Out #X30/6 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
5-98 Pulse Out #X30/6 Timeout Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
4.1.10 6-** Analog In/Out
operation
6-0* Analog I/O Mode
6-00 Live Zero Timeout Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-1* Analog Input 1
6-10 Terminal 53 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-11 Terminal 53 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-12 Terminal 53 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-13 Terminal 53 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 53 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
6-14 Value backUnit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Terminal 53 High Ref./Feedb.
6-15 Value ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
6-16 Terminal 53 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-2* Analog Input 2
6-20 Terminal 54 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-21 Terminal 54 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-22 Terminal 54 Low Current 0.14 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
6-23 Terminal 54 High Current 20 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Terminal 54 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Terminal 54 High Ref./Feedb.
6-26 Terminal 54 Filter Time Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-3* Analog Input 3
6-30 Terminal X30/11 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-31 Terminal X30/11 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
192 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
Term. X30/11 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Term. X30/11 High Ref./Feedb.
Term. X30/11 Filter Time
6-36 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-4* Analog Input 4 4 4
6-40 Terminal X30/12 Low Voltage 0.07 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-41 Terminal X30/12 High Voltage 10 V All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
Term. X30/12 Low Ref./Feedb. 0 ReferenceFeed-
Term. X30/12 High Ref./Feedb.
Term. X30/12 Filter Time
6-46 Constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
6-5* Analog Output 1
6-50 Terminal 42 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-51 Terminal 42 Output Min Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-52 Terminal 42 Output Max Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-53 Term 42 Output Bus Ctrl 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal 42 Output Timeout
6-54 Preset 0% 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint16
6-55 Analog Output Filter [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
6-60 Terminal X30/8 Output ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
6-61 Terminal X30/8 Min. Scale 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-62 Terminal X30/8 Max. Scale 100 % All set-ups TRUE -2 Int16
6-63 Terminal X30/8 Bus Control 0% All set-ups TRUE -2 N2
Terminal X30/8 Output Timeout
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 193

4.1.11 7-** Controllers
operation
7-0* Speed PID Ctrl.
7-00 Speed PID Feedback Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
7-02 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4 4 7-03
7-04
Speed PID Integral Time
Speed PID Differentiation Time
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-4
-4
Uint32
Uint16
7-05 Speed PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-06 Speed PID Lowpass Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
7-07 Speed PID Feedback Gear Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups FALSE -4 Uint32
7-08 Speed PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
Speed PID Error Correction w/
7-09 Ramp 300 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
7-1* Torque PI Ctrl.
7-12 Torque PI Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-13 Torque PI Integration Time 0.020 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-19 Current Controller Rise Time 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-2* Process Ctrl. Feedb
7-20 Process CL Feedback 1 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-22 Process CL Feedback 2 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-3* Process PID Ctrl.
Process PID Normal/ Inverse
7-30 Control [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-31 Process PID Anti Windup [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-32 Process PID Start Speed 0 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
7-33 Process PID Proportional Gain 0.01 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-34 Process PID Integral Time 10000 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
7-35 Process PID Differentiation Time 0s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-36 Process PID Diff. Gain Limit 5 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
7-38 Process PID Feed Forward Factor 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
7-39 On Reference Bandwidth 5% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
7-4* Adv. Process PID I
7-40 Process PID I-part Reset [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-41 Process PID Output Neg. Clamp -100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-42 Process PID Output Pos. Clamp 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Process PID Gain Scale at Min.
7-43 Ref. 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
Process PID Gain Scale at Max.
7-44 Ref. 100 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
7-45 Process PID Feed Fwd Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Process PID Feed Fwd Normal/
7-46 Inv. Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-48 PCD Feed Forward 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint16
Process PID Output Normal/ Inv.
7-49 Ctrl. [0] Normal All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-5* Adv. Process PID II
7-50 Process PID Extended PID [1] Enabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
7-51 Process PID Feed Fwd Gain 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
7-52 Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp up 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
Process PID Feed Fwd Ramp
7-53 down 0.01 s All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint32
194 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
7-56 Process PID Ref. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
7-57 Process PID Fb. Filter Time 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4.1.12 8-** Comm. and Options
Par. No. # Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302

only
Change Conver-
during sion index
Type
4 4
operation
8-0* General Settings
8-01 Control Site [0] Digital and ctrl.word All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-02 Control Word Source ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-03 Control Word Timeout Time 1s 1 set-up TRUE -1 Uint32
8-04 Control Word Timeout Function ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-05 End-of-Timeout Function [1] Resume set-up 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-06 Reset Control Word Timeout [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-07 Diagnosis Trigger [0] Disable 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-08 Readout Filtering ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-1* Ctrl. Word Settings
8-10 Control Word Profile [0] FC profile All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-13 Configurable Status Word STW ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-14 Configurable Control Word CTW [1] Profile default All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-19 Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint32
8-3* FC Port Settings
8-30 Protocol [0] FC 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-31 Address 1 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-32 FC Port Baud Rate ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
[0] Even Parity, 1 Stop
8-33 Parity / Stop Bits Bit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
8-34 Estimated cycle time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-35 Minimum Response Delay 10 ms 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-36 Max Response Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 Uint16
8-37 Max Inter-Char Delay ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -5 Uint16
8-4* FC MC protocol set
8-40 Telegram Selection [1] Standard telegram 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-41 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups FALSE - Uint16
8-42 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-43 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
8-45 BTM Transaction Command [0] Off All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
8-46 BTM Transaction Status [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-47 BTM Timeout 60 s 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
8-48 BTM Maximum Errors 21 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
8-49 BTM Error Log 0.255 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
8-5* Digital/Bus
8-50 Coasting Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-51 Quick Stop Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-52 DC Brake Select ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-53 Start Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-54 Reversing Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-55 Set-up Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-56 Preset Reference Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-57 Profidrive OFF2 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 195

operation
8-58 Profidrive OFF3 Select [3] Logic OR All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
8-8* FC Port Diagnostics
8-80 Bus Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-81 Bus Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-82 Slave Messages Rcvd 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4 4 8-83
8-9* Bus Jog
Slave Error Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
8-90 Bus Jog 1 Speed 100 RPM All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
8-91 Bus Jog 2 Speed ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 67 Uint16
4.1.13 9-** Profibus
Par. Parameter description Default value 4-set-up FC 302 Change Conver-

operation index
9-00 Setpoint 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-07 Actual Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-15 PCD Write Configuration ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint16
9-16 PCD Read Configuration ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-18 Node Address 126 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
9-19 Drive Unit System Number 1034 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-22 Telegram Selection [100] None 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
9-23 Parameters for Signals 0 All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
9-27 Parameter Edit [1] Enabled 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint16
9-28 Process Control [1] Enable cyclic master 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
9-44 Fault Message Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-45 Fault Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-47 Fault Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-52 Fault Situation Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-53 Profibus Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-63 Actual Baud Rate [255] No baudrate found All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-64 Device Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
OctStr[
9-65 Profile Number 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 2]
9-67 Control Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-68 Status Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 V2
9-70 Edit Set-up [1] Set-up 1 All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-71 Profibus Save Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
9-72 ProfibusDriveReset [0] No action 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
9-75 DO Identification 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
9-80 Defined Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
9-90 Changed Parameters (1) 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
196 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

9-99 Profibus Revision Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
4.1.14 10-** CAN Fieldbus
operatio
n
10-0* Common Settings
10-00 CAN Protocol ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4
10-01 Baud Rate Select ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-02 MAC ID ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-05 Readout Transmit Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-06 Readout Receive Error Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-07 Readout Bus Off Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-1* DeviceNet
10-10 Process Data Type Selection ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-11 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-12 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-13 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-14 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-15 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-2* COS Filters
10-20 COS Filter 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
10-3* Parameter Access
10-30 Array Index 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
10-31 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
10-32 Devicenet Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
10-33 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
10-34 DeviceNet Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
10-39 Devicenet F Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
10-5* CANopen
10-50 Process Data Config Write. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
10-51 Process Data Config Read. ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
4.1.15 12-** Ethernet
operation
12-0* IP Settings
12-00 IP Address Assignment ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-01 IP Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-02 Subnet Mask 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-03 Default Gateway 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-04 DHCP Server 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-05 Lease Expires ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-06 Name Servers 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 OctStr[4]
12-07 Domain Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
12-08 Host Name 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[48]
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 197

operation
12-09 Physical Address 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[17]
12-1* Ethernet Link Parameters
12-10 Link Status [0] No Link All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-11 Link Duration ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 TimD
12-12 Auto Negotiation ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 12-13
12-14
Link Speed
Link Duplex
ExpressionLimit
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
12-2* Process Data
12-20 Control Instance ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint8
12-21 Process Data Config Write ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
12-22 Process Data Config Read ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint16
12-23 Process Data Config Write Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-24 Process Data Config Read Size 16 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-27 Master Address 0 N/A 2 set-ups FALSE 0 OctStr[4]
12-28 Store Data Values [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-29 Store Always [0] Off 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
12-3* EtherNet/IP
12-30 Warning Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-31 Net Reference [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-32 Net Control [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-33 CIP Revision ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-34 CIP Product Code ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-35 EDS Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-37 COS Inhibit Timer 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-38 COS Filter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-4* Modbus TCP
12-40 Status Parameter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-41 Slave Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-42 Slave Exception Message Count 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-5* EtherCAT
12-50 Configured Station Alias 0 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint16
12-51 Configured Station Address 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-59 EtherCAT Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-6* Ethernet PowerLink
12-60 Node ID 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
12-62 SDO Timeout 30000 ms All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
12-63 Basic Ethernet Timeout 5000.000 ms All set-ups TRUE -6 Uint32
12-66 Threshold 15 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-67 Threshold Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-68 Cumulative Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-69 Ethernet PowerLink Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-8* Other Ethernet Services
12-80 FTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-81 HTTP Server [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-82 SMTP Service [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Transparent Socket Channel
12-89 Port ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
12-9* Advanced Ethernet Services
12-90 Cable Diagnostic [0] Disabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-91 Auto Cross Over [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-92 IGMP Snooping [1] Enabled 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
198 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
12-93 Cable Error Length 0 N/A 1 set-up TRUE 0 Uint16
12-94 Broadcast Storm Protection -1 % 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
12-95 Broadcast Storm Filter [0] Broadcast only 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-96 Port Config ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
12-98 Interface Counters 4000 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
12-99 Media Counters 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
4 4
4.1.16 13-** Smart Logic
operation
13-0* SLC Settings
13-00 SL Controller Mode ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-01 Start Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-02 Stop Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-03 Reset SLC [0] Do not reset SLC All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-1* Comparators
13-10 Comparator Operand ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-11 Comparator Operator ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-12 Comparator Value ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
13-1* RS Flip Flops
13-15 RS-FF Operand S ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-16 RS-FF Operand R ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-2* Timers
13-20 SL Controller Timer ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -3 TimD
13-4* Logic Rules
13-40 Logic Rule Boolean 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-41 Logic Rule Operator 1 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-43 Logic Rule Operator 2 ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-5* States
13-51 SL Controller Event ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
13-52 SL Controller Action ExpressionLimit 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.17 14-** Special Functions
operation index
14-0* Inverter Switching
14-00 Switching Pattern ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-01 Switching Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-03 Overmodulation [1] On All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-04 PWM Random [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-06 Dead Time Compensation [1] On All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-1* Mains On/Off
14-10 Mains Failure [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-11 Mains Voltage at Mains Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-12 Function at Mains Imbalance [0] Trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 199

14-13 Mains Failure Step Factor 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
14-14 Kin. Backup Time Out 60 s All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-15 Kin. Backup Trip Recovery Level ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
14-16 Kin. Backup Gain 100 % All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint32
14-2* Trip Reset
14-20 Reset Mode [0] Manual reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-21 Automatic Restart Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-22 Operation Mode [0] Normal operation All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 14-24 Trip Delay at Current Limit

14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit
60 s
60 s
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint8
Uint8
14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-28 Production Settings [0] No action All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-29 Service Code 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
14-3* Current Limit Ctrl.
14-30 Current Lim Ctrl, Proportional Gain 100 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
14-31 Current Lim Ctrl, Integration Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint16
14-32 Current Lim Ctrl, Filter Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint16
14-35 Stall Protection [1] Enabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-36 Fieldweakening Function [0] Auto All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
14-4* Energy Optimising
14-40 VT Level 66 % All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
14-41 AEO Minimum Magnetisation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-42 Minimum AEO Frequency ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
14-43 Motor Cosphi ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -2 Uint16
14-5* Environment
14-50 RFI Filter [1] On 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
14-51 DC Link Compensation ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-52 Fan Control [0] Auto All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-53 Fan Monitor [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
14-55 Output Filter [0] No Filter All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-56 Capacitance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -7 Uint16
14-57 Inductance Output Filter ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -6 Uint16
14-59 Actual Number of Inverter Units ExpressionLimit 1 set-up x FALSE 0 Uint8
14-7* Compatibility
14-72 Legacy Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-73 Legacy Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-74 Leg. Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
14-8* Options
14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC [1] Yes 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
14-88 Option Data Storage 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
14-89 Option Detection [0] Protect Option Config. 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
14-9* Fault Settings
14-90 Fault Level ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
4.1.18 15-** Drive Information
operation
15-0* Operating Data
15-00 Operating hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-01 Running Hours 0h All set-ups FALSE 74 Uint32
15-02 kWh Counter 0 kWh All set-ups FALSE 75 Uint32
15-03 Power Up's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
200 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
15-04 Over Temp's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-05 Over Volt's 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-06 Reset kWh Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-07 Reset Running Hours Counter [0] Do not reset All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-1* Data Log Settings
15-10
15-11
Logging Source
Logging Interval
0
ExpressionLimit
2 set-ups
2 set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-3
Uint16
TimD 4 4
15-12 Trigger Event [0] False 1 set-up TRUE - Uint8
15-13 Logging Mode [0] Log always 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
15-14 Samples Before Trigger 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
15-2* Historic Log
15-20 Historic Log: Event 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-21 Historic Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-22 Historic Log: Time 0 ms All set-ups FALSE -3 Uint32
15-3* Fault Log
15-30 Fault Log: Error Code 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
15-31 Fault Log: Value 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
15-32 Fault Log: Time 0s All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
15-4* Drive Identification
15-40 FC Type 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[6]
15-41 Power Section 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-42 Voltage 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-43 Software Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[5]
15-44 Ordered Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
15-45 Actual Typecode String 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[40]
Frequency Converter Ordering
15-46 No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-47 Power Card Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-48 LCP Id No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-49 SW ID Control Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-50 SW ID Power Card 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
Frequency Converter Serial
15-51 Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[10]
15-53 Power Card Serial Number 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[19]
15-58 Smart Setup Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE 0 VisStr[16]
15-59 CSIV Filename ExpressionLimit 1 set-up FALSE 0 VisStr[16]
15-6* Option Ident
15-60 Option Mounted 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-61 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-62 Option Ordering No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[8]
15-63 Option Serial No 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[18]
15-70 Option in Slot A 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-71 Slot A Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-72 Option in Slot B 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-73 Slot B Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-74 Option in Slot C0/E0 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-75 Slot C0/E0 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-76 Option in Slot C1/E1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[30]
15-77 Slot C1/E1 Option SW Version 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 VisStr[20]
15-8* Operating Data II
15-80 Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 201

operation
15-81 Preset Fan Running Hours 0h All set-ups TRUE 74 Uint32
15-89 Configuration Change Counter 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-9* Parameter Info
15-92 Defined Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
15-93 Modified Parameters 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
4 4 15-98
15-99
Drive Identification
Parameter Metadata
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
0
0
VisStr[40]
Uint16
4.1.19 16-** Data Readouts
operation index
16-0* General Status
16-00 Control Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-01 Reference [Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-02 Reference % 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-03 Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-05 Main Actual Value [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-09 Custom Readout 0 CustomReadoutUnit All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-1* Motor Status
16-10 Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 1 Int32
16-11 Power [hp] 0 hp All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-12 Motor Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-13 Frequency 0 Hz All set-ups FALSE -1 Uint16
16-14 Motor current 0A All set-ups FALSE -2 Int32
16-15 Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE -2 N2
16-16 Torque [Nm] 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-17 Speed [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-18 Motor Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-19 KTY sensor temperature 0 C All set-ups FALSE 100 Int16
16-20 Motor Angle 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
16-21 Torque [%] High Res. 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-22 Torque [%] 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-23 Motor Shaft Power [kW] 0 kW All set-ups TRUE 1 Int32
16-24 Calibrated Stator Resistance 0.0000 Ohm All set-ups x TRUE -4 Uint32
16-25 Torque [Nm] High 0 Nm All set-ups FALSE -1 Int32
16-3* Drive Status
16-30 DC Link Voltage 0V All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-32 Brake Energy /s 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-33 Brake Energy /2 min 0 kW All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-34 Heatsink Temp. 0 C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-35 Inverter Thermal 0% All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-36 Inv. Nom. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-37 Inv. Max. Current ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE -2 Uint32
16-38 SL Controller State 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
16-39 Control Card Temp. 0 C All set-ups FALSE 100 Uint8
16-40 Logging Buffer Full [0] No All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
VisStr[
16-41 LCP Bottom Statusline 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 50]
16-45 Motor Phase U Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
202 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

16-46 Motor Phase V Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32

16-47 Motor Phase W Current 0A All set-ups TRUE -2 Int32
16-48 Speed Ref. After Ramp [RPM] 0 RPM All set-ups FALSE 67 Int32
16-49 Current Fault Source 0 N/A All set-ups x TRUE 0 Uint8
16-5* Ref. & Feedb.
16-50 External Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-51 Pulse Reference 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
16-52 Feedback[Unit] 0 ReferenceFeedbackUnit All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-53 Digi Pot Reference
16-57 Feedback [RPM]
0 N/A
0 RPM
All set-ups
All set-ups
FALSE
FALSE
-2
67
Int16
Int32
4 4
16-6* Inputs & Outputs
16-60 Digital Input 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-61 Terminal 53 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-62 Analog Input 53 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-63 Terminal 54 Switch Setting [0] Current All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
16-64 Analog Input 54 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-65 Analog Output 42 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-66 Digital Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-67 Freq. Input #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-68 Freq. Input #33 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-69 Pulse Output #27 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int32
16-70 Pulse Output #29 [Hz] 0 N/A All set-ups x FALSE 0 Int32
16-71 Relay Output [bin] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Int16
16-72 Counter A 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-73 Counter B 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
16-74 Prec. Stop Counter 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
16-75 Analog In X30/11 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-76 Analog In X30/12 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int32
16-77 Analog Out X30/8 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE -3 Int16
16-8* Fieldbus & FC Port
16-80 Fieldbus CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-82 Fieldbus REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-84 Comm. Option STW 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-85 FC Port CTW 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 V2
16-86 FC Port REF 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 N2
16-87 Bus Readout Alarm/Warning 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
16-9* Diagnosis Readouts
16-90 Alarm Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-91 Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-92 Warning Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-93 Warning Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
16-94 Ext. Status Word 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
4.1.20 17-** Motor Feedb.Option
operation
17-1* Inc. Enc. Interface
17-10 Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-11 Resolution (PPR) 1024 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
17-2* Abs. Enc. Interface
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 203

operation
17-20 Protocol Selection [0] None All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-21 Resolution (Positions/Rev) ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
17-24 SSI Data Length 13 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint8
17-25 Clock Rate ExpressionLimit All set-ups FALSE 3 Uint16
17-26 SSI Data Format [0] Gray code All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
4 4 17-34 HIPERFACE Baudrate

17-5* Resolver Interface
[4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-50 Poles 2 N/A 1 set-up FALSE 0 Uint8

17-51 Input Voltage 7V 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-52 Input Frequency 10 kHz 1 set-up FALSE 2 Uint8
17-53 Transformation Ratio 0.5 N/A 1 set-up FALSE -1 Uint8
17-56 Encoder Sim. Resolution [0] Disabled 1 set-up FALSE - Uint8
17-59 Resolver Interface [0] Disabled All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-6* Monitoring and App.
17-60 Feedback Direction [0] Clockwise All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
17-61 Feedback Signal Monitoring [1] Warning All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.21 18-** Data Readouts 2
operation
18-3* Analog Readouts
18-36 Analog Input X48/2 [mA] 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
18-37 Temp. Input X48/4 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
18-6* Inputs & Outputs 2
18-60 Digital Input 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint16
18-9* PID Readouts
18-90 Process PID Error 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-91 Process PID Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
18-92 Process PID Clamped Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
Process PID Gain Scaled
18-93 Output 0% All set-ups FALSE -1 Int16
4.1.22 30-** Special Features
operation
30-0* Wobbler
[0] Abs. Freq., Abs.
30-00 Wobble Mode Time All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
30-01 Wobble Delta Frequency [Hz] 5 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-02 Wobble Delta Frequency [%] 25 % All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaling
30-03 Resource [0] No function All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-04 Wobble Jump Frequency [Hz] 0 Hz All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-05 Wobble Jump Frequency [%] 0% All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
30-06 Wobble Jump Time ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
204 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
30-07 Wobble Sequence Time 10 s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-08 Wobble Up/ Down Time 5s All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint16
30-09 Wobble Random Function [0] Off All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
30-10 Wobble Ratio 1 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-11 Wobble Random Ratio Max. 10 N/A All set-ups TRUE -1 Uint8
30-12
30-19
Wobble Random Ratio Min.
Wobble Delta Freq. Scaled
0.1 N/A
0 Hz
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
FALSE
-1
-1
Uint8
Uint16 4 4
30-2* Adv. Start Adjust
30-20 High Starting Torque Time [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint16
High Starting Torque Current
30-21 [%] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -1 Uint32
30-22 Locked Rotor Protection ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE - Uint8
Locked Rotor Detection Time
30-23 [s] ExpressionLimit All set-ups x TRUE -2 Uint8
30-8* Compatibility (I)
30-80 d-axis Inductance (Ld) ExpressionLimit All set-ups x FALSE -6 Int32
30-81 Brake Resistor (ohm) ExpressionLimit 1 set-up TRUE -2 Uint32
30-83 Speed PID Proportional Gain ExpressionLimit All set-ups TRUE -4 Uint32
Process PID Proportional
30-84 Gain 0.100 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
4.1.23 32-** MCO Basic Settings
operation
32-0* Encoder 2
32-00 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-01 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-02 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-03 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Baudrate
32-04 X55 [4] 9600 All set-ups FALSE - Uint8
Absolute Encoder Data
32-05 Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
Absolute Encoder Clock
32-06 Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-07 Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Absolute Encoder Cable
32-08 Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-09 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-10 Rotational Direction [1] No action 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-11 User Unit Denominator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-12 User Unit Numerator 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-13 Enc.2 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-14 Enc.2 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-15 Enc.2 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-3* Encoder 1
32-30 Incremental Signal Type [1] RS422 (5V TTL) 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-31 Incremental Resolution 1024 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 205

operation
32-32 Absolute Protocol [0] None 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-33 Absolute Resolution 8192 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Absolute Encoder Data
32-35 Length 25 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
4 4
32-36 Frequency 262 kHz 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-37 Generation [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Absolute Encoder Cable
32-38 Length 0m 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-39 Encoder Monitoring [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-40 Encoder Termination [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-43 Enc.1 Control [0] No soft changing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-44 Enc.1 node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
32-45 Enc.1 CAN guard [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-5* Feedback Source
32-50 Source Slave [2] Encoder 2 X55 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-51 MCO 302 Last Will [1] Trip 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-52 Source Master [1] Encoder 1 X56 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-6* PID Controller
32-60 Proportional factor 30 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-61 Derivative factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-62 Integral factor 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-63 Limit Value for Integral Sum 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-64 PID Bandwidth 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
32-65 Velocity Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-66 Acceleration Feed-Forward 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-67 Max. Tolerated Position Error 20000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-68 Reverse Behavior for Slave [0] Reversing allowed 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Sampling Time for PID
32-69 Control 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
Scan Time for Profile
32-70 Generator 1 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
Size of the Control Window
32-71 (Activation) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Size of the Control Window
32-72 (Deactiv.) 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-73 Integral limit filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
32-74 Position error filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int16
32-8* Velocity & Accel.
32-80 Maximum Velocity (Encoder) 1500 RPM 2 set-ups TRUE 67 Uint32
32-81 Shortest Ramp 1s 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-82 Ramp Type [0] Linear 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
32-83 Velocity Resolution 100 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-84 Default Velocity 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-85 Default Acceleration 50 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
32-86 Acc. up for limited jerk 100 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-87 Acc. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-88 Dec. up for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-89 Dec. down for limited jerk 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
32-9* Development
206 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

operation
32-90 Debug Source [0] Controlcard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4.1.24 33-** MCO Adv. Settings
operation
4 4
33-0* Home Motion
33-00 Force HOME [0] Home not forced 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Zero Point Offset from Home
33-01 Pos. 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-02 Ramp for Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-03 Velocity of Home Motion 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Behaviour during
33-04 HomeMotion [0] Revers and index 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-1* Synchronization
33-10 Sync Factor Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-11 Sync Factor Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Position Offset for Synchroni-
33-12 zation 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
Accuracy Window for Position
33-13 Sync. 1000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-14 Relative Slave Velocity Limit 0% 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-15 Marker Number for Master 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-16 Marker Number for Slave 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-17 Master Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-18 Slave Marker Distance 4096 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-19 Master Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-20 Slave Marker Type [0] Encoder Z positive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Master Marker Tolerance
33-21 Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Slave Marker Tolerance
33-22 Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
Start Behaviour for Marker
33-23 Sync [0] Leading marker 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint16
33-24 Marker Number for Fault 10 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-25 Marker Number for Ready 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-26 Velocity Filter 0 us 2 set-ups TRUE -6 Int32
33-27 Offset Filter Time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-28 Marker Filter Configuration [0] Marker filter 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-29 Filter Time for Marker Filter 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
33-30 Maximum Marker Correction 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-31 Synchronisation Type [0] Standard 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Feed Forward Velocity
33-32 Adaptation 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-33 Velocity Filter Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint32
33-34 Slave Marker filter time 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint32
33-4* Limit Handling
33-40 Behaviour atEnd Limit Switch [0] Call error handler 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-41 Negative Software End Limit -500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
33-42 Positive Software End Limit 500000 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 207

operation
Negative Software End Limit
33-43 Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Positive Software End Limit
33-44 Active [0] Inactive 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-45 Time in Target Window 0 ms 2 set-ups TRUE -3 Uint8
4 4
33-46 Target Window LimitValue 1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-47 Size of Target Window 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-5* I/O Configuration
33-50 Terminal X57/1 Digital Input [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Terminal X59/1 and X59/2
33-60 Mode [1] Output 2 set-ups FALSE - Uint8
33-63 Terminal X59/1 Digital Output [0] No function 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-8* Global Parameters
33-80 Activated Program Number -1 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Int8
33-81 Power-up State [1] Motor on 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-82 Drive Status Monitoring [1] On 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-83 Behaviour afterError [0] Coast 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-84 Behaviour afterEsc. [0] Controlled stop 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
MCO Supplied by External
33-85 24VDC [0] No 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-86 Terminal at alarm [0] Relay 1 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-87 Terminal state at alarm [0] Do nothing 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
33-88 Status word at alarm 0 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
33-9* MCO Port Settings
33-90 X62 MCO CAN node ID 127 N/A 2 set-ups TRUE 0 Uint8
33-91 X62 MCO CAN baud rate [20] 125 Kbps 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
X60 MCO RS485 serial
33-94 termination [0] Off 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
X60 MCO RS485 serial baud
33-95 rate [2] 9600 Baud 2 set-ups TRUE - Uint8
208 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

4.1.25 34-** MCO Data Readouts
operation
34-0* PCD Write Par.
34-01 PCD 1 Write to MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-03
34-04
PCD 3 Write to MCO
PCD 4 Write to MCO
0 N/A
0 N/A
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
0
0
Uint16
Uint16 4 4
34-2* PCD Read Par.
34-21 PCD 1 Read from MCO 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-4* Inputs & Outputs
34-40 Digital Inputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-41 Digital Outputs 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-5* Process Data
34-50 Actual Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-51 Commanded Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-52 Actual Master Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-53 Slave Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-54 Master Index Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-55 Curve Position 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-56 Track Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-57 Synchronizing Error 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-58 Actual Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-59 Actual Master Velocity 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-60 Synchronizing Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-61 Axis Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-62 Program Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Int32
34-64 MCO 302 Status 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-65 MCO 302 Control 0 N/A All set-ups TRUE 0 Uint16
34-7* Diagnosis readouts
34-70 MCO Alarm Word 1 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
34-71 MCO Alarm Word 2 0 N/A All set-ups FALSE 0 Uint32
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 209

4.1.26 35-** Sensor Input Option
operation
35-0* Temp. Input Mode
35-00 Term. X48/4 temp. unit [60] C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-01 Term. X48/4 input type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
4 4 35-02
35-03
Term. X48/7 temp. unit
Term. X48/7 input type
[60] C
[0] Not Connected
All set-ups
All set-ups
TRUE
TRUE
-
-
Uint8
Uint8
35-04 Term. X48/10 temp. unit [60] C All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-05 Term. X48/10 input type [0] Not Connected All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
Temperature sensor alarm
35-06 function [5] Stop and trip All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-1* Temp. Input X48/4
Term. X48/4 filter time
35-14 constant 0.001 s All set-ups TRUE -3 Uint16
35-15 Term. X48/4 temp. monitor [0] Disabled All set-ups TRUE - Uint8
35-16 Term. X48/4 low temp. limit App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-17 Term. X48/4 high temp. limit App.Dependent All set-ups TRUE 0 Int16
35-4* Analog Input X48/2
35-42 Term. X48/2 low current 4.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
35-43 Term. X48/2 high current 20.00 mA All set-ups TRUE -5 Int16
Term. X48/2 low ref./feedb.
35-44 value 0.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
Term. X48/2 high ref./feedb.
35-45 value 100.000 N/A All set-ups TRUE -3 Int32
210 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Troubleshooting VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
5 Troubleshooting
5.1 Status Messages If an alarm cannot be reset, the reason may be that its
cause has not been rectified, or the alarm is trip-locked
5.1.1 Warnings/Alarm Messages (see also Table 5.1).
A warning or an alarm is signalled by the relevant LED on Alarms that are trip-locked offer additional protection,
the front of the frequency converter and indicated by a meaning that the mains supply must be switched off
code on the display. before the alarm can be reset. After being switched back
on, the frequency converter is no longer blocked and can
A warning remains active until its cause is no longer
present. Under certain circumstances, operation of the
be reset as described above once the cause has been
rectified.
5 5
motor may still be continued. Warning messages may be
critical, but are not necessarily so. Alarms that are not trip-locked can also be reset using the
automatic reset function in 14-20 Reset Mode (Warning:
In the event of an alarm, the frequency converter trips. automatic wake-up is possible!)
Reset the alarm to resume operation once the cause has
been rectified. If a warning or alarm is marked against a code in Table 5.1,
this means that either a warning occurs before an alarm,
Three ways to reset: or else that it is possible to specify whether a warning or
Press [Reset]. an alarm should be displayed for a given fault.
Via a digital input with the Reset function.

This is possible, for instance, in parameter 1-90 Motor
Via serial communication/optional fieldbus. Thermal Protection. After an alarm or trip, the motor carries
NOTICE on coasting, and the alarm and warning flash. Once the
problem has been rectified, only the alarm continues
After a manual reset pressing [Reset], press [Auto On] to
flashing until the frequency converter is reset.
restart the motor.
NOTICE
No missing motor phase detection (numbers 30-32) and
no stall detection is active when 1-10 Motor Construction
is set to [1] PM non salient SPM.
No. Description Warning Alarm/Trip Alarm/Trip Lock Parameter

Reference
1 10 Volts low X
2 Live zero error (X) (X) Parameter 6-01 Live
Zero Timeout Function
3 No motor (X) Parameter 1-80 Functio
n at Stop
4 Mains phase loss (X) (X) (X) Parameter 14-12 Functi
on at Mains Imbalance
5 DC link voltage high X
6 DC link voltage low X
7 DC over-voltage X X
8 DC under voltage X X
9 Inverter overloaded X X
10 Motor ETR over temperature (X) (X) Parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection
11 Motor thermistor over temperature (X) (X) Parameter 1-90 Motor
Thermal Protection
12 Torque limit X X
13 Over Current X X X
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 211


Reference
14 Earth Fault X X
15 Hardware mismatch X X
16 Short Circuit X X
17 Control word time-out (X) (X) Parameter 8-04 Control
Word Timeout Function
20 Temp. Input Error X
21 Param Error X
22 Hoist Mech. Brake (X) (X) Parameter group 2-2*
23 Internal Fans X
5 5 24
25
External Fans
Brake resistor short-circuited
X
X
26 Brake resistor power limit (X) (X) Parameter 2-13 Brake
Power Monitoring
27 Brake chopper short-circuited X X
28 Brake check (X) (X) Parameter 2-15 Brake
Check
29 Heatsink temp X X X
30 Motor phase U missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
31 Motor phase V missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
32 Motor phase W missing (X) (X) (X) 4-58 Missing Motor
Phase Function
33 Inrush Fault X X
34 Fieldbus communication fault X X
35 Option Fault X
36 Mains failure X X
37 Phase imbalance X
38 Internal Fault X X
39 Heatsink sensor X X
40 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 27 (X) Parameter 5-00 Digital
I/O Mode,
parameter 5-01 Termina
l 27 Mode
41 Overload of Digital Output Terminal 29 (X) Parameter 5-00 Digital
I/O Mode,
parameter 5-02 Termina
l 29 Mode
42 Ovrld X30/6-7 (X)
43 Ext. Supply (option) X
45 Earth Fault 2 X X
46 Pwr. card supply X X
47 24 V supply low X X X
48 1.8 V supply low X X
49 Speed limit X 1-86 Trip Speed Low
[RPM]
50 AMA calibration failed X
51 AMA check Unom and Inom X
52 AMA low Inom X
53 AMA motor too big X
54 AMA motor too small X
55 AMA parameter out of range X
212 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20


Reference
56 AMA interrupted by user X
57 AMA time-out X
58 AMA internal fault X X
59 Current limit X
60 External Interlock X X
61 Feedback Error (X) (X) Parameter 4-30 Motor
Feedback Loss Function
62 Output Frequency at Maximum Limit X
63 Mechanical Brake Low (X) Parameter 2-20 Release
64 Voltage Limit X
Brake Current
5 5
65 Control Board Over-temperature X X X
66 Heat sink Temperature Low X
67 Option Configuration has Changed X
68 Safe Stop (X) (X)1) Parameter 5-19 Termina
l 37 Safe Stop
69 Pwr. Card Temp X X
70 Illegal FC configuration X
71 PTC 1 Safe Stop X
72 Dangerous failure X
73 Safe Stop Auto Restart (X) (X) Parameter 5-19 Termina
l 37 Safe Stop
74 PTC Thermistor X
75 Illegal Profile Sel. X
76 Power Unit Setup X
77 Reduced power mode X Parameter 14-59 Actual
Number of Inverter
Units
78 Tracking Error (X) (X) Parameter 4-34 Trackin
g Error Function
79 Illegal PS config X X
80 Drive Initialized to Default Value X
81 CSIV corrupt X
82 CSIV parameter error X
83 Illegal Option Combination X
84 No Safety Option X
88 Option Detection X
89 Mechanical Brake Sliding X
90 Feedback Monitor (X) (X) Parameter 17-61 Feedb
ack Signal Monitoring
91 Analog input 54 wrong settings X S202
99 Locked rotor X X
104 Mixing Fans X X
122 Mot. rotat. unexp. X
123 Motor Mod. Changed X
163 ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning X
164 ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm X
165 ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning X
166 ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm X
246 Pwr.card supply X
250 New spare part X
251 New Type Code X X
Table 5.1 Alarm/Warning Code List
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 213

(X) Dependent on parameter frequency converter or connected parts. A trip lock

1) Cannot be Auto reset via 14-20 Reset Mode situation can only be reset by a power cycling.
A trip is the action following an alarm. The trip coasts the

Warning yellow
motor and is reset by pressing [Reset] or by a digital input
Alarm flashing red
(parameter group 5-1* Digital Inputs [1]). The origin event
Trip locked yellow and red
that caused an alarm cannot damage the frequency
converter or cause dangerous conditions. A trip lock is an Table 5.2 LED Indication
action when an alarm occurs, which could damage the
Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word 2 Warning Warning Extended Extended
Word Word 2 Status Word Status Word
5 5 Alarm Word Extended Status Word
2
0 00000001 1 Brake Check ServiceTrip, Brake Check Start Delayed Ramping Off
(A28) Read/Write (W28)
1 00000002 2 Pwr.card temp ServiceTrip, Pwr.card temp Stop Delayed AMA Running Hand/Auto
(A69) (reserved) (A69)
2 00000004 4 Earth Fault ServiceTrip, Earth Fault reserved Start CW/CCW Profibus OFF1
(A14) Typecode/ (W14) start_possible is active, active
Sparepart when the DI selections
[12] OR [13] are active
and the requested
direction matches the
reference sign
3 00000008 8 Ctrl.Card Temp ServiceTrip, Ctrl.Card Temp reserved Slow Down Profibus OFF2
(A65) (reserved) (W65) slow down command active
active, e.g. via CTW bit 11
or DI
4 00000010 16 Ctrl. Word TO ServiceTrip, Ctrl. Word TO Catch Up Profibus OFF3
(A17) (reserved) (W17) catch up command active
active, e.g. via CTW bit 12
or DI
5 00000020 32 Over Current reserved Over Current reserved Feedback High Relay 123
(A13) (W13) feedback > 4-57 active
6 00000040 64 Torque Limit reserved Torque Limit reserved Feedback Low Start
(A12) (W12) feedback < 4-56 Prevented
7 00000080 128 Motor Th Over reserved Motor Th Over reserved Output Current High Control Ready
(A11) (W11) current > 4-51
8 00000100 256 Motor ETR reserved Motor ETR Over reserved Output Current Low Drive Ready
Over (A10) (W10) current < 4-50
9 00000200 512 Inverter Overld. Discharge High Inverter Overld Discharge Output Freq High Quick Stop
(A9) (W9) High speed > 4-53
10 00000400 1024 DC under Volt Start Failed DC under Volt Multi-motor Output Freq Low DC Brake
(A8) (W8) underload speed < 4-52
11 00000800 2048 DC over Volt Speed Limit DC over Volt Multi-motor Brake Check OK Stop
(A7) (W7) Overload brake test NOT ok
12 00001000 4096 Short Circuit External DC Voltage Compressor Braking Max Stand by
(A16) Interlock Low (W6) Interlock BrakePower > BrakePo-
werLimit (2-12)
13 00002000 8192 Inrush Fault Illegal Option DC Voltage Mechanical Braking Freeze Output
(A33) Combi. High (W5) Brake Sliding Request
14 00004000 16384 Mains ph. Loss No Safety Mains ph. Loss Safe Option Out of Speed Range Freeze Output
(A4) Option (W4) Warning
15 00008000 32768 AMA Not OK reserved No Motor (W3) Auto DC OVC Active Jog Request
Braking
214 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Bit Hex Dec Alarm Word Alarm Word 2 Warning Warning Extended Extended
Word Word 2 Status Word Status Word
2
16 00010000 65536 Live Zero Error reserved Live Zero Error AC Brake Jog
(A2) (W2)
17 00020000 131072 Internal Fault KTY error 10V Low (W1) KTY Warn Password Timelock Start Request
(A38) number of allowed
password trials exceeded
- timelock active
18 00040000 262144 Brake Overload Fans error Brake Overload Fans Warn Password Protection Start
(A26) (W26) 0-61 = ALL_NO_ACCESS
OR BUS_NO_ACCESS OR
BUS_READONLY 5 5
19 00080000 524288 U phase Loss ECB error Brake Resistor ECB Warn Reference High Start Applied
(A30) (W25) reference > 4-55
20 00100000 1048576 V phase Loss Hoist Brake IGBT Hoist Reference Low Start delay
(A31) mechanical (W27) mechanical reference < 4-54
brake (A22) brake (W22)
21 00200000 2097152 W phase Loss reserved Speed Limit reserved Local Reference Sleep
(A32) (W49) reference site = REMOTE -
> auto on pressed &
active
22 00400000 4194304 Fieldbus Fault reserved Fieldbus Fault reserved Protection mode notifi- Sleep Boost
(A34) (W34) cation
23 00800000 8388608 24 V Supply reserved 24V Supply reserved Unused Running
Low (A47) Low (W47)
24 01000000 16777216 Mains Failure reserved Mains Failure reserved Unused Drive Bypass
(A36) (W36)
25 02000000 33554432 1.8V Supply Current Limit Current Limit reserved Unused Fire Mode
Low (A48) (A59) (W59)
26 04000000 67108864 Brake Resistor Motor Rota-ting Low Temp reserved Unused External
(A25) Unexpectedly (W66) Interlock
(A122)
27 08000000 134217728 Brake IGBT reserved Voltage Limit reserved Unused Firemode
(A27) (W64) Limit Exceed
28 10000000 268435456 Option Change reserved Encoder loss reserved Unused Flying Start
(A67) (W90) active
29 20000000 536870912 Drive Initialised Encoder loss Output freq. BackEMF too Unused
(A80) (A90) lim. (W62) High
30 40000000 1073741824 Safe Stop (A68) PTC Thermi-stor Safe Stop PTC Thermi- Unused
(A74) (W68) stor (W74)
31 80000000 2147483648 Mech. brake Dangerous Extended Protection Mode
low (A63) failure (A72) Status Word
Table 5.3 Description of Alarm Word, Warning Word and Extended Status Word
The alarm words, warning words and extended status words can be read out via serial bus or optional fieldbus for
diagnostics. See also parameter 16-94 Ext. Status Word.
WARNING 1, 10 Volts low Troubleshooting
The control card voltage is below 10 V from terminal 50. Remove the wiring from terminal 50. If the
Remove some of the load from terminal 50, as the 10 V warning clears, the problem is with the wiring. If
supply is overloaded. Max. 15 mA or minimum 590 . the warning does not clear, replace the control
card.
A short circuit in a connected potentiometer or improper
wiring of the potentiometer can cause this condition.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 215

WARNING/ALARM 2, Live zero error WARNING/ALARM 8, DC under voltage

This warning or alarm only appears if programmed in If the DC-link voltage drops below the undervoltage limit,
6-01 Live Zero Timeout Function. The signal on one of the the frequency converter checks if a 24 V DC backup supply
analog inputs is less than 50% of the minimum value is connected. If no 24 V DC backup supply is connected,
programmed for that input. Broken wiring or faulty device the frequency converter trips after a fixed time delay. The
sending the signal can cause this condition. time delay varies with unit size.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Check connections on all the analog input Check that the supply voltage matches the
terminals. Control card terminals 53 and 54 for frequency converter voltage.
signals, terminal 55 common. MCB 101 terminals
11 and 12 for signals, terminal 10 common. MCB
Perform input voltage test.
Perform soft charge circuit test.

5 5
109 terminals 1, 3, 5 for signals, terminals 2, 4, 6
common). WARNING/ALARM 9, Inverter overload
The frequency converter is about to cut out because of an
Check that the frequency converter programming
and switch settings match the analog signal type. overload (too high current for too long). The counter for
electronic, thermal inverter protection issues a warning at
Perform input terminal signal test. 98% and trips at 100%, while giving an alarm. The
frequency converter cannot be reset until the counter is
WARNING/ALARM 3, No motor
below 90%.
No motor has been connected to the output of the
The fault is that the frequency converter has run with
more than 100% overload for too long.
WARNING/ALARM 4, Mains phase loss
A phase is missing on the supply side, or the mains Troubleshooting
voltage imbalance is too high. This message also appears Compare the output current shown on the LCP
with the frequency converter rated current.
for a fault in the input rectifier on the frequency converter.
Options are programmed at 14-12 Function at Mains Compare the output current shown on the LCP
Imbalance. with measured motor current.
Troubleshooting Display the thermal drive load on the LCP and
Check the supply voltage and supply currents to monitor the value. When running above the
the frequency converter. frequency converter continuous current rating,
the counter increases. When running below the
WARNING 5, DC link voltage high
frequency converter continuous current rating,
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is higher than the
the counter decreases.
high-voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active. WARNING/ALARM 10, Motor overload temperature
According to the electronic thermal protection (ETR), the
WARNING 6, DC link voltage low
motor is too hot. Select whether the frequency converter
The intermediate circuit voltage (DC) is lower than the low-
issues a warning or an alarm when the counter reaches
voltage warning limit. The limit is dependent on the
100% in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. The fault occurs
frequency converter voltage rating. The unit is still active.
when the motor runs with more than 100% overload for
WARNING/ALARM 7, DC overvoltage too long.
If the intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the limit, the
frequency converter trips after a time. Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating.
Troubleshooting
Connect a brake resistor Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded
Extend the ramp time Check that the motor current set in 1-24 Motor
Current is correct.
Change the ramp type
Ensure that Motor data in parameters 1-20 to
Activate the functions in 2-10 Brake Function 1-25 are set correctly.
Increase 14-26 Trip Delay at Inverter Fault
If an external fan is in use, check in
If the alarm/warning occurs during a power sag, parameter 1-91 Motor External Fan that it is
use kinetic back-up (parameter 14-10 Mains selected.
Failure)
Running AMA in 1-29 Automatic Motor Adaptation
(AMA) tunes the frequency converter to the
motor more accurately and reduces thermal
loading.
216 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

WARNING/ALARM 11, Motor thermistor over temp ALARM 14, Earth (ground) fault
Check whether the thermistor is disconnected. Select There is current from the output phases to ground, either
whether the frequency converter issues a warning or an in the cable between the frequency converter and the
alarm in 1-90 Motor Thermal Protection. motor or in the motor itself.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting
Check for motor overheating. Remove power to the frequency converter and
repair the earth fault.
Check if the motor is mechanically overloaded.
Check for earth faults in the motor by measuring
When using terminal 53 or 54, check that the
the resistance to ground of the motor leads and
thermistor is connected correctly between either
the motor with a megohmmeter.
terminal 53 or 54 (analog voltage input) and
terminal 50 (+10 V supply). Also check that the ALARM 15, Hardware mismatch
terminal switch for 53 or 54 is set for voltage. A fitted option is not operational with the present control 5 5
Check parameter 1-93 Thermistor Source selects board hardware or software.
terminal 53 or 54. Record the value of the following parameters and contact
When using digital inputs 18 or 19, check that Danfoss:
the thermistor is connected correctly between
either terminal 18 or 19 (digital input PNP only)
parameter 15-40 FC Type
and terminal 50. Check parameter 1-93 Thermistor parameter 15-41 Power Section
Source selects terminal 18 or 19. parameter 15-42 Voltage
WARNING/ALARM 12, Torque limit

15-43 Software Version
The torque has exceeded the value in 4-16 Torque Limit 15-45 Actual Typecode String
Motor Mode or the value in 4-17 Torque Limit Generator 15-49 SW ID Control Card
Mode. 14-25 Trip Delay at Torque Limit can change this
warning from a warning-only condition to a warning
15-50 SW ID Power Card
followed by an alarm. 15-60 Option Mounted
Troubleshooting 15-61 Option SW Version (for each option slot)

If the motor torque limit is exceeded during ramp ALARM 16, Short circuit
up, extend the ramp up time. There is short-circuiting in the motor or motor wiring.
If the generator torque limit is exceeded during Remove power to the frequency converter and repair the
ramp down, extend the ramp down time. short circuit.
If torque limit occurs while running, possibly WARNING/ALARM 17, Control word timeout
increase the torque limit. Make sure that the There is no communication to the frequency converter.
system can operate safely at a higher torque. The warning is only active when parameter 8-04 Control
Check the application for excessive current draw Word Timeout Function is NOT set to [0] Off.
on the motor. If parameter 8-04 Control Word Timeout Function is set to [5]
Stop and Trip, a warning appears and the frequency
WARNING/ALARM 13, Over current
converter ramps down until it stops then displays an
The inverter peak current limit (approximately 200% of the
alarm.
rated current) is exceeded. The warning lasts about 1.5 s,
then the frequency converter trips and issues an alarm. Troubleshooting
Shock loading or quick acceleration with high inertia loads Check connections on the serial communication
can cause this fault. If the acceleration during ramp up is cable.
quick, the fault can also appear after kinetic back-up. If Increase 8-03 Control Word Timeout Time
extended mechanical brake control is selected, trip can be
reset externally. Check the operation of the communication
equipment.
Troubleshooting
Remove power and check if the motor shaft can Verify a proper installation based on EMC
requirements.
be turned.
WARNING/ALARM 20, Temp. input error
Check that the motor size matches the frequency
The temperature sensor is not connected.
converter.
WARNING/ALARM 21, Parameter error
Check parameters 1-20 to 1-25 for correct motor
The parameter is out of range. The parameter number is
data.
reported in the LCP.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 217

Troubleshooting WARNING/ALARM 27, Brake chopper fault

The affected parameter must be set to a valid The brake transistor is monitored during operation and if a
value. short circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and a
warning is issued. The frequency converter is still
WARNING/ALARM 22, Hoist mechanical brake
operational but, since the brake transistor has short-
Report value shows what kind it is.
circuited, substantial power is transmitted to the brake
0 = The torque ref. was not reached before time out
resistor, even if it is inactive.
(Parameter 2-27).
1 = Expected brake feedback not received before time out Troubleshooting
(Parameters 2-23, 2-25). Remove power to the frequency converter and
remove the brake resistor.
WARNING 23, Internal fan fault
The fan warning function is an extra protective function WARNING/ALARM 28, Brake check failed
5 5 that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
The brake resistor is not connected or not working.
Check 2-15 Brake Check.
For the D, E, and F Frame filters, the regulated voltage to ALARM 29, Heat Sink temp
the fans is monitored. The maximum temperature of the heat sink has been
exceeded. The temperature fault does not reset until the
Troubleshooting
temperature falls below a defined heatsink temperature.
Check for proper fan operation. The trip and reset points are different based on the
Cycle power to the frequency converter and frequency converter power size.
check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
Troubleshooting
Check the sensors on the heat sink and control Check for the following conditions.
card.
Ambient temperature too high.
WARNING 24, External fan fault
Motor cable too long.
The fan warning function is an extra protective function
that checks if the fan is running/mounted. The fan warning Incorrect airflow clearance above and below the
can be disabled in 14-53 Fan Monitor ([0] Disabled).
Troubleshooting Blocked airflow around the frequency converter.
Check for proper fan operation. Damaged heatsink fan.
Cycle power to the frequency converter and Dirty heat sink.

check that the fan operates briefly at start-up.
ALARM 30, Motor phase U missing
Check the sensors on the heat sink and control Motor phase U between the frequency converter and the
card. motor is missing.
WARNING 25, Brake resistor short circuit Remove power from the frequency converter and check
The brake resistor is monitored during operation. If a short motor phase U.
circuit occurs, the brake function is disabled and the
ALARM 31, Motor phase V missing
warning appears. The frequency converter is still Motor phase V between the frequency converter and the
operational, but without the brake function. motor is missing.
Troubleshooting Remove power from the frequency converter and check
Remove power to the frequency converter and motor phase V.
replace the brake resistor (see
parameter 2-15 Brake Check). ALARM 32, Motor phase W missing
Motor phase W between the frequency converter and the
WARNING/ALARM 26, Brake resistor power limit motor is missing.
The power transmitted to the brake resistor is calculated as
a mean value over the last 120 s of run time. The Remove power from the frequency converter and check
calculation is based on the intermediate circuit voltage and motor phase W.
the brake resistance value set in 2-16 AC brake Max. ALARM 33, Inrush fault
Current. The warning is active when the dissipated braking Too many power-ups have occurred within a short time
power is higher than 90% of the brake resistance power. If period. Let the unit cool to operating temperature.
[2] Trip is selected in parameter 2-13 Brake Power
WARNING/ALARM 34, Fieldbus communication fault
Monitoring, the frequency converter trips when the
The fieldbus on the communication option card is not
dissipated braking power reaches 100%.
working.
218 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

WARNING/ALARM 35, Option fault No. Text

An option alarm is received. The alarm is option-specific. 3072-5122 Parameter value is outside its limits
The most likely cause is a power-up or a communication 5123 Option in slot A: Hardware incompatible with
fault. control board hardware
WARNING/ALARM 36, Mains failure 5124 Option in slot B: Hardware incompatible with
This warning/alarm is only active if the supply voltage to control board hardware
the frequency converter is lost and 14-10 Mains Failure is 5125 Option in slot C0: Hardware incompatible with
not set to [0] No Function. Check the fuses to the control board hardware
frequency converter and mains supply to the unit. 5126 Option in slot C1: Hardware incompatible with
control board hardware
ALARM 37, Phase imbalance
5376-6231 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or
There is a current imbalance between the power units
5 5
Danfoss Service Department.
ALARM 38, Internal fault
When an internal fault occurs, a code number defined in Table 5.4 Internal Fault Codes
Table 5.4 is displayed.
ALARM 39, Heat Sink sensor
Troubleshooting
No feedback from the heat sink temperature sensor.
Cycle power
The signal from the IGBT thermal sensor is not available on
Check that the option is properly installed
the power card. The problem could be on the power card,
Check for loose or missing wiring on the gate drive card, or the ribbon cable between the
It may be necessary to contact your Danfoss supplier or power card and gate drive card.
service department. Note the code number for further WARNING 40, Overload of digital output terminal 27
troubleshooting directions. Check the load connected to terminal 27 or remove short-
circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
No. Text
5-01 Terminal 27 Mode.
0 Serial port cannot be initialised. Contact your
Danfoss supplier or Danfoss Service Department. WARNING 41, Overload of digital output terminal 29
256-258 Power EEPROM data is defective or too old. Check the load connected to terminal 29 or remove short-
Replace power card. circuit connection. Check 5-00 Digital I/O Mode and
512-519 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or 5-02 Terminal 29 Mode.
Danfoss Service Department. WARNING 42, Overload of digital output on X30/6 or
783 Parameter value outside of min/max limits overload of digital output on X30/7
1024-1284 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or the For X30/6, check the load connected to X30/6 or remove
Danfoss Service Department. the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-32 Term
1299 Option SW in slot A is too old X30/6 Digi Out (MCB 101).
1300 Option SW in slot B is too old For X30/7, check the load connected to X30/7 or remove
1302 Option SW in slot C1 is too old the short-circuit connection. Check parameter 5-33 Term
1315 Option SW in slot A is not supported (not allowed) X30/7 Digi Out (MCB 101).
1316 Option SW in slot B is not supported (not allowed)
ALARM 43, Ext. supply
1318 Option SW in slot C1 is not supported (not
MCB 113 Ext. Relay Option is mounted without ext. 24 V
allowed)
DC. Either connect an ext. 24 V DC supply or specify that
1379-2819 Internal fault. Contact your Danfoss supplier or no external supply is used via parameter 14-80 Option
Danfoss Service Department. Supplied by External 24VDC [0]. A change in
1792 HW reset of DSP parameter 14-80 Option Supplied by External 24VDC requires
1793 Motor derived parameters not transferred correctly a power cycle.
to DSP
ALARM 45, Earth fault 2
1794 Power data not transferred correctly at power up
Ground fault.
to DSP
1795 The DSP has received too many unknown SPI Troubleshooting
telegrams Check for proper grounding and loose
1796 RAM copy error connections.
2561 Replace control card Check for proper wire size.
2820 LCP stack overflow
2821 Serial port overflow
Check motor cables for short-circuits or leakage
currents.
2822 USB port overflow
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 219

ALARM 46, Power card supply ALARM 57, AMA internal fault
The supply on the power card is out of range. Try to restart AMA again. Repeated restarts can over heat
the motor.
There are 3 power supplies generated by the switch mode
power supply (SMPS) on the power card: 24 V, 5 V, 18 V. ALARM 58, AMA Internal fault
When powered with 24 V DC with the MCB 107 option, Contact the Danfoss supplier.
only the 24 V and 5 V supplies are monitored. When WARNING 59, Current limit
powered with 3-phase mains voltage, all 3 supplies are The current is higher than the value in 4-18 Current Limit.
monitored. Ensure that motor data in parameters 120 to 125 are set
Troubleshooting correctly. Possibly increase the current limit. Be sure that
Check for a defective power card. the system can operate safely at a higher limit.
Check for a defective control card. WARNING 60, External interlock

5 5 Check for a defective option card.
A digital input signal is indicating a fault condition external
to the frequency converter. An external interlock has
If a 24 V DC power supply is used, verify proper commanded the frequency converter to trip. Clear the
supply power. external fault condition. To resume normal operation,
WARNING 47, 24 V supply low apply 24 V DC to the terminal programmed for external
The 24 V DC is measured on the control card. This alarm interlock. Reset the frequency converter.
arises when the detected voltage of terminal 12 is lower WARNING/ALARM 61, Feedback error
than 18 V. An error between calculated speed and speed
Troubleshooting measurement from feedback device. The function Warning/
Check for a defective control card. Alarm/Disabling setting is in parameter 4-30 Motor
Feedback Loss Function. Accepted error setting in
WARNING 48, 1.8 V supply low
parameter 4-31 Motor Feedback Speed Error and the allowed
The 1.8 V DC supply used on the control card is outside of
time the error occur setting in parameter 4-32 Motor
allowable limits. The power supply is measured on the
Feedback Loss Timeout. During a commissioning procedure
control card. Check for a defective control card. If an
the function may be effective.
option card is present, check for an overvoltage condition.
WARNING 62, Output frequency at maximum limit
WARNING 49, Speed limit
The output frequency has reached the value set in
When the speed is not within the specified range in
4-19 Max Output Frequency. Check the application to
4-11 Motor Speed Low Limit [RPM] and 4-13 Motor Speed
determine the cause. Possibly increase the output
High Limit [RPM], the frequency converter shows a warning.
frequency limit. Be sure the system can operate safely at a
When the speed is below the specified limit in 1-86 Trip
higher output frequency. The warning clears when the
Speed Low [RPM] (except when starting or stopping), the
output drops below the maximum limit.
frequency converter trips.
ALARM 63, Mechanical brake low
ALARM 50, AMA calibration failed
The actual motor current has not exceeded the release
Contact Danfoss supplier or Danfoss service department.
brake current within the start delay time window.
ALARM 51, AMA check Unom and Inom
WARNING 64, Voltage limit
The settings for motor voltage, motor current and motor
The combination of load and speed demands a motor
power are wrong. Check the settings in parameters 1-20 to
voltage higher than the actual DC link voltage.
1-25.
WARNING/ALARM 65, Control card over temperature
ALARM 52, AMA low Inom
The cut-out temperature of the control card is 80 C.
The motor current is too low. Check the settings.
Troubleshooting
ALARM 53, AMA motor too big
The motor is too big for the AMA to operate.
Check that the ambient operating temperature is
within limits
ALARM 54, AMA motor too small
The motor is too small for the AMA to operate.
Check for clogged filters
ALARM 55, AMA parameter out of range

Check fan operation
The parameter values of the motor are outside of the Check the control card
acceptable range. AMA cannot run. WARNING 66, Heat sink temperature low
ALARM 56, AMA interrupted by user The frequency converter is too cold to operate. This
The user has interrupted the AMA. warning is based on the temperature sensor in the IGBT
module.
220 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Increase the ambient temperature of the unit. Also, a ALARM 75, Illegal profile sel.
trickle amount of current can be supplied to the frequency Parameter value must not be written while motor is
converter whenever the motor is stopped by setting running. Stop motor before writing MCO profile to
2-00 DC Hold/Preheat Current at 5% and 1-80 Function at parameter 8-10 Control Word Profile for instance.
Stop
WARNING 76, Power unit setup
ALARM 67, Option module configuration has changed The required number of power units does not match the
One or more options have either been added or removed detected number of active power units.
since the last power-down. Check that the configuration
WARNING 77, Reduced power mode
change is intentional and reset the unit.
The frequency converter is operating in reduced power
ALARM 68, Safe Stop activated mode (less than the allowed number of inverter sections).
Safe Torque Off has been activated. To resume normal This warning is generated on power cycle when the
operation, apply 24 V DC to terminal 37, then send a reset
signal (via bus, digital I/O, or by pressing [Reset]).
frequency converter is set to run with fewer inverters, and
remains on.
5 5
ALARM 69, Power card temperature ALARM 78, Tracking error
The temperature sensor on the power card is either too The difference between set point value and actual value
hot or too cold. has exceeded the value in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error.
Disable the function by parameter 4-34 Tracking Error
Troubleshooting
Function or select an alarm/warning also in
Check that the ambient operating temperature is parameter 4-34 Tracking Error Function. Investigate the
within limits.
mechanics around the load and motor, check feedback
Check for clogged filters. connections from motor encoder to frequency
Check fan operation. converter. Select motor feedback function in
parameter 4-30 Motor Feedback Loss Function. Adjust
Check the power card.
tracking error band in parameter 4-35 Tracking Error and
ALARM 70, Illegal FC configuration parameter 4-37 Tracking Error Ramping.
The control card and power card are incompatible. To
ALARM 79, Illegal power section configuration
check compatibility, contact the Danfoss supplier with the
The scaling card has an incorrect part number or is not
type code of the unit from the nameplate and the part
installed. The MK102 connector on the power card could
numbers of the cards.
not be installed.
ALARM 71, PTC 1 safe stop
ALARM 80, Drive initialised to default value
Safe Torque Off has been activated from the PTC
Parameter settings are initialised to default settings after a
Thermistor Card MCB 112 (motor too warm). Normal
manual reset. To clear the alarm, reset the unit.
operation can be resumed when the MCB 112 applies 24 V
DC to Terminal 37 again (when the motor temperature ALARM 81, CSIV corrupt
reaches an acceptable level) and when the Digital Input CSIV file has syntax errors.
from the MCB 112 is deactivated. When that happens, a ALARM 82, CSIV parameter error
reset signal must be is be sent (via Bus, Digital I/O, or by CSIV failed to init a parameter.
pressing [Reset]).
ALARM 83, Illegal option combination
ALARM 72, Dangerous failure The mounted options are incompatible.
Safe Torque Off with trip lock. An unexpected combination
of Safe Torque Off commands has occurred: ALARM 84, No safety option
The safety option was removed without applying a general
MCB 112 VLT PTC Thermistor Card enables reset. Reconnect the safety option.
X44/10, but safe stop is not enabled.
ALARM 88, Option detection
MCB 112 is the only device using Safe Torque Off A change in the option layout was detected.
(specified through selection [4] or [5] in parameter 14-89 Option Detection is set to [0] Frozen config-
parameter 5-19 Terminal 37 Safe Stop), Safe Torque uration and the option layout has been changed.
Off is activated, and X44/10 is not activated.
To apply the change, enable option layout
WARNING 73, Safe Stop auto restart changes in parameter 14-89 Option Detection.
Safe stopped. With automatic restart enabled, the motor
could start when the fault is cleared. Alternatively, restore the correct option configu-
ration.
ALARM 74, PTC Thermistor
Alarm related to the ATEX option. The PTC is not working. WARNING 89, Mechanical brake sliding
The hoist brake monitor has detected a motor speed > 10
RPM.
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 221

ALARM 90, Feedback monitor WARNING 250, New spare part

Check the connection to encoder/resolver option and A component in the frequency converter has been
eventually replace the MCB 102 or MCB 103. replaced. Reset the frequency converter for normal
operation.
ALARM 91, Analog input 54 wrong settings
Switch S202 has to be set in position OFF (voltage input) WARNING 251, New typecode
when a KTY sensor is connected to analog input terminal The power card or other components have been replaced
54. and the typecode changed. Reset to remove the warning
and resume normal operation.
ALARM 99, Locked rotor
Rotor is blocked.
WARNING/ALARM 104, Mixing fan fault
The fan is not operating. The fan monitor checks that the
5 5 fan is spinning at power-up or whenever the mixing fan is
turned on. The mixing-fan fault can be configured as a
warning or an alarm trip by parameter 14-53 Fan Monitor.
Troubleshooting
Cycle power to the frequency converter to
determine if the warning/alarm returns.
WARNING/ALARM 122, Mot. rotat. unexp.
Frequency converter is performing a function that requires
the motor to be at standstill, e.g. DC hold for PM motors.
WARNING 123, Motor Mod. Changed
The motor selected in parameter 1-11 Motor Model is not
correct and the selection has been corrected
WARNING 163, ATEX ETR cur.lim.warning
The frequency converter has run above the characteristic
curve for more than 50 s. The warning is activated at 83%
and de-activated at 65% of the permitted thermal
overload.
ALARM 164, ATEX ETR cur.lim.alarm
Operating above the characteristic curve for more than 60
s within a period of 600 s activates the alarm and the
frequency converter trips.
WARNING 165, ATEX ETR freq.lim.warning
The frequency converter is running more than 50 s below
the permitted minimum frequency (parameter 1-98 ATEX
ETR interpol. points freq. [0]).
ALARM 166, ATEX ETR freq.lim.alarm
The frequency converter has operated more than 60 s (in a
period of 600 s) below the permitted minimum frequency
(parameter 1-98 ATEX ETR interpol. points freq. [0]).
ALARM 246, Power card supply
This alarm is only for F Frame frequency converters. It is
equivalent to Alarm 46. The report value in the alarm log
indicates which power module generated the alarm:
1 = left most inverter module.
2 = middle inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
2 = right inverter module in F1 or F3 frequency
converter.
3 = right inverter module in F2 or F4 frequency
converter.
5 = rectifier module.
222 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Index VLT AutomationDrive FC 301/302 Programming Guide
Index Control
cables................................................................................................... 10
card..................................................................................................... 216
A principle.............................................................................................. 36
Abbreviations.......................................................................................... 3 Conventions............................................................................................. 4
Abs. Enc. Interface, 17-2*............................................................... 165 Cooling.................................................................................................... 54
Adjustable Warnings, 4-5*.............................................................. 77 Copy/Save, 0-5*................................................................................... 34
Adv. Ctrl. Word Settings, 8-1*................................................................ 115
Motor Data, 1-3*............................................................................... 41
Current
Start Adjust, 30-2*......................................................................... 169
Limit Control, 14-3*...................................................................... 148
Advanced Process PID Ctrl., 7-4*................................................ 112 rating.................................................................................................. 216
Alarm
Log, 15-3*......................................................................................... 155
Messages.......................................................................................... 211 D
Data
AMA............................................................................................... 216, 220 Log Settings, 15-1*........................................................................ 153
Analog Readouts 2, 18-**........................................................................... 167
I/O Mode, 6-0*................................................................................ 100 Readouts, 16-**.............................................................................. 159
input................................................................................................... 216 DC-Brakes............................................................................................... 57
Input 1, 6-1*..................................................................................... 100
Input 2, 6-2*..................................................................................... 101 DC-link................................................................................................... 216
Input 3 MCB 101............................................................................. 102 Default
Input 4 MCB 101............................................................................. 102 settings................................................................................................ 22
Input X48/2 (MCB 114), 35-4*.................................................... 172 Settings............................................................................................. 174
inputs...................................................................................................... 5
DeviceNet CAN Fieldbus, 10-**................................................... 123
Output 1, 6-5*................................................................................. 103
Output 2 MCB 101......................................................................... 103 Diagnosis Read-Outs, 16-9*......................................................... 164
Output 3 MCB 113, 6-7*.............................................................. 105 Digital
Output 4 MCB 113, 6-8*.............................................................. 106 I/O Mode, 5-0*................................................................................... 80
signal.................................................................................................. 216 input................................................................................................... 217
Inputs, 5-1*......................................................................................... 80
Pot.Meter, 3-9*.................................................................................. 72
B
Brake Digital/Bus, 8-5*................................................................................ 120
control............................................................................................... 217 Display Mode........................................................................................ 15
Energy Funct...................................................................................... 58
Drive
power...................................................................................................... 5
Identification, 15-4*...................................................................... 156
resistor............................................................................................... 216
Status, 16-3*.................................................................................... 160
Braking.................................................................................................. 218
Break-away torque................................................................................ 5
E
Bus Energy Optimising, 14-4*.............................................................. 149
Controlled, 5-9*................................................................................ 98
Jog, 8-9*............................................................................................ 122 Environment, 14-5*.......................................................................... 149
Ethernet, 12-**................................................................................... 123
C ETR........................................................................................................... 160
Catch up.................................................................................................. 82 Ext. Process PID Ctrl., 7-5*............................................................. 112
Clockwise................................................................................................ 49
Coasting....................................................................................... 4, 14, 80 F
Communication option.................................................................. 218 FC
MC Protocol Set, 8-4*................................................................... 118
Comparators, 13-1*......................................................................... 128 Port Diagnostics, 8-8*.................................................................. 122
Compatibility, Port Settings, 8-3*......................................................................... 117
14-7*................................................................................................... 151 Feedback.............................................................................................. 219
30-8*................................................................................................... 170
Fieldbus & FC Port, 16-8*............................................................... 163
Configuration..................................................................................... 114
Freeze output................................................................................... 4, 80
Fuses....................................................................................................... 219
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 223

Mechanical brake................................................................................ 60
G Monitoring and Application, 17-6*........................................... 166
General Motor
settings................................................................................................ 36 current............................................................................................... 220
Settings, 8-0*................................................................................... 114 data........................................................................................... 216, 220
Status, 16-0*.................................................................................... 159 Data, 1-2*............................................................................................ 40
Graphical display................................................................................. 12 Feedb. Option, 17-**.................................................................... 165
Feedback Monitoring, 4-3*........................................................... 76
Limits, 4-1*.......................................................................................... 74
H power................................................................................................. 220
Heat sink............................................................................................... 219 protection........................................................................................... 52
Status, 16-1*.................................................................................... 159
Historic Log, 15-2*............................................................................ 155 Temperature, 1-9*............................................................................ 52
I N
I/O Options, 5-8*.................................................................................. 98 Numerical Local Control Panel...................................................... 21
Inc. Enc. Interface, 17-1*................................................................ 165
Indexed parameters........................................................................... 21
O
Indicator lights..................................................................................... 13 Operating
Initialisation........................................................................................... 22 Data, 15-0*....................................................................................... 153
mode.................................................................................................... 25
Input terminal.................................................................................... 216
Operation/Display, 0-**.................................................................... 25
Inputs and Outputs, 16-6*............................................................ 162
Option Ident. , 15*6*....................................................................... 156
Intermediate circuit......................................................................... 216
Options, 14-8*.................................................................................... 151
Inverter Switching, 14-0*.............................................................. 142
Other Ramps, 3-8*............................................................................... 71
Output
J current............................................................................................... 216
Jog................................................................................................................ 4 speed.................................................................................................... 49
L P
Language package............................................................................. 25 Parameter
Info, 15-9*......................................................................................... 157
LCP
selection.............................................................................................. 19
LCP.................................................................................. 4, 6, 12, 14, 21
Set-Up.................................................................................................. 16
Custom Readout, 0-3*.................................................................... 31
Display, 0-2*....................................................................................... 28 Password, 0-6*...................................................................................... 34
Keypad, 0-4*....................................................................................... 33
Phase loss............................................................................................. 216
Keys......................................................................................................... 1
Potentiometer Reference................................................................ 11
LEDs........................................................................................................... 12
Process
Load Depend. Setting, 1-6*............................................................ 47 Ctrl. Feedb., 7-2*............................................................................ 110
Local reference..................................................................................... 26 PID Ctrl., 7-3*................................................................................... 111
Logic Rules, 13-4*............................................................................. 133 Profibus, 9-**...................................................................................... 123
Programming..................................................................................... 216
M Protection Mode.................................................................................... 8
Main Pulse
Menu..................................................................................................... 16 Input, 5-5*........................................................................................... 95
Menu mode........................................................................................ 13 Outputs, 5-6*..................................................................................... 96
Menu Mode........................................................................................ 19 Start/Stop............................................................................................ 11
reactance............................................................................................. 41
Mains
On/Off, 14-1*................................................................................... 143 Q
supply..................................................................................................... 7 Quick
Menu.............................................................................................. 13, 16
MCB Menu mode................................................................................. 13, 16
113............................................................................... 85, 90, 105, 106
Transfer of Parameter Settings between Multiple Frequen-
114...................................................................................................... 171
cy Converters...... 14
224 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Symbols..................................................................................................... 3
R Synchronous motor speed................................................................ 4
Ramp
2, 3-5*................................................................................................... 69
3, 3-6*................................................................................................... 69 T
4, 3-7*................................................................................................... 70 Temp.
Input Mode (MCB 114), 35-0*.................................................... 171
Ramps, 3-4* Ramp 1........................................................................... 67
Input X48/10 (MCB 114), 35-3*................................................. 172
Rated motor speed............................................................................... 4 Input X48/4 (MCB 114), 35-1*.................................................... 171
Input X48/7 (MCB 114), 35-2*.................................................... 171
RCD.............................................................................................................. 6
Terminal
Ref. & Feedb., 16-5*......................................................................... 161
54......................................................................................................... 222
Reference Limits, 3-0*....................................................................... 64 X45/1 Output Min Scale, 6-71................................................... 106
Reference/Reference Limits/Ramps, 3-**................................. 64 X45/3 Output Min Scale, 6-81................................................... 107
References, 3-1*................................................................................... 65 Thermal load................................................................................ 45, 160
Relay outputs........................................................................................ 85 Thermistor......................................................................................... 52, 6
Relays, 5-4*............................................................................................ 90 Timers, 13-2*....................................................................................... 133
Reset............................................................................. 216, 217, 221, 14 Torque

Torque........................................................................................ 40, 217
Resolver Interface, 17-5*............................................................... 166 PI Control, 7-1*............................................................................... 110
RS Flip Flops, 13-1*.......................................................................... 131 Trip Reset, 14-2*................................................................................ 146
S V
Safety Precautions................................................................................ 7 Value......................................................................................................... 20
Screened/armoured........................................................................... 10 Voltage
Sensor imbalance......................................................................................... 216
Input Option parameters............................................................ 210 reference via a potentiometer.................................................... 11
Input Option, 35-**....................................................................... 171 VVCplus................................................................................................. 4, 6
Serial communication.......................................................................... 5
Set-up operations, 0-1*.................................................................... 26
W
Short circuit......................................................................................... 217 Warnings.............................................................................................. 211
Smart Wobble Function, 30-0*................................................................. 168
Application Setup (SAS)................................................................. 19
Logic Control, 13-**...................................................................... 124
Special
Features, 30-**................................................................................ 168
Settings, 1-1*..................................................................................... 38
Speed
Bypass, 4-6*........................................................................................ 78
PID Ctrl............................................................................................... 108
Up/Down............................................................................................. 11
Start
Adjustments, 1-7*............................................................................ 49
delay..................................................................................................... 49
function............................................................................................... 49
Start/Stop............................................................................................... 10
States, 13-5*........................................................................................ 138
Stator leakage reactance................................................................. 41
Status
Status.................................................................................................... 13
messages............................................................................................. 12
Step-by-Step......................................................................................... 20
Stop Adjustments, 1-8*.................................................................... 50
Supply voltage................................................................................... 219
MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 225

www.danfoss.com/drives
Danfoss can accept no responsibility for possible errors in catalogues, brochures and other printed material. Danfoss reserves the right to alter its products without notice. This also applies to
products already on order provided that such alterations can be made without subsequential changes being necessary in specifications already agreed. All trademarks in this material are property
of the respective companies. Danfoss and the Danfoss logotype are trademarks of Danfoss A/S. All rights reserved.
130R0334 MG33MI02 Rev. 2013-11-20
*MG33MI02*

Mg33mi02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mg33mi02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mg33mi02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MAKING MODERN LIVING POSSIBLE

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 1

3.7 Parameters: 5-** Digital In/Out 80

4 Parameter Lists 174

2 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1.1 Software Version CM Common mode

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 3

1 1 Pbr,cont. Rated power of the brake resistor (average IVLT,N

4 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 5

1 1 LCP Smart Logic Control (SLC)

6 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 7

1 1 WARNING circumstances be the primary safety circuit. Comply with

8 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1.6 Electrical Wiring 1 1

88 (-) Switch Mode

Illustration 1.2 Basic Wiring Schematic Drawing

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 9

1 1 Input polarity of control terminals

Digital input wiring

Illustration 1.3 PNP (Source)

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input [8] Start

Illustration 1.4 NPN (Sink)

NOTICE Start/Stop Safe Stop

Control cables must be screened/armoured.

See section Grounding of Screened Control Cables in the

10 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

1.6.2 Pulse Start/Stop 1 1

Terminal 18 = 5-10 Terminal 18 Digital Input, [9] Latched

Terminal 27= 5-12 Terminal 27 Digital Input, [6] Stop inverse.

Illustration 1.8 Speed Up/Down

Start Stop inverse Safe Stop

Voltage reference via a potentiometer

Illustration 1.7 Pulse Start/Stop

1.6.3 Speed Up/Down Ref. voltage

Terminals 29/32 = Speed up/down

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 11

All data is displayed in a graphical LCP display, which can

b. Line 1-2: Operator data lines displaying data

If some operation is delaying the start-up, the LCP

12 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

2.1.1 The LCD-Display

parameter 0-60 Main Menu Password or via Quick Set-up

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 13

[Alarm Log] [Hand On]

Once the set-up of a frequency converter is complete,

14 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

2.1.3 Display Mode

2.1.4 Display Mode - Selection of Read-

el It is possible to toggle between 3 status read-out screens

Table 2.1 shows the measurements that can be linked to

Illustration 2.9 LCP

NOTICE Parameter 16-16 Torque [Nm] Nm

MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20 15

Operating variable Unit

Parameter 16-53 Digi Pot Reference 6.9 Hz

16 MG33MI02 - Rev. 2013-11-20

Select Changes made to get information about: